C-14 Curriculum - MAHAVEER INSTITUTE of Science &

DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
C-14 Curriculum
Structure of DECE in C-14 Curriculum
Sl No
Sub
Code
EC101
I YEAR
Subject
III SEMESTER
Subject
IV SEMESTER
Subject
V SEMESTER
Subject
EC102
Mathematics – I*
EC302
Electronic Circuits
EC
402
Linear Integrated
Circuits
EC
502
3
EC103
Engineering Physics
EC303
EC
403
Network Analysis
EC
503
4
EC
104
EC304
EC
404
Digital
Communication
5
EC105
EC305
Digital Electronics
EC
405
6
EC106
Engineering
Chemistry
&Environmental
Studies
Basic Electrical
&Electronic
Engineering
Engineering
materials
&Practices
Electronic
Measuring
Instruments
Analogue
communication
EC306
Electrical
Technology
7
EC107
Engineering Drawing
EC307
8
EC108
109A
109B
EC110
Basic Electronics
workshop
Physics Lab
Chemistry Lab
Computer
fundamentals Lab
10
Mathematics - III
Sub
Code
EC
501
2
9
Mathematics - II
Sub
Code
EC
401
Advanced
Communication
systems
Consumer
Electronics
1
English
Sub
Code
EC301
Sub
Code
EC
601
VI SEMESTER
Subject
Industrial
Management
EC
602
Industrial Electronics
Computer
Hardware
EC
603
EC
504
Optical Fibre
Communication
EC
604
Electronic Product
Design &Quality
Assurance
Mobile
Communications
EC
505
Microcontroller
Applications
EC
605
EC4
06
Microprocessor&
Microcontroller
Programming
Programming in
C
EC
506
EC
606
EDC lab
EC
407
Linear Integrated
Circuits Lab
EC
507
EC308
EC309
Analogue
Communication Lab
Digital Electronics
&eCAD tools lab
EC
408
EC
409
Communication
Skills
Digital
Communication
Lab
EC
508
EC
509
Data
communication&
Computer
Networking
Computer HW
+OFC Networking
Lab
Life Skills
EC310
Electrical Lab
EC
410
C and Matlab
EC
510
Microcontroller
applications lab
Field practices
Advanced
Microcontrollers
&DSP
Digital Circuit
Design through
Verilog HDL
EC
607
Industrial Electronics
Lab
EC
608
EC
609
Verilog HDL
Programming
Advanced
Microcontroller
Lab
EC
610
Project work
DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATIONS
Subject
Code
Name of the Subject
(FIRST YEAR)
Instruction
period / week
Total
Period
Practical
/ year
Theory
/Tutorial
Scheme of Examination
Duration
(hours)
Sessional
Marks
End
Exam
Marks
Total
Marks
THEORY:
3
100
3
100
3
100
3
100
3
100
3
100
3
100
3
100
90
3
(1.5+1.5)
100
(50+50)
3
90
3
100
18
1260
EC-101
English
3
-
90
EC-102
Engineering
Mathematics - I
5
-
150
4
-
120
4
-
120
4
-
120
4
-
120
-
6
180
-
6
180
-
3
24
EC-103 Engineering Physics
Engineering Chemistry
EC-104 &Environmental
Studies
Basic Electrical &
EC-105 Electronics
Engineering
Engineering Materials
EC-106 & Practices
PRACTICAL:
Engineering Drawing
EC-107 Practice
Basic Electronic
EC-108 Workshop Practice
109-A Engineering
Physics Lab practice
EC-109 109-B Engineering
Chemistry Lab practice
Computer
EC-110 fundamentals Lab
practice
TOTAL
I -1
1000
DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION ENGINEERINGSCHEME OF
INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATIONS
III Semester
Instruction
Subject
Code
period / week
Name of the Subject
Total
Period
/ Sem
Scheme of Examination
Duration
(hours)
Session
al Marks
End
Exam
Marks
Marks
60
3
20
80
100
-
60
3
20
80
100
4
-
60
3
20
80
100
4
-
60
3
20
80
100
Digital Electronics
4
-
60
3
20
80
100
Electrical Technology
4
_
60
3
20
80
100
EDC lab
-
6
90
3
40
60
100
Analogue Communication
Lab
Digital Electronics & CAD
tools lab
Electrical Technolgy Lab
-
3
45
3
40
60
100
-
6
90
3
40
60
100
-
3
45
3
40
60
100
24
18
630
280
720
1000
Theor
y
Practical
/Tutorial
Mathematics - II
4
-
Electronic Devices &
Circuits
Electronic Measuring
Instruments
Analogue communication
4
Total
THEORY:
EC- 301
EC -302
EC -303
EC-304
EC-305
EC-306
PRACTICAL:
EC-307
EC-308
EC-309
EC-310
TOTAL
I -2
DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION ENGINEERINGSCHEME OF
INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATIONS
IV Semester
Instruction
Subject
Code
period / week
Name of the Subject
Theory
Practical
/Tutorial
Total
Period
/ Sem
Scheme of Examination
Duration
(hours)
Sessional
Marks
End
Exam
Marks
Marks
3
20
80
100
3
20
80
100
3
20
80
100
3
20
80
100
3
20
80
100
3
20
80
100
3
40
60
100
3
40
60
100
Total
THEORY:
Mathematics - III
4
60
EC - 402
Linear Integrated
Circuits
5
75
EC - 403
Network Analysis
5
75
EC - 404
Digital
Communications
4
60
EC - 405
Microprocessor &
Microcontroller
Programming
4
60
4
60
EC - 401
Programming in C
EC - 406
PRACTICAL:
EC - 407
Linear Integrated
Circuits Lab
-
4
60
EC - 408
Communication
Skills
-
3
45
-
6
90
3
40
60
100
3
45
3
40
60
100
16
630
280
720
1000
EC - 409
EC - 410
Digital Communication
Lab
C and Matlab
TOTAL
26
I -3
DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION ENGINEERINGSCHEME OF
INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATIONS
V Semester
Subject
Code
Instruction
Name of the Subject
period / week
Theory Practical/
Tutorial
Total
Period
/ Sem
Scheme of Examination
Duration
(hours)
Sessional
Marks
End
Exam
THEORY:
Total
Marks
Advanced
Communications
4
-
60
3
20
80
100
Consumer Electronics
4
-
60
3
20
80
100
Computer Hardware
4
-
60
3
20
80
100
EC-504
Optical Fibre
Communication
4
-
60
3
20
80
100
EC-505
Microcontroller
Applications
4
-
60
3
20
80
100
EC-506
Data communication &
Computer Networking
4
-
60
3
20
80
100
-
6
90
3
40
60
100
-
3
45
3
40
60
100
-
3
45
3
40
60
100
-
6
90
3
40
60
100
24
18
630
280
720
1000
EC-501
EC-502
EC-503
PRACTICAL:
EC-507
Computer HW &
Networking Lab
EC-508
Life Skills
EC-509
EC-510
Microcontroller
applications lab
Field Practices
TOTAL
I -4
DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATIONS
VI Semester
Subject
Code
Instruction
Name of the Subject
period / week
Theory Practical/
Tutorial
Total
Period
/ Sem
Scheme of Examination
Duration
(hours)
Sessional
Marks
End
Exam
THEORY:
EC- 601
EC-602
EC - 603
EC - 604
EC - 605
EC - 606
Total
Marks
Industrial
Management
&Entrepreneurship
Industrial Electronics
4
-
60
3
20
80
100
4
-
60
3
20
80
100
Electronic Circuit
Design &Quality
Assurance
Mobile
4
-
60
3
20
80
100
4
-
60
3
20
80
100
4
-
60
3
20
80
100
4
-
60
3
20
80
100
Communications
Advanced
Microcontrollers &
DSP
Digital Circuit Design
through Verilog HDL
PRACTICAL:
EC- 607
Industrial Electronics
Lab
-
6
90
3
40
60
100
EC -608
VHDL Programming
Lab
-
3
45
3
40
60
100
EC -609
Advanced
Microcontroller Lab
-
3
45
3
40
60
100
EC -610
Project work
-
6
90
3
40
60
100
24
18
630
280
720
1000
TOTAL
I -5
I YEAR
I -6
DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATIONS
(FIRST YEAR)
Subject
Code
Instruction
period / week
Name of the Subject
Theory
Practical
/Tutorial
Total
Period
/ year
Scheme of Examination
Duration
(hours)
Sessional
Marks
End
Exam
Marks
Total
Marks
THEORY:
EC-101
English
3
-
90
EC-102
Engineering
Mathematics - I
5
-
150
4
-
120
EC-103 Engineering Physics
Engineering Chemistry
EC-104 &Environmental
Studies
Basic Electrical &
EC-105 Electronics
Engineering
Engineering Materials
EC-106 & Practices
PRACTICAL:
Engineering Drawing
EC-107 Practice
Basic Electronic
EC-108 Workshop Practice
109-A Engineering
Physics Lab practice
EC-109 109-B Engineering
Chemistry Lab practice
Computer
EC-110 fundamentals Lab
practice
TOTAL
3
100
3
100
3
100
3
100
3
100
3
100
3
100
3
100
4
-
120
4
-
120
4
-
120
-
6
180
-
6
180
-
3
90
3
(1.5+1.5)
100
(50+50)
-
3
90
3
100
24
18
1260
I -7
1000
Subject Title
Subject Code
Periods per Week
Periods per Year
:
:
:
:
ENGLISH
(Common to all Branches)
English
EC – 101
03
90
Time Schedule
Sl No
Major Topics
No. of
Periods
Weightage
of Marks
No of Short
Answers
No of Long
Answers
1
Vocabulary
5
13
1
1
2
Grammar
30
31
7
1
3
Reading
10
10
-
1
4
Writing
30
40
-
4
5
English in Action
15
16
2
1
90
110
10
08
Rationale and Scope
Globalization has ushered in an era of opportunities for those who have the necessary
competencies. Effective communication is one among them. This shift demands strengthening of
English in polytechnics. In C-14 Curriculum the focus is on the special English needs of
technician studies and training. This course aims at integration of the four fold language abilities
viz., listening, speaking, reading and writing. The use of English for learning technical subjects
and for performing technical functions like, writing repots, giving instructions and interpreting
graphics is of great importance. Therefore the curriculum C-14 focuses on improving
communicative abilities equipping the students to become industry- ready and employable.
On completion of this course the student shall be able to:
1.0
Build their vocabulary in the direction of their future needs
2.0
Learn various grammatical structures
3.0
Read and comprehend English and understand the details and draw inferences
4.0
Learn to be competent in various forms of written communication (writing composition and
data interpretation)
5.0
Practice spoken communication suited to various situations.
1.0
Extend their vocabulary in the direction of their future needs
I -8
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
Locate words, learn spellings, understand meanings
Pronounce words intelligibly
Find synonyms and antonyms
Use affixation
Comprehend meanings of words by understanding meanings of roots
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
2.15
2.16
2.17
2.18
Learn various grammatical structures
Identify and use nouns
Identify and use pronouns
Use the present tense
Use the past tense
Use the future tense
Identify and use adjectives
Identify and use adverbs
Use prepositions
Use linkers
State basic sentence structures
Construct different types of sentences
Frame questions to elicit information
Frame questions for conformation
Use active voice
Use passive voice
Use direct speech
Use indirect speech
Identify and correct errors
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
Read and comprehend English
Identify the main ideas
Identify the specific details
Draw inferences
Give contextual meanings of the words
Perceive tone in a text
4.0
Learn to excel in various forms of written communication (writing composition and
data interpretation)
Identify components of a good paragraph
Write types of paragraphs
Distinguish between formal and informal letters
Write personal letters
Write leave letters
Write official letters
Write letters of complaints
Prepare a resume
Write a cover letter
Write short messages
Report incidents
Report experiments
Report Industrial visits
Write work done statements
Write maintenance reports
Make notes using Cue method and Mapping method
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.13
4.14
4.15
4.16
I -9
4.17
4.18
5.0
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
Summarize Paragraphs
Present and Interpret Data from flow charts, tree diagrams, bar graphs, tables, pie charts
Practice spoken communication suited to various situations.
Use appropriate expressions to greet and take leave
Use proper expressions to make requests
Use apt expressions for asking and giving directions
Use suitable expressions to seek and offer suggestions
Use suitable expressions to state intentions
Use suitable expressions to state feelings
Use appropriate expressions to state agreement and disagreement
Use proper expressions to make complaints
Use suitable expressions to express obligations
Course Material
The textbook prepared by the faculty of English of Polytechnics in AP.
Reference Books
1. Essential English Grammar (Intermediate Level)
Raymond Murphy
2. Learn English ( A Fun Book of Functional Language, Grammar and Vocabulary)
Santanu Sinha Chaudhuri
3. Grammar Builder ( Entire Series)
Oxford University Press
4. High School English Grammar ( Revised Edition)
Wren and Martin
5. Sentence skills with Readings ( fourth Edition, Tata McGraw Hill)
John Langan, Paul Langan
6. Word Power Made Easy
Norman Lewis
7. Spoken English
Shashi Kumar and Dhamija
I -10
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – I
Subject Title
Subject Code
Periods per week
Periods per year
S. No
:
:
:
:
(Common to all Branches)
Engineering Mathematics-I
EC-102
05
150
Blue print
Major Topic
No of Periods
Unit - I : Algebra
Theory Practice
Weightage
of Marks
Short Type
Essay Type
R
U App
R
U
App
1
Logarithms
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
Partial Fractions
5
0
3
0
1
0
0
0
0
10
10
16
2
0
0
0
0
1
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
4
Matrices and
Determinants
Unit - II :
Trigonometry
Trigonometric
Ratios
5
Compound Angles
3
2
3
1
0
0
0
0
0
6
Multiple and
Submultiple angles
4
4
3
0
1
0
0
0
0
7
Transformations
4
4
5
0
0
0
1/2
0
0
3
2
5
0
0
0
0
1/2
0
3
2
5
0
0
0
1/2
0
0
4
4
5
0
0
0
0
0
1/2
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
2
3
1
0
0
0
0
0
8
9
10
11
12
Inverse
Trigonometric
Functions
Trigonometric
Equations
Properties and
solutions of
triangles
Hyperbolic
Functions
Complex Numbers
Unit III : Coordinate Geometry
13
Straight Lines
4
2
3
1
0
0
0
0
0
14
Circle
4
2
3
1
0
0
0
0
0
I -11
15
S. No
Conic Sections
Major Topic
5
4
10
No of Periods
Weightage
of Marks
0
0
0
0
Short Type
1
0
Essay Type
Unit – IV : Differential Calculus
16
Limits and
Continuity
4
2
3
0
1
0
0
0
0
17
Differentiation
18
10
23
1
0
0
1
1
0
3
2
5
0
0
0
0
0
1/2
2
2
5
0
0
0
0
0
1/2
Unit - V : Applications of Differentiation
18
19
Geometrical
Applications
Physical
Applications
20
Maxima and Minima
3
4
5
0
0
0
0
0
1/2
21
Errors and
Approximations
2
0
5
0
0
0
0
0
1/2
92
58
110
7
3
0
2
2
1/2
3
1/2
21
9
0
20
25
35
Total
Marks
R:
U:
App:
Remembering type
Understanding type
Application type
41 marks
34 marks
35 marks
Objectives
Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to:
UNIT – I
Algebra
1.0
Use Logarithms in engineering calculations
1.1
Define logarithm and list its properties.
1.2
Distinguish natural logarithms and common logarithms.
1.3
Explain the meaning of e and exponential function.
1.4
State logarithm as a function and its graphical representation.
1.5
Use the logarithms in engineering calculations.
2.0
2.1
Resolve Rational Fraction into sum of Partial Fractions in engineering problems
Define the following fractions of polynomials:
1.
Rational,
2.
Proper and
I -12
3.
2.2
Improper
Explain the procedure of resolving rational fractions of the type mentioned below into
partial fractions
i)
iii)
3.0
f ( x)
( x  a)( x  b)( x  c)
f ( x)
( x  a)( x  b)
2
ii )
f ( x)
( x  a) ( x  b)( x  c)
iv)
f ( x)
( x  a)( x 2  b)2
2
Use Matrices for solving engineering problems
3.1
Define a matrix and order of a matrix.
3.2
State various types of matrices with examples (emphasis on 3rd order square matrices).
3.3
Compute sum, scalar multiplication and product of matrices.
3.4
Illustrate the properties of these operations such as associative, distributive,
commutative properties with examples and counter examples.
3.5
Define the transpose of a matrix and write its properties.
3.6
Define symmetric and skew-symmetric matrices.
3.7
3.8
Resolve a square matrix into a sum of symmetric and skew- symmetric matrices with
examples in all cases.
Define minor, co-factor of an element of a 3x3 square matrix with examples.
3.9
Expand the determinant of a 3 x 3 matrix using Laplace expansion formula.
3.10
Distinguish singular and non-singular matrices.
3.11
Apply the properties of determinants to solve problems.
3.12
Solve system of γ linear equations in γ unknowns using Cramer’s rule.
3.13
Define multiplicative inverse of a matrix and list properties of adjoint and inverse.
3.14
Compute adjoint and multiplicative inverse of a square matrix.
3.15
Solve system of 3 linear equations in 3 unknowns by matrix inversion method
3.16
State elementary row operations.
3.17
Solve a system of 3 linear equations in 3 unknowns by Gauss- Jordan method
UNIT – II
Trigonometry :
4.0
Understand Trigonometric Ratios
4.1
Define trigonometric ratios of any angle.
I -13
4.2
List the values of trigonometric ratios at specified values.
4.3
Draw graphs of trigonometric functions
4.4
Explain periodicity of trigonometric functions.
5.0
Solve simple problems on Compound Angles
5.1
Define compound angles and state the formulae of sin(A±B), cos(A±B), tan(A±B) and
cot(A±B)
5.2
Give simple examples on compound angles to derive the values of sin150, cos150 ,
sin750 , cos750 ,
tan 150 , tan750 etc.
5.3
Derive identities like sin(A+B) sin(A-B) = sin 2 A –sin2 B etc.,
5.4
Solve simple problems on compound angles.
6.0
Solve problems using the formulae for Multiple and Sub- multiple Angles
6.1
Derive the formulae of multiple angles 2A, 3A etc and sub multiple angles A/2 in terms
of angle A of trigonometric functions.
6.2
Derive useful allied formulas like sinA= (1- cos2A)/2 etc.,
6.3
Solve simple problems using the above formulae
7.0
Apply Transformations for solving the problems in Trigonometry
7.1
Derive the formulae on transforming sum or difference of two trigonometric ratios in to a
product and vice versa- examples on these formulae.
7.2
Solve problems by applying these formulae to sum or difference or product of three or
more terms.
8.0
Use Inverse Trigonometric Functions for solving engineering problems
8.1
Explain the concept of the inverse of a trigonometric function by selecting an
appropriate domain and range.
8.2
Define inverses of six trigonometric functions along with their domains and ranges.
8.3
Derive relations between inverse trigonometric functions so that given A= sin-1x,
express angle A in terms of other inverse trigonometric functions - with examples.
8.4
State various properties of inverse trigonometric functions and identities like
sin-1x+cos-1 x =

2
etc.
1
1
8.5
Derive formulae like tan x  tan y  tan
8.6
Solve simple problems.
1
 
x y
1  xy
, where x  0, y  0, xy  1 etc.,
9.0
Solve Trigonometric Equations in engineering applications
9.1
Explain what is meant by solutions of trigonometric equations and find the general
solutions of sin x=k, cos x =k and tan x=k with appropriate examples.
I -14
Solve models of the type a sin2 x + b sin x +c=0, a cos x + b sin x=c etc., and problems
using simple transformations.
9.2
10.0 Appreciate Properties of triangles and their solutions
10.1
State sine rule, cosine rule, tangent rule and projection rule.
10.2
Explain the formulae for sin A/2, cos A/2, tan A/2 and cot A/2 in terms of semiperimeter and sides a, b, c and solve problems.
10.3
List various formulae for the area of a triangle.
10.4
Solve problems using the above formulae.
10.5
Solve a triangle when (i) three sides, (ii) two sides and an included angle, (iii) two
sides and an opposite angle-case of two solutions and (iv) one side and two angles
are given.
11.0
Represent the Hyperbolic Functions in terms of logarithm functions
11.1
Define Sinh x, cosh x and tanh x and list the hyperbolic identities.
11.2
Represent inverse hyperbolic functions in terms of logarithms.
12.0 Represent Complex numbers in various forms
12.1 Define complex number, its modulus , conjugate and list their properties.
12.2
Define the operations on complex numbers with examples.
12.3
Define amplitude of a complex number
12.4
Represent the complex number in various forms like modulus-amplitude (polar) form,
Exponential (Euler) form – illustrate with examples.
State DeMoivre’s theorem and its applications to complex numbers e.g., finding the
roots, powers, simplifications of a complex number with illustrative examples
12.5
UNIT - III
Coordinate Geometry
13.0 Solve the problems on Straight lines
13.1 Write the different forms of a straight line – point slope form, two point form, intercept
form, normal form and general form
13.2 Solve simple problems on the above forms
13.3
Find distance of a point from a line, acute angle between two lines, intersection of two
non-parallel lines and distance between two parallel lines.
14.0 Solve the problems on Circles
14.1 Define locus of a point – circle and its equation.
14.2
Find the equation of a circle given
(i)
Center and radius
I -15
(ii)
Two ends of a diameter
(iii)
Centre and a point on the circumference
(iv)
Three non collinear points
(v)
Centre and tangent
14.3
Write the general equation of a circle and find the centre and radius.
14.4
Write the equation of tangent and normal at a point on the circle.
14.5
Solve the problems to find the equations of tangent and normal.
15.0
Appreciate the properties of Conics in engineering applications
15.1
Define a conic section.
15.2
Explain the terms focus, directrix, eccentricity, axes and latus rectum of a conic with
illustrations.
15.3
Find the equation of a conic when focus, directrix and eccentricity are given
15.4
Describe the properties of Parabola, Ellipse and Hyperbola
15.5
Solve engineering problems in simple cases of Parabola and Ellipse.
UNIT - IV
Differential Calculus
16.0 Use the concepts of Limit and Continuity for solving the problems
16.1 Explain the concept of limit and meaning of lim f ( x)  l and state the properties of
xa
limits .
16.2
Mention
the
ex 1
lim
,
x 0
x
Standard limits
lim (1 
x 0
1
x) x
xn  an
,
xa x  a
lim
sin x
,
x 0 x
lim
tan x
,
x 0 x
lim
a x 1
,
x 0
x
lim
x
,
 1
lim 1   (All without proof).
x  
x
16.3
Solve the problems using the above standard limits
16.4
Evaluate the limits of the type lim
16.5
Explain the concept of continuity of a function at a point and on an interval with some
examples whether a given function is continuous or not.
a x2  b x  c
f ( x)
and lim
2
x l  x   x  
x  g ( x)
17.0 Appreciate Differentiation and its meaning in engineering situations
17.1 State the concept of derivative of a function y = f(x) – definition, first principle as
I -16
lim
h 0
f ( x  h)  f ( x) and also provide standard notations to denote the derivative of a
h
function.
17.2
State the significance of derivative in scientific and engineering applications.
17.3
Find the derivatives of elementary functions like xn , ax, ex, log x, sin x, cos x, tanx,
Secx, Cosecx and Cot x using the first principles.
17.4
Find the derivatives of simple functions from the first principle .
17.5
State the rules of differentiation of sum, difference, scalar multiplication, product and
quotient of functions with illustrative and simple examples.
Explain the method of differentiation of a function of a function (Chain rule) with
illustrative examples such as
17.6
(i)
17.7
17.8
17.9
t2 
2
t
(ii) x 2 sin 2 x
(iii)
x
x 1
2
(iv) log  sin(cos x)  .
Find the derivatives of Inverse Trigonometric functions and examples using the
Trigonometric transformations.
Explain the method of differentiation of a function with respect to another function and
also differentiation of parametric functions with examples.
Find the derivatives of hyperbolic functions.
17.10 Explain the procedures for finding the derivatives of implicit function with examples.
17.11 Explain the need of taking logarithms for differentiating some functions with examples
like [f(x)]g(x).
17.12 Explain the concept of finding the higher order derivatives of second and third order
with examples.
17.13 Explain the concept of functions of several variables, partial derivatives and difference
between the ordinary and partial derivatives with simple examples.
17.14 Explain the definition of Homogenous function of degree n
17.15 Explain Euler’s theorem for homogeneous functions with applications to simple
problems.
UNIT - V
Applications of the Differentiation
18.0 Understand the Geometrical Applications of Derivatives
18.1 State the geometrical meaning of the derivative as the slope of the tangent to the curve
y=f(x) at any point on the curve.
18.2
18.3
Explain the concept of derivative to find the slope of tangent and to find the equation of
tangent and normal to the curve y=f(x) at any point on it.
Find the lengths of tangent, normal, sub-tangent and sub normal at any point on the
curve y=f(x) .
I -17
18.4
19.0
Explain the concept of angle between two curves and procedure for finding the angle
between two given curves with illustrative examples.
Understand the Physical Applications of Derivatives
19.1
19.2
Explain the derivative as a rate of change in distance-time relations to find the velocity
and acceleration of a moving particle with examples.
Explain the derivative as a rate measurer in the problems where the quantities like
volumes, areas vary with respect to time- illustrative examples.
20.0 Use Derivatives to find extreme values of functions
20.1 Define the concept of increasing and decreasing functions.
20.2
Explain the conditions to find points where the given function is increasing or
decreasing with illustrative examples.
20.3 Explain the procedure to find the extreme values (maxima or minima) of a function of
single variable - simple problems yielding maxima and minima.
20.4 Solve problems on maxima and minima in applications like finding areas, volumes, etc.
21.0 Use Derivatives to find Errors and Approximations
21.1 Find the absolute error, approximate error, relative error and percentage error in
functions of single variable.
COURSE CONTENT
Unit-I
Algebra
1. Logarithms :
Definition of logarithm and its properties, natural and common logarithms; the meaning of e
and exponential function, logarithm as a function and its graphical representation.
2. Partial Fractions :
Rational, proper and improper fractions of polynomials. Resolving rational fractions in to their
partial fractions covering the types mentioned below:
i)
iii)
f ( x)
( x  a)( x  b)( x  c)
f ( x)
( x  a)( x  b)
2
ii )
f ( x)
( x  a) ( x  b)( x  c)
iv)
f ( x)
( x  a)( x 2  b)2
Matrices:
I -18
2
3. Definition of matrix, types of matrices-examples, algebra of matrices-equality of two matrices,
sum, scalar multiplication and product of matrices. Transpose of a matrix-Symmetric, skew
symmetric matrices-Minor, cofactor of an element-Determinant of a square matrix-Laplace’s
expansion, properties of determinants. Singular and non singular matrices-Adjoint and
multiplicative inverse of a square matrix- examples-System of linear equations in 3 variablesSolutions by Cramers’s rule, Matrix inversion method-examples-Elementary row operations on
matrices -Gauss-Jordan method to solve a system of equations.
Unit-II
Trigonometry:
4.Trigonometric ratios: definition of trigonometric ratios of any angle, values of trigonometric
ratios at specified values, draw graphs of trigonometric functions, periodicity of trigonometric
functions.
5. Compound angles: Formulas of sin(A±B), cos(A±B), tan(A±B),cot(A±B),and related identities
with problems.
6. Multiple and sub multiple angles: trigonometric ratios of multiple angles 2A,3A and submultiple
angle A/2 with problems.
7. Transformations of products into sums or differences and vice versa simple problems
8. Inverse trigonometric functions : definition, domains and ranges-basic properties- problems.
9. Trigonometric equations: concept of a solution, principal value and general solution of
trigonometric equations :
sin x =k , cos x= k, tan x =k.
Solutions of simple quadratic equations, equations involving usage of transformationsproblems.
10. Properties and solutions of triangles: relation between sides and angles of a triangle- sine
rule, cosine rule, tangent rule and projection rule-area of a triangle- solving a triangleproblems.
11. Hyperbolic functions: Definitions of hyperbolic functions, identities of hyperbolic functions,
inverse hyperbolic functions and expression of inverse hyperbolic functions in terms of
logarithms.
12. Complex Numbers : Definition of a complex number, Modulus and conjugate of a complex
number, Arithmetic operations on complex numbers, Modulus- Amplitude (polar) form,
Exponential form(Euler) form of a complex number- Problems. DeMoivre’s Theorem and its
applications in complex numbers- Simple problems.
I -19
UNIT-III
Coordinate geometry
13. Straight lines: various forms of straight lines, angle between lines, perpendicular distance from
a point, distance between parallel lines-examples.
14. Circle: locus of appoint, Circle, definition-Circle equation given (i) center and radius, (ii) two
ends of a diameter (iii) centre and a point on the circumference (iv) three non collinear points
and (v) centre and tangent equation - general equation of a circle - finding center, radius:
tangent, normal to circle at a point on it.
15. Definition of a conic section, equation of a conic when focus directrix and eccentricity are
given. Properties of parabola, ellipse and hyperbola, standard forms - applications of
parabola and ellipse to engineering situations.
UNIT-IV
Differential Calculus
16. Concept of Limit- Definition- Properties of Limits and Standard Limits -Simple ProblemsContinuity of a function at a point- Simple Examples only.
17. Concept of derivative- definition (first principle)- different notations-derivatives of elementary
functions - problems. Derivatives of sum, product, quotient, scalar multiplication of functions problems. Chain rule, derivatives of inverse trigonometric functions, derivative of a function
with respect to another function, derivative of parametric functions, derivative of hyperbolic,
implicit functions, logarthmic differentiation – problems in each case. Higher order derivatives
- examples – functions of several variables – partial differentiation, Euler’s theorem-simple
problems.
UNIT-V
Applications of Derivatives:
18. Geometrical meaning of the derivative, equations of Tangent and normal to a curve at any
point. Lengths of tangent, normal, subtangent and subnormal to the curve at any point .
Angle between the curves - problems.
19. Physical applications of the derivative – velocity, acceleration, derivative as a rate Measure –
Problems.
I -20
20. Applications of the derivative to find the extreme values – Increasing and decreasing
functions, finding the maxima and minima of simple functions - problems leading to
applications of maxima and minima.
21. Applications of derivative in finding errors and approximations of functions and simple
problems.
Reference Books :
1. A text book of matrices by Shanti Narayan,
2.
Plane Trigonometry, by S.L Loney
3.
Co-ordinate Geometry, by S.L Loney
4.
Thomas Calculus, Pearson Addison-Wesley publishers
5.
Calculus – I, by Shanti Narayan and Manicavachgam Pillai, S.V Publications
I -21
ENGINEERING PHYSICS
(Common to all Branches)
Subject Title
Subject Code
Periods per week
Total periods per year
S.No
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
:
:
:
:
Engineering Physics
EC -103
04
120
TIME SCHEDULE
Major Topics
No. of
Periods
Units and Dimensions
Elements of Vectors
Kinematics
Friction
Work, Power and Energy
Simple Harmonic Motion
Heat & Thermodynamics
Sound
Properties of matter
Electricity & magnetism
Modern Physics
Total:
08
12
12
08
10
12
12
12
10
14
10
120
Weightage of
Marks
Short
Answer Type
03
13
13
10
10
13
13
13
06
13
03
103
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
10
OBJECTIVES
Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to
1.0
2.0
Understand the concept of Units and dimensions
1.1
Explain the concept of Units
1.2
Define t h e t e r m s
a ) Physical quantity, b ) F u n d a m e n t a l physical quantities and
c ) D erived physical quantities
1.3
Define unit
1.4
Define fundamental units and derived units
1.5
State SI units with symbols
1.6
State Multiples and submultiples in SI system
1.7
State Rules of writing S.I. units
1.8
State advantages of SI units
1.9
Define Dimensions
1.10 W r i t e Dimensional formulae
1.11 Derive dimensional formulae of physical quantities
1.12 List dimensional constants and dimensionless quantities
1.13 State the principle of Homogeneity of Dimensions
1.14 State the applications of Dimensional analysis
1.15 State the limitations of dimensional analysis
Understand the concept of Elements of Vectors
2.1 Explain the concept of Vectors
2.2 Define Scalar and Vector quantities
I -22
Essay Type
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
8
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
2.15
2.16
2.17
2.18
2.19
3.0
4.0
Give examples for scalar and vector quantities
Represent vectors graphically
Classify the Vectors
Resolve the vectors
Determine the Resultant of a vector by component method
Represent a vector in space using unit vectors (I, j, k)
State triangle law of addition of vectors
State parallelogram law of addition of vectors
Illustrate parallelogram law of vectors in case of flying bird and sling.
Derive expression for magnitude and direction of resultant of two vectors
State polygon law of addition of vectors
Explain subtraction of vectors
Define Dot product of two vectors with examples (Work done, Power)
Mention the properties of Dot product
Define Cross products of two vectors with examples (Torque, Linear velocity)
Mention the properties of Cross product.
Solve t h e r e l a t e d n u m e r i c a l problems
Understand the concept of Kinematics
3.1 Recapitulate the equations of motion in a straight line
3.2 Define acceleration due to gravity
3.3 Derive expressions for
a) Maximum Height, b) time of ascent, c) time of descent, and d) time of
3.4 Derive height of a tower when a body projected vertically upwards from
the top of a tower.
3.5 Define projectile motion with examples
3.6 Explain Horizontal projection
3.7 Derive an expression for the path of a projectile in horizontal projection
3.8 Explain oblique projection
3.9 Derive an expression for the path of projectile in oblique projection
3.10 Derive formulae for
a)Horizontal Range, b)Maximum range of a projectile in oblique projection
3.11 Solve t h e r e l a t e d n u m e r i c a l problems
Understand the concept of Friction
4.1 Define friction
4.2 Classify the types of friction
4.3 Explain the concept of Normal reaction
4.4 State the laws of friction
4.5 Define coefficients of friction
4.6 Explain the Angle of friction
4.7 Derive an expression for acceleration of a body on a rough horizontal surface
4.8 Derive an expression for the displacement and time taken to come to rest over
a rough horizontal surface
4.9 Define Angle of repose
4.10 Derive an expressions for acceleration of a body on a smooth inclined plane (up
and down)
4.11 Derive an expressions for acceleration of a body on a rough inclined plane
(up and down)
4.12 List the Advantages and Disadvantages of friction
4.13 Mention the methods of minimizing friction
I -23
5.0
4.14 Solve t h e r e l a t e d n u m e r i c a l problems
Understand the concept of Work, Power, and Energy
5.1
Define work
5.2
State SI units and dimensional formula for work
5.3
Define power
5.4
State SI units and dimensional formula for power
5.5
Define energy
5.6
State SI units and dimensional formula for energy
5.7
Define potential energy
5.8
Derive the expression for Potential energy with examples
5.9
Define kinetic energy
5.10 Derive the expression for kinetic energy with examples
5.11 State the Work- Energy theorem
5.12 Explain the relation between Kinetic energy and momentum
5.13 State the law of conservation of energy
5.14 Verify the law of conversion of energy in the case of a freely falling body
5.15 Solve t h e r e l a t e d n u m e r i c a l problems
6.0
Understand the concept of Simple harmonic motion
6.1 Define Simple harmonic motion
6.2 State the conditions of Simple harmonic motion
6.3 Give examples for Simple harmonic motion
6.4 Show that the tip of the projection of a body moving in circular path with uniform
speed is SHM
6.5 Derive expression for displacement
6.6 Derive expression for velocity
6.7 Derive expression for acceleration
6.8 Derive expression for Time period and frequency of S H M
6.9 Define phase of S H M
6.10 Derive expression for Time period of simple pendulum
6.11 State the laws of simple pendulum
6.12 State the laws of Seconds pendulum
6.13 Solve t h e r e l a t e d n u m e r i c a l problems
7.0
Understand the concept of Heat and thermodynamics
7.1 Explain the concept of expansion of gases
7.2 Explain Boyle’ s law
7.3 State Charles law in terms of absolute temperature
7.4 Define absolute zero temperature
7.5 Explain absolute scale of temperature
7.6 Define ideal gas
7.7 Derive ideal gas equation
7.8 Define gas constant and Universal gas constant
7.9 Explain why universal gas constant is same for all gases
7.10 State SI unit of universal gas constant
7.11 Calculate the value of universal gas constant
7.12 State the gas equation in terms of density
7.13 Distinguish between r and R
7.14 Explain Isothermal process w i t h t h e h e l p o f P - V a n d T - Ø d i a g r a m
7.15 Explain adiabatic process w i t h t h e h e l p o f P - V a n d T - Ø d i a g r a m
7.16 Distinguish between isothermal and adiabatic process
I -24
7.17
7.18
7.19
7.20
State first and second laws of thermodynamics
Define specific heats & molar specific heats of a gas
Derive the relation Cp – Cv = R
Solve t h e r e l a t e d n u m e r i c a l problems
8.0
Understand the concept of Sound
8.1 Define the term sound
8.2 Explain longitudinal and transverse wave motion
8.3 Distinguish between musical sound and noise
8.4 Explain noise pollution and state SI unit for noise
8.5 Explain causes of noise pollution
8.6 Explain effects of noise pollution
8.7 Explain methods of minimizing noise pollution
8.8 Explain the phenomenon of beats
8.9 List the applications of beats
8.10 Define Doppler effect
8.11 List the Applications of Doppler effect
8.12 Explain reverberation and reverberation time
8.13 Write Sabine’s formula
8.14 Explain echoes
8.15 State conditions of good auditorium
8.16 Solve t h e r e l a t e d n u m e r i c a l problems
9.0
Understand the properties of matter
9.1 Define the term Elasticity
9.2 Define the terms stress and strain
9.3 S t a t e t h e u n i t s a n d d i m e n s i o n a l f o r m u l a e f o r s t r e s s a n d s t r a i n
9.4 State the Hooke’s law
9.5 Define the surface tension
9.6 Explain Surface tension with reference to molecular theory
9.7 Define angle of contact
9.8 Define the capillarity
9.9 Write the formula for surface tension based on capillariy
9.10 Explain the concept of Viscosity
9.11 Provide examples for surface tension and Viscosity
9.12 State Newton’s formula for viscous force
9.13 Define co-efficient of viscosity
9.14 Explain the effect of temperature on viscosity of liquids and gases
9.15 State Poiseulle’s equation for Co-efficient of viscosity
9.16 Solve t h e r e l a t e d n u m e r i c a l problems
10.0
Understand the concept of Electricity and Magnetism
10.1 Explain the concept of Electricity
10.2 State the Ohm’s law
10.3 E xplain the Ohm’s law
10.4 Define specific resistance, conductance and their units
10.5 State Kichoff’s laws
10.6 Explain Kichoff’s laws
10.7 Describe Wheatstone’s bridge with legible sketch
10.8 Derive expression for balancing condition of Wheatstone’s bridge
I -25
10.9
10.10
10.11
10.12
10.13
10.14
10.15
10.16
10.17
10.18
11.0
Describe Meter Bridge with legible sketch
Write the formula for Meter Bridge to determine specific resistance
Explain the concept of magnetism
State the Coulomb’s inverse square law of magnetism
Define magnetic field and magnetic lines of force
State the Magnetic induction field strength-units and dimensions
Derive Magnetic induction field strength at a point on the axial line
Describe the moment of couple on a bar magnet placed in a uniform magnetic field
Derive Magnetic induction field strength at a point on the equatorial line
Solve t h e r e l a t e d n u m e r i c a l problems
Understand the concept of Modern physics
11.1 Explain Photo-electric effect
11.2 Write Einstein‘s photoelectric equation
11.3 State laws of photoelectric effect
11.4 Explain the Working of photoelectric cell
11.5 List the Applications of photoelectric effect
11.6 Recapitulate refraction of light and its laws
11.7 Define critical angle
11.8 Explain the Total Internal Reflection
11.9 Explain the principle and working of Optical Fiber
11.10 Mention types of optical fibers
11.11 List the applications of Optical Fiber
11.12 Define super conductor and superconductivity
11.13 List the examples of superconducting materials
11.14 List the applications of superconductors
COURSE CONTENT
1.
Units and Dimensions:
Introduction – Physical quantity – Fundamental and Derived quantities – Fundamental
and Derived units- SI units –Multiples and Sub multiples – Rules for writing S.I. unitsAdvantages of SI units – Dimensions and Dimensional formulae- Dimensional
constants and Dimensionless quantities- Principle of Homogeneity- Advantages and
limitations of Dimensional analysis- - Problems.
2.
Elements of Vectors:
Scalars and Vectors –Types of vectors(Proper Vector, Null Vector, Unit Vector, Equal ,
Negative Vector, Like Vectors, Co-Initial Vectors, Co-planar Vectors and Position
Vector).Addition of vectors- Representation of vectors- Resolution of vectors Parallelogram, Triangle and Polygon laws of vectors–Subtraction of vectors- Dot and
Cross products of vectors-Problems
3.
Kinematics:
Introduction- Concept of acceleration due to gravity- Equations of motion for a freely
falling body and for a body thrown up vertically- Projectiles- Horizontal and Oblique
projections- Expressions for maximum height, time of flight, range - problems
I -26
4.
Friction:
Introduction to friction- Causes- Types of friction- Laws of friction- Angle of repose-Angle of
friction— Motion of a body over a horizontal surface- smooth inclined plane- rough inclined
plane- Advantages and disadvantages of friction- Methods of reducing friction – Problems
5.
Work, Power and Energy:
Work, Power and Energy- Definitions and explanation- potential energy- kinetic energyDerivations of Potential and Kinetic energies-K.E and Momentum relation - Work-Energy
theorem- Law of Conservation of energy- Problems
6.
Simple Hormonic Motion:
Introduction- Conditions of SHM- Definition- Examples- Expressions for displacement,
velocity, acceleration, Time period, frequency and phase in SHM- Time period of a simple
pendulum- Laws of simple pendulum-seconds pendulum- Problems
7.
Heat and Thermodynamics:
Expansion of Gases- Boyle’s law- Absolute scale of temperature- Charles laws- Ideal gas
equation- Universal gas constant- Differences between r and R- Isothermal and adiabatic
processes- Laws of thermodynamics- Specific heats of a gas - Problems
8.
Sound:
Sound- Nature of sound- Types of wave motion - usical sound and noise- Noise pollution
– Causes & effects- Methods of reducing noise pollution- Beats- Doppler effect- EchoReverberation-Reverberation time-Sabine ‘s formula-Condition of good auditoriumProblems
9.
Properties of matter
Definition of Elasticity –Definition of stress and strain -th e u n i t s a n d d i m e n s i o n a l
f o r m u l a e f o r s t r e s s a n d s t r a i n - T he Hooke’s law- Definition of surface tensionExplanation of Surface tension with reference to molecular theory - Definition of angle of
contact - Definition of capillarity -The formula for surface tension based on capillarity Explanation of concept of Viscosity - Examples for surface tension and Viscosity Newton’s formula for viscous force- Definition of co-efficient of viscosity- The effect of
temperature on viscosity of liquids and gases - Poiseulle’s equation for Co-efficient of
viscosity- Th e r e l a t e d n u m e r i c a l problems
10.
Electricity & Magnetism:
Ohm’s law and explanation- Specific resistance- Kirchoff ’s laws- Wheatstone’s
bridge- Coulomb’s inverse square law magnetic field- magnetic lines of forceMagnetic induction field strength- magnetic induction field strength at a point on the axial
line - magnetic induction field strength at a point on the equatorial line –problems.
11.
Modern Physics;
Photoelectric effect –Einstein’s photoelectric equation-laws of photoelectric effect photoelectric cell –Applications of photo electric effect- Total internal reflection- fiber
optics- -principle and working of an optical fiber-types of optical fibers - Applications of
optical fibers- concepts of superconductivity - applications
REFERENCE BOOKS
I -27
1. Intermediate physics Volume-I
2. Unified physics Volume 1,2,3 and 4
3. Text book of physics Volume I
4. Text book of applied physics
5. Fibre optics
Deepthi
Dr.S.L Guptha and Sanjeev Guptha
Resnick & Holiday
Dhanpath Roy
D.A Hill
Blue Print for setting question paper at different levels
S.No
Major Topics
No. of Weightage Short answer
Periods of Marks type
K
U
Essay type
A
K
U
A
1.
Units and Dimensions
08
03
1
0
0
0
0
0
2.
Elements of Vectors
12
13
0
0
1
0
1
0
3.
Kinematics
12
13
0
1
0
1
0
0
4.
Friction
08
10
0
0
0
0
1
0
5.
Work, Power and Energy
10
10
0
0
0
0
1
0
6.
Simple Harmonic Motion
12
13
0
0
1
0
1
0
7.
Heat & Thermodynamics
12
13
0
1
0
1
0
0
8.
Sound
12
13
0
1
0
0
0
1
9.
Properties of Matter
10
06
1
1
0
0
0
0
14
13
0
1
0
1
0
10
03
1
0
0
0
120
110
3
5
2
2
2
10. Electricity & magnetism
11. Modern Physics
Total:
I -28
0
0
5
0
1
ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY & ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES
(Common to all Branches)
Subject Title
Subject Code
Periods per week
Total periods per year
S.No
Major topic
:
:
:
:
Engineering Chemistry & Environmental Studies
EC -104
04
120
Blue Print
No of
Periods
Weight
age of
marks
Short type
(3marks)
R
U
A
Essay type (10
marks)
R
U
A
16
1
0
1
0
1
0
8
8
10
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1/2
0
1/2
0
0
13
0
1
0
0
0
1
8
14
12
6
10
13
13
3
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
18
16
1
1
0
0
1
0
120
110
6
2
2
3
18
6
6
30
3
1/2
35
1
1/2
15
A. ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY
1
Fundamentals of
18
Chemistry
2
Solutions
10
3
Acids and bases
10
4
Principles of
10
Metallurgy
5
14
Electrochemistry
6
7
8
9
Corrosion
Water Technology
Polymers
Fuels
B. ENVIRONMENTAL
STUDIES
total
remarks
5 mark
5 mark
OBJECTIVES
Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to
A. ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY
1.0 Understand the concept of Atomic structure
1.1
Explain the fundamental particles of an atom like electron, proton and neutron etc.,
1.2
Explain the concept of atomic number and mass number
1.3
1.4
State the Postulates of Bohr’s atomic theory and its limitations
Explain t h e c o n c e pt of Quantum numbers with examples
1.5
Explain 1 . Aufbau’s principle, 2 . Hund’s rule and 3 . Pauli’s exclusion principle with
respect to electron stability
1.6
Define Orbital in an atomic structure
I -29
1.7
Draw the shapes of s, p and d Orbitals in an atomic structure
1.8
Distinguish between Orbit and Orbital
1.9
Write the electronic configuration of elements up to atomic number 30
1.10 Explain the significance of chemical bonding
1.11 Explain the Postulates of Electronic theory of valance
1.12 Define t he f our t ypes of Chemical bonding viz.,Ionic, Covalent, Coordinate and Metallic
1.13 Explain t he f our t ypes of Chemical bonding viz.,Ionic, Covalent, Coordinate and
Metallic
1.14 Explain bond formation in NaCl and MgO
1.15 List Properties of Ionic compounds
1.16 Explain bond formation in Hydrogen molecule, Oxygen molecule, and Nitrogen molecule
using Lewis dot method
1.17 List Properties of Covalent compounds
1.18 Explain Metallic bond with Electron sea model theory
1.18 Define the terms 1.Oxidation, 2.Reduction and 3.Oxidation number
1.19 Calculate the Oxidation Number
1.20 Differentiate between Oxidation Number and Valence
2.0
Calculate Molarity, Molality and Normality of given Solution
2.1
Define the terms 1. Solution, 2.Solute and 3.Solvent
2.2
Classify solutions based on physical state and solubility
2.3
Define mole
2.4
Explain, with examples, the ‘ Mole concept’
2.5
Define the terms 1. Atomic weight, 2. Molecular weight and 3. Equivalent weight
2.6
Calculate Molecular weight and Equivalent weight of given Acids, Bases and Salts
2.7
Define 1.Molarity, 2. Molalty and 3.Normality of solutions
2.8
Explain with examples Normality
2.9
Solve Numerical problems on Mole, Molarity and Normality
3.0
Understand the concepts of Acids and bases
3.1
Explain Arrhenius theory of Acids and Bases
3.2
State the limitations of Arrhenius theory of Acids and Bases
3.3
Explain Bronsted – Lowry theory of acids bases
3.4
State the limitations of Bronsted – Lowry theory of acids bases
3.5
Explain Lewis theory of acids and bases
3.6
State the limitations Lewis theory of acids and bases
3.7
Explain the Ionic product of water
I -30
3.8
Define pH and explain Sorenson scale
3.9 Solve the Numerical problems on pH (Strong Acids and Bases)
3.10 Define buffer solution
3.11 G i ve t h e at l e a st t h r e e examples foe buffer solutions
3.12 State the applications of buffer solution
4. 0
Understand the Principles of Metallurgy
4.1
List at least eight Characteristics of Metals
4.2
Distinguish between Metals and Non Metals
4.3
Define the terms 1.Mineral, 2.Ore, 3. Gangue, 4. Flux and 5. Slag
4.4
Describe the methods of concentration of ore like 1.Hand picking,2. Levigation, and 3. Froth
Floatation
4.5
Describe the methods involved in extraction of crude metal- Roasting, Calcination and
Smelting.
4.6
Explain the purification of Metals by Electrolytic Refining
4.7
Define an Alloy
4.8
4.9
Write the Composition o f t h e f o l l o w i n g a l l o y s :1.Brass, 2 . German silver, and
Nichrome
L i s t t h e uses of following Alloys: Brass, German silver, Nichrome
5.0
Understand the concepts of Electrochemistry
5.1
Define the terms1. conductor, 2. Insulator, 3.Electrolyte and 4.Non – electrolyte
5.2
Distinguish between metallic conduction and Electrolytic conduction
5.3
Explain Arrhenius theory of electrolytic dissociation
5.4
Explain electrolysis by taking example fused NaCl
5.5
Explain Faraday’s laws of electrolysis
5.6
Define 1 . C hemical equivalent and 2 . E lectrochemical equivalent
5.7
Solve the Numerical problems based on Faraday’s laws of electrolysis
5.8
Define Galvanic cell
5.9
Explain the construction and working of Galvanic cell
5.10 Distinguish between electrolytic cell and galvanic cell
5.11 Explain the standard electrode potentials
5.12 Explain the electrochemical series and its significance
5.13 Explain the emf of a cell
5.14 Solve the numerical problems on emf of cell
6.0
Understand the concept of Corrosion
6.1
Define t h e t e r m corrosion
6.2
Explain the Factors influencing the rate of corrosion
I -31
6.3
Explain the concept of electrochemical theory of corrosion
6.4
Describe the formation of a) composition cells, b) stress cells c) concentration cells
6.5
Explain the mechanism of rusting of iron
6.6
Explain the methods of prevention of corrosion: a) Protective coatings
b) Cathodic pr ot ect ion (Sacrificial anode process and Impressed – voltage process)
7. 0
Understand the concept of Water Technology
7.1
State the various Sources of water like Surface and sub surface sources
7.2
Define the terms soft water and hard water with respect to soap consumption
7.3
Define the term of hardness o f w a t e r
7.4
E x p l a i n t h e v a r i o u s t y p e s o f h a r d n e s s o f w a t e r l i k e temporary and
permanent hardness; and c a r b o n a t e a n d b i c a r b o n a t e h a r d n e s s o f w a t e r .
7.5
7.6
L i s t t h e u s u a l compounds causing hardness (with Formulae)
State the disadvantages of using hard water in industries
7.7
Define Degree of hardness, units of hardness (mg/L)
7.8
Explain the methods of softening of hard water: a) Ion-Exchange process, b)Reverse
osmosis process(RO)
7.9
List the advantages of RO
7.10 State t hr ee essential qualities of drinking water like
1).Safety, 2). Economy and 3)..Aesthetic
8.0
Understand the concepts of Polymers
8.1
Explain the concept of polymerisation
8.2
8.3
Describe the methods of polymerisation a) addition polymerisation of Ethylene b)
condensation polymerisation of phenol and formaldehyde (Only flow chart i.e. without
chemical equations)
Define the term plastic
8.4
Classify the plastics with examples
8.5
Distinguish between thermo and thermosetting plastics
8.6
List the Characteristics of plastics
8.7
State the advantages of plastics over traditional materials
8.8
State the disadvantages of using plastics.
8.9
Explain the methods of preparation of the following plastics:
1. Polythene, 2. PVC, 3.Teflon, 4. Polystyrene and 5. Urea formaldehyde
8.9
Explain the uses of the following plastics:
1. Polythene, 2. PVC, 3.Teflon, 4. Polystyrene and 5. Urea formaldehyde
8.10 Define the term natural rubber
8.11 State the structural formula of Natural rubber
8.12 Explain the processing of Natural rubber from latex
I -32
8.13 List the Characteristics of natural rubber
8.14 Explain the process of Vulcanization
8.15 List the Characteristics of Vulcanized rubber
8.16 Define the term Elastomer
8.17 Describe the preparation of the following synthetic rubbers a) Butyl rubber, b) Buna-s
and c) Neoprene rubber
8.18 List the uses of the following synthetic rubbers a) Butyl rubber, b) Buna-s and c)
Neoprene rubber
9.0
Understand the concepts of Fuels
9.1
Define the term fuel
9.2
Classify the fuels based on physical state – solid, liquid and gaseous fuels,
9.3
9.4
Classify the fuels based on occurrence- primary and secondary fuels
List the characteristics of good fuel
9.5
State the composition and uses of gaseous fuels:
a) water gas, b) producer gas, c) natural gas, d) coal gas, e) Bio gas and f) acetylene
B.
ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES
1.1
Define the term environment
1.2
1.3
Explain the scope and importance of environmental studies
Explain the following terms 1).Lithosphere, 2).Hydrosphere, 3).Atmosphere,
4).Biosphere, 5)Pollutant, 6).Pollution, 7).Contaminant receptor - sink, particulates,
dissolved oxygen, 8).Threshold limit value, 9).BOD, and 10).COD
1.4
Explain the growing energy needs
1.5
1.6
State the differences between renewable and non renewable energy sources-alternative
energy sources.
Define an Ecosystem- biotic component, abiotic component and energy component,
1.7
Define t h e t e r m s :
1 ) . Producers, 2 ) . C onsumers and 3 ) . D ecomposers with examples.
1.8
1.9
Explain biodiversity and threats to biodiversity
Define air pollution
1.10 Classify the air pollutants- based on origin and state of matter
1.11 Explain the causes of air pollution
1.12 Explain the use and over exploitation of forest resources and deforestation
1.13 Explain the effects of air pollution on human beings, plants and animals
1.14 Explain the green house effect - ozone layer depletion and acid rain
1.15 Explain the methods of control of air pollution
1.16 Define water pollution
1.17 Explain the causes of water pollution
I -33
1.18 Explain the effects of water pollution on living and non living things
1.19 Understand the methods of control of water pollution.
COURSE CONTENT
A.
ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY
1.
Fundamentals of Chemistry
Atomic Structure: Introduction - Fundamental particles – Bohr’s theory – Quantum
numbers - Aufbau principle - Hand’s rule - Pauli’s exclusion Principle- Orbitals, shapes of
s, p and d orbitals - Electronic configurations of elements
Chemical Bonding: Introduction – types of chemical bonds – Ionic and covalent bond with
examples – Properties of Ionic and Covalent compounds
– Metallic bond
2.
Oxidation-Reduction: Concepts of Oxidation-Reduction, Oxidation Number- calculations,
differences between Oxidation Number and Valency
Solutions
3.
Introduction-concentration methods – Mole concept, Molarity, Normality, Equivalent
weights, Numerical problems on Mole, Molarity and Normality
Acids and Bases
4.
Introduction – theories of acids and bases and limitations – Arrhenius theory-Bronsted –
Lowry theory – Lewis acid base theory – Ionic product of water – pH and related numerical
problems – buffer solutions –Applications.
Principles of Metallurgy
5.
Characteristics of Metals and distinctions between Metals and Non Metals, Metallurgy, ore,
Gangue, Flux, Slag - Concentration of Ore –Hand picking, Levigation, Froth floatation –
Methods of Extraction of crude Metal – Roasting, Calcination, Smelting – Alloys –
Composition and uses of Brass, German silver and Nichrome
Electrochemistry
6.
Conductors, insulators, electrolytes - Arrhenius theory of electrolytic dissociation –
electrolysis – Faraday’s laws of electrolysis- numerical problems – Galvanic cell –
standard electrode potential – electro chemical series –emf and numerical problems on
emf of a cell
Water technology
Introduction –soft and hard water – causes of hardness – types of hardness
–disadvantages of hard water – degree of hardness (ppm) – softening methods – permutit
process – ion exchange process – numerical problems related to degree of hardness –
drinking water – municipal treatment of water for drinking purpose – Osmosis, Reverse
Osmosis - advantages of Reverse osmosis
7.
8.
Introduction - factors influencing corrosion - electrochemical theory of corrosion composition, stress and concentration cells– rusting of iron and its mechanism –
prevention of corrosion by coating methods, cathodic protection
Polymers
Introduction – polymerization – types of polymerization – addition, condensation with
examples – plastics – types of plastics – advantages of plastics over traditional materials
I -34
– Disadvantages of using plastics – preparation and uses of the following plastics: 1.
Polytehene 2. PVC 3. Teflon 4. Polystyrene 5. Urea formaldehyde – Rubber – Natural
rubber – processing from latex –Vulcanization – Elastomers – Butyl rubber, Buna-s,
Neoprene rubber and their uses.
9.
Fuels
B.
Definition and classification of fuels – characteristics of good fuel - composition and uses of
gaseous fuels.
ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES
Introduction – environment –scope and importance of environmental studies important
terms – renewable and non renewable energy sources – Concept of ecosystem,
producers, consumers and decomposers – Biodiversity, definition and threats to
Biodiversity.
air pollution - causes-Effects –
forest resources : uses and over exploitation,
deforestation, acid rain, green house effect –ozone depletion – control of air pollution –
Water pollution – causes – effects – control measures,
REFERENCE BOOKS
1.
Intermediate chemistry Vol 1&2
Telugu Acedemy
2.
Intermediate chemistry Vol 1&2
Vikram Publishers
3.
Intermediate chemistry Vol 1&2
Vignan Publishers & Deepthi Publishers
4.
Engineering Chemistry
Jain & Jain
5.
Engineering Chemistry
O.P. Agarwal, Hi-Tech.
6.
Engineering Chemistry
Sharma
7.
Engineering Chemistry
A.K. De
I -35
Basic Electrical & Electronics Engineering
Subject Title
Subject Code
Periods/Week
Periods/Year
:
:
:
:
Basic Electrical & Electronics Engineering
EC-105
04
120
TIME SCHEDULE
Sl.
No
Major Topics
No. of
periods
Weighta
ge of
marks
Short
Answer
Questio
ns
Essay
Questio
ns
1
Basic Electricity Work
power and energy
24
13
1
1
2
Magnetism
10
8
1
1/2
3
Electrostatics &
Capacitance
16
13
1
1
4
Chemical effects of
electric current &
Batteries
6
8
1
1/2
5
AC Fundamentals
10
13
1
1
6
Passive components
18
13
1
1
7
Switches and Relays
10
13
1
1
8
PCBs
8
8
1
1/2
9
Semiconductor Diode
6
8
1
1/2
10
Power supplies
12
13
1
1
120
110
10
8
Total
OBJECTIVES
On completion of the course the student should be able to
1.0 Comprehend the basic Principles of Electricity
1.1
Explain the concept of Electric current, Potential difference, Voltage and emf.
I -36
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.13
1.14
1.15
1.16
1.19
1.20
1.21
1.22
1.23
1.24
1.25
1.26
1.27
1.28
1.29
1.30
Explain the concept of a circuit
State Ohm’s Law
Give the concept of Resistance to flow of electrons,
Define the terms specific resistance and conductivity.
Deduce the relation R =( l ) / a
Solve simple problems using the above formula.
Explain the effects of temperature on resistance
Define temperature co- efficient of resistance.
Derive the formula Rt = Ro (1+ot) to find resistance at any given temperature
Solve Simple problems using the above formula.
Explain series and parallel connections of Resistances
Derive the expressions for equivalent resistance for series and parallel connections.
Solve simple problems on series and parallel circuits
Explain the division of current in parallel circuits
Solve simple problems on the above.
List the 4 effects of Electric current
Explain the Heating effect of Electric current
Define Electric Power
Give the formula for power and mention Units (Watts , kilo Watts , Mega watts)
Define Electrical energy and mention the units (watt hours, kilo watt hours , Megawatt
hours)
Mention the typical power ratings of home appliances like Electrical lamps
(
Incandescent , Florescent , CFL &LED) Water Heater , electric Iron, Fans, Refrigerators ,
Air coolers , Television set and computer.
Calculate total Electrical energy consumption and cost given the wattage , hours of
operation and Electricity tariff
Mention the merits of CFL and LED lamps over Incandescent lamps from power
consumption point of view
Derive expression for conversion of Electrical energy into equivalent heat energy in kilo
Calories
(joules Law)
Define thermal efficiency
Solve problems on Electrical heating
Mention the practical applications of Electric heating like, Water heater, Electric Iron etc.
2.0 Understand the magnetic effects of Electric Current
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
State coulombs laws of magnetism.
Define the terms Absolute and relative permeability of medium.
Explain the concept of lines of force & magnetic Field.
Define field intensity, Magnetic potential, Flux, Flux density .
Give the relation between Absolute and relative permeability
Draw and explain the field patterns due to
a. Straight current carrying conductor
b. Solenoid and
c. Toroidal
Explain Work law and its applications
State Laplace law (Biot-Savart’s Law)
Give expressions for field strength,
I -37
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
2.15
2.16
2.17
2.18
2.19
2.20
2.21
2.22
Derive the expression for magnitude of the force on a conductor in a magnetic field
Give the expression for the force between two parallel current carrying conductors
Explain the nature of the force with different directions of the currents
Define ampere
Explain the concept of the Magnetic circuit
Define magneto motive force (mmf), permeability, flux and Reluctance
Solve problems on simple magnetic circuits
Compare magnetic circuit with electric circuit.
Explain the effect of air gap in a magnetic circuit
Explain the terms leakage flux and leakage co-efficient
Give the equation for the energy stored per unit volume in a magnetic field.
Calculate energy stored per unit volume
Give the expression for lifting power of a magnet.
3.0 Understand Electric Charge and Electrostatic Field
State Coulomb’s law of electrostatics and define unit charge
Define absolute and relative permittivity.
Solve simple problems based on Coulomb’s law
Explain electrostatic field.
Compare electrostatic and magnetic fields
Define field intensity
State Gauss theorem
Explain the concept of electric potential and potential difference
Define di-electric strength and di-electric constant
Give the Permittivity of commonly used die- electric materials
Define the term capacitance.
Draw the symbol of capacitor
State unit of capacitance
Derive the formula for capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor
Explain equivalent capacitance of
A.
Capacitors connected in series;
B.
Capacitors connected in parallel
3.16 Explain charging and discharging of capacitor.
3.17 Give the expression for energy stored in a capacitor
3.18 Solve simple problems related to capacitors
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
3.15
4.0 Chemical effects of Current and Batteries
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
Explain Faradays laws of Electrolysis
Explain Polarisation or Back emf
Explain how the value of Back emf can be determined
Define Primary and Secondary Cells.
Explain series and parallel connections of cells to form Battery
Give the formulae for output voltage and current when connected in 1. Series and 2.
Parallel
I -38
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.13
4.14
4.15
4.16
4.17
4.18
4.19
4.20
4.21
4.22
4.23
4.24
4.25
4.26
4.27
4.28
Explain when it is preferred to have 1. Series connection 2. Parallel connection of the
batteries
Explain the constructional details of a Lead acid Battery
List the active materials used in the construction of lead acid Battery
Explain the chemical reactions that take place during Charging and discharging
Explain the significance of internal resistance of a Battery
Define the Ampere Hour and Watt Hour Efficiencies of the cell.
Draw the Electrical characteristics of Lead acid cell and explain.
Explain the condition of a Fully charged cell.
List the six important applications of Lead acid batteries
Explain constant current and Constant Voltage methods of Charging Lead acid batteries.
Solve simple problems to find charging current requirements
Explain the need for Trickle charging
Explain the sulphation and its prevention
List the precautions to be observed to maintain the lead acid batteries.
Explain the Constructional details of lithium ion Batteries
List any 4 merits and demerits of Lithium Ion Batteries
List all the precautions to be taken when charging and discharging of lithium ion batteries
List other types of Batteries used in Electronic Industry namely A. Zinc – Carbon B.
Alkaline C.9V Battery D. Button cells (both Lithium and Silver oxide types)
Mention the output voltages of above cells
Mention the Common and IEC standard codes to specify the size of the cell
Mention any 3 applications of the above
Compare Primary and Secondary cells.
5.0 Understand the concept of Alternating current
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
5.13
5.14
5.15
5.16
5.17
5.18
5.19
Explain the generation of Alternating current with simple loop generator concept.
Draw the sine wave and explain the concept of a cycle
Define Time period , Frequency and Amplitude of a sine wave
Give the formula for the instantaneous value in terms of maximum value, frequency and
time.
Write different forms of emf equation
Solve simple problems to calculate Amplitude ,frequency and Time Period
Define the average value, R.M.S. value, form factor and peak factor for sine wave.
Explain the terms phase and phase difference.
Explain the concept of Leading , lagging and inphase with the help of waveforms
Explain vector representation of Alternating quantities
Draw the vector diagrams of sine waves of same frequency.
Perform addition and subtraction of alternating quantities using vector method.
Solve problems to find resultant vector of several alternating quantities.
Explain the effect of AC flowing through Pure Resistance , Inductance and Capacitance
with vector diagrams.
Define the terms Inductive reactance, Impedance, admittance, conductance and Power
Factor
Explain Active and Reactive components of AC current
Explain Active and Reactive and apparent power in AC circuit.
Explain the importance of power factor
Define Q factor of a coil.
I -39
5.20
5.21
5.22
5.23
Explain power in an iron cored choking coil.
Explain AC through Resistance and capacitance connected in series.
Solve simple problems on RC series circuits
Calculate the impedance, power, current, phase angle and power factor in RL,RC and
RLC series circuits.
6.0 Understand passive components
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10
6.11
6.12
6.13
6.14
6.15
6.16
6.17
6.18
6.19
6.20
6.21
6.22
6.23
6.24
6.25
6.26
6.27
6.28
6.29
6.30
6.31
6.32
Classify types of resistors.
List the specifications of a resistor, and state their importance.
Explain the necessity of preferred values in resistor.
Explain the features of following Resistors.
a.
Carbon Film Resistors
b.
Metal film Resistors
c.
Metal oxide Resistors.
d.
Precision Resistors
List the applications of the above Resistors
Identify Resistance Value by using Colour Code.(4band and 5 band)
List the common faults in resistors.
Classify wire wound Resistors
Explain the constructional details of wire wound resistors.
List any 4 applications of Wire wound Resistor Including Fan Regulator
List the two types of Variable resistors (Potentiometer and Preset)
Distinguish between Preset and Potentiometer
Draw the European and US standard symbols of Potentiometers and Presets
Describe constructional details of carbon and wire wound potentiometers.
Compare the features of carbon and wire wound potentiometers
List different types of Presets and Trimmers
Mention any 3 applications of precision multi turn Cermet trimmer
Mention the need for tapering in potentiometers.
Define Linear and Logarithmic Potentiometers
Explain the use of Logarithmic potentiometer in Audio amplifier for Volume control
Explain the construction and working of rheostat
Explain the use of Rheostat as 1. Variable Resistance. 2. Potentiometer
List the 4 types of special Resistors (Thermistor , Sensistor, LDR and VDR)
Explain P.T.C. and N.T.C. of Resistors.
Explain the working of thermistor and sensistor
Give standard specifications for the above
List any 3 applications. of above
Give Constructional details of LDR (Light Dependant Resistor)
List 3 important specifications of LDR
List any 3 applications of LDR
Explain the use of VDR
Explain resistor packs and SMD Resistors
Familiarise with different types of inductors used in electronic circuits and their
applications
6.33
6.34
Classify inductors.
Draw the symbol of different types of inductors
I -40
6.35
6.36
6.37
6.38
6.39
6.40
6.41
6.42
List the specifications of inductors.
List and Explain the important parameters of Air cored inductors
Explain the terms Stray inductance and stray capacitance
List various core materials used in the construction of inductors
Describe the constructional features
List the applications of A.F. and R.F chokes.
List the common faults in inductors
Explain the use of Ferrites in the construction of high frequency inductors
Familiarise with different types of capacitors used in electronic circuits and their
applications
6.43 Classify the different types of capacitors.
6.44 List the specifications of a capacitor and state their importance.
6.45 Explain different markings on the a) Electrolytic capacitors b) Ceramic and Plastic
capacitors (Value , Polarization, Voltage, Tolerance , temperature rating)
6.46 Explain working voltage of a capacitor
6.47 Reading the capacitor value and tolerance by 1. Using colour code. 2.Value printed
6.48 State the factors affecting the capacitance of a capacitor.
6.49 Mention the properties, range of values and applications of
1. Paper 2. mica, 3. glass, 4. polyester 5. Polystyrene 6. ceramic 7. Electrolytic
capacitors.
6.50 Explain the importance of polarity in Electrolytic capacitors
6.51 Explain the use of capacitors for coupling AC signal and blocking DC
6.52 Explain self healing in metalized capacitors
6.53 List different types of variable capacitors and mention their applications.
6.54 Explain the use of ganged capacitor in AM radio for tuning
6.55 Explain the use of trimmer capacitors
6.56 Mention the losses in capacitors.
6.57 List 3 common faults in capacitors.
7.0 Familiarise with different types of switches, Connectors and Relays.
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
7.10
7.11
7.12
7.13
7.14
7.15
Explain the working of a switch.
Classify switches according to poles and throws (SPST, SPDT, DPST, DPDT, Multi-pole
multi-throw)
Explain the working of toggle, push button, rotary, slider, keyboard, and thumb wheel
switches with a mention to their ratings and applications.
Draw the I.S.I symbols of various switches.
Explain the need of fuse in electronic equipment.
Mention different types of fuses.
List 3 metals used for fuses
Mention significance of fuse ratings.
Explain the need for connectors in electronic circuits.
List different types of connectors.
Mention the use of MCB.
Define an Electromagnetic relay.
Draw the symbol of a relay
Classify different relays based on principle of operation, polarization and application.
Mention specifications of relays.
I -41
7.16
7.17
7.18
7.19
7.20
7.21
7.22
Explain the construction & working of general-purpose electromagnetic relay.
Explain the purpose of NC and NO contacts
Explain arcing during changeover
List the contact materials used in relays and list their characteristics.
Explain the use of solenoid
Explain the need for fly back diode across the relay coil when used in electronic circuits
Distinguish between relay and contactor
8.0 Comprehend PCB materials and their fabrication
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.9
8.10
8.11
8.12
8.13
8.14
8.15
Explain the need of PCB in electronic equipment.
Classify PCBs.
List types of laminates used in PCBs.
Mention the methods of layout preparation of PCB.
List the methods of transferring layout on the copper clad sheet.
List the steps involved in screen-printing for making PCBs.
List the materials used in screen-printing.
Describe the photo processing techniques for PCB preparation.
Mention the methods of etching, cleaning and drilling of PCB.
Describe the steps involved in making double-sided PCB.
Give the standard specification for PCB
Explain the need for multilayer PCBs
Explain the use of Surface mount Technology (SMT)
List the materials used in soldering.
List the soldering methods of PCBs.
9.0
Understand the working of Semiconductor Diodes
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
State the electrical properties of solid Semiconductor materials.
Sketch energy level diagrams for conductors, Semiconductors, Insulators.
Distinguish between Intrinsic and extrinsic Semiconductors.
Describe the formation of P type and N type materials and sketch the energy band
diagrams.
Explain Majority and Minority carriers in P and N Type materials.
Distinguish between Drift and Diffusion current.
Explain the formation of PN junction diode.
Describe the working of PN junction Diode with various biasing voltages.
Explain the forward/Reverse Bias Voltage characteristics of diode.
Interpret the manufacturer specifications of a given diode from data sheet.
Describe the formation and working of Zener diode.
Explain the characteristics of Zener diode.
Distinguish between Zener breakdown and Avalanche breakdown.
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
9.9
9.10
9.11
9.12
9.13
10.0 Understand the working of DC Power Supplies
10.1 Explain the necessity of D.C. power supply for Electronic circuits.
I -42
10.2 Describe the working of HW, FW and Bridge section circuits with wave forms
10.3 Give the equations for RMS value, average DC value; ripple factor and efficiency for the
10.4
10.5
10.6
10.7
10.8
above circuits.
Define Voltage Regulation.
Explain the need for a filter circuit in power supplies.
Explain the operation of a rectifier circuit using RC, CRC, CLC filters.
State the need for a regulated power supply and list its specifications.
Explain the working of a simple Zener regulated DC Power supply.
COURSE CONTENT
1. Concept of Electric current, Potential difference, Voltage and emf and circuit-Ohm’s Law concept of Resistance - specific resistance and conductivity.Problems related to specific
resistance – Effect of temperature on resistance-Temperature co- efficient of resistance.resistance at any given temperature-Solve Simple problems - Series and parallel connections
of Resistances-Formulas for equivalent resistance for series and parallel connections.-Solve
simple problems on series and parallel circuits division of current in parallel circuits-Effects of
Electric current
Units of work, power and energy- Heating effect of Electric current – Electrical power - formula
for power and Units -Power ratings of home appliances -Electrical energy consumption
calculations - merits of CFL and LED lamps -joules Law-Thermal efficiency – solve problems
on Electrical heating practical applications of Electric heating like, Water heater, Electric Iron
etc.
2.Magnetic Effects of Electric Current
Coulombs laws of magnetism-Absolute and relative permeability of medium-Explain the
concept of lines of force & magnetic Field- Field intensity, Magnetic potential, Flux, Flux
density-Relation between Absolute and relative permeability - Field patterns due to Straight
current carrying conductor ,Solenoid and Toroid
Work law and its applications- Laplace law (Biot-Savart’s Law)- expressions for field strength,
- magnitude of the force on a conductor in a magnetic field- force between two parallel
current carrying conductors- nature of the force with different directions of the currents
Define ampere - concept of the Magnetic circuit -Define magneto motive force (mmf),
permeability, flux and Reluctance-Solve problems on simple magnetic circuits-Compare
magnetic circuit with electric circuit-Effect of air gap in a magnetic circuit- leakage flux and
leakage co-efficient- equation for the energy stored per unit volume in a magnetic field.
expression for lifting power of a magnet.
3.Electrostatics
Coulomb’s law of electrostatics - Unit charge- Absolute and Relative permittivity. Problems
based on Coulomb’s law - Electrostatic field.-Compare electrostatic and magnetic fields - field
intensity- Gauss theorem- Concept of electric potential and potential difference - di-electric
I -43
strength and di-electric constant- Permittivity of commonly used die- electric materials capacitance- symbol of capacitor- Unit of capacitance- Formula for capacitance of a parallel
plate capacitor- equivalent capacitance of Capacitors connected in series &Capacitors
connected in parallel- Charging and discharging of capacitor- Expression for energy stored in
a capacitor- Simple problems related to capacitors.
4.Chemical effects of electric current
Faradays laws of Electrolysis- Polarisation or Back emf- determination of Back emf - Primary
and Secondary Cells- series and parallel connections of cells to form Battery- Explain when it
is preferred to have 1. Series connection 2. Parallel connection of the batteriesConstructional details of a Lead acid Battery- materials used - Chemical reactions that take
place during Charging and discharging -Internal resistance of a Battery- Ampere Hour and
Watt Hour Efficiencies of the cell.- Electrical characteristics of Lead acid cell -Condition of a
Fully charged cell- Applications of Lead acid batteries- Constant current and Constant
Voltage methods of Charging Lead acid batteries- Charging current requirements- Trickle
charging- Sulphation and its prevention- Precautions
Constructional details of lithium ion Batteries- merits and demerits of Lithium Ion Batteries
Precautions to be taken - Batteries used in Electronic Industry namely A. Zinc – Carbon B.
Alkaline C.9V Battery D. Button cells (both Lithium and Silver oxide types)- output voltages of
above cells- Common and IEC standard codes - Applications -Compare Primary and
Secondary cells.
5. AC Fundamentals :
Generation of Alternating current - Concept of a cycle -Time period , Frequency and
Amplitude of a sine wave- formula for the instantaneous value- different forms of emf
equation -average value, R.M.S. value, form factor and peak factor for sine wave- phase and
phase difference.
Vector representation of Alternating quantities- addition and subtraction of alternating
quantities-Resultant vector of several alternating quantities- Effect of AC flowing through
Pure Resistance , Inductance and Capacitance - Inductive reactance, Impedance,
admittance, conductance and Power Factor- Active and Reactive components of AC currentExplain Active and Reactive and apparent power in AC circuit- Importance of power factor- Q
factor of a coil- Power in an iron cored choking coil.- AC through Resistance and
capacitance connected in series-Solve simple problems on RC series circuits-Calculate the
impedance, power, current, phase angle and power factor in
RL,RC and RLC series
circuits.
6.Passive components
Resistors:Types of resistors- specifications - Preferred values- features of Carbon Film
Resistors,Metal film Resistors ,Metal oxide Resistors. Precision Resistors-applications Using Colour Code.(4band and 5 band) - Common faults in resistors.Wire wound Resistors
Types- Constructional details of wire wound resistors. Types of Variable resistors
(Potentiometer and Preset) European and US standard symbols -Constructional details of
carbon and wire wound potentiometers.- Features of carbon and wire wound potentiometersPresets and Trimmers-Applications - Need for tapering in potentiometers -Linear and
Logarithmic Potentiometers-Rheostat-Uses – Special Resistors (Thermistor , Sensistor, LDR
and VDR)- P.T.C. and N.T.C. of Resistors- Specifications - Applications.
I -44
Constructional details of LDR (Light Dependant Resistor)- Specifications & Applications of
LDR- VDR- Resistor packs and SMD Resistors
Inductors: Classify inductors- symbols - Specifications - Important parameters of Air cored
inductors- Stray inductance and Stray capacitance-List various core materials used
constructional features - Applications of A.F. and R.F chokes- Common faults in inductors Use of Ferrites in the construction of high frequency inductors
Capacitors: Types of capacitors- specifications - markings on Capacitors - Working
voltage of a capacitor-Using colour code. - Factors affecting the capacitanceproperties, range of values and applications of different types of capacitorsImportance of polarity in Electrolytic capacitors- Use of capacitors for coupling AC
signal and blocking DC- Self healing in metalized capacitors- Types of variable
capacitors and their applications- Use of ganged capacitor in AM radio for tuningUse of trimmer capacitors-Mention the losses in capacitors- Common faults in
capacitors.
7. Switches, connectors and Relays:
Switches- Classification and types -Ratings and applications. I.S.I symbols – Fuse
protection-Types of fuses-Metals used for fuses- Fuse ratings- Connectors - Types of
connectors-MCB- Electromagnetic relay- Symbol -Classification - Specifications –
Constructional details of general-purpose electromagnetic relay- NC and NO contacts- Arcing
during changeover-- Contact materials - Use of Solenoid- Fly back diode- Difference between
Relay and Contactor
8. PCBs:
Need for PCB –Classification of PCBs.- Types of laminates - Layout preparation of PCBtransferring layout - Screen-printing - materials used - photo processing techniques – etching
methods- cleaning and drilling - steps involved in making double-sided PCB-- standard
specification for PCB-Explain the need for multilayer PCBs- Surface mount Technology (SMT)
-Materials used in soldering- soldering methods
9. Semiconductor diodes:
Electrical properties of semiconductor materials, energy level diagrams of conductor, semi
conductor and Insulator. Formation of P-Type and N-Type materials and their properties. Drift
and diffusion current. Formation and behaviour of PN junction diode.-Forward and Reverse
bias- characteristics-Specifications- Zener diode- Characteristics-zener breakdown and
avalanche breakdown
10. DC Power supplies
Need of DC power supply- Half wave, Full wave and Bridge rectifiers. RMS value, Ripple
factor, Voltage regulation. Filters – RC, CRC, and CLC. Zener regulator – series and shunt. IC
regulators and specifications of RPS
RECOMMENDED BOOKS
1. A Textbook of Electrical Technology
I -45
Basic Electrical Engineering (Volume1)
2. Basic Electrical Engineering Volume 1
3. Electronic devices and applications
4. Understanding Electronics Components
by BL Theraja &AK Theraja
Chand Publications
by PS Dhogal , TMH
by B. Somanathan Nair, PHI.
by Filipovic D. Miomir. Mikroe online
Edition
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Electronic Devices
and Circuits
by
2. Hand book of components for Electronics by
3. Printed circuit Boards Design &Technology by
I -46
David A.Bell
Prentice hall
Charles A. Harper McGrahills
Walter C. Boshart TMH
EC-106
Subject Title
Subject Code
Periods/Week
Periods/year
ENGINEERING MATERIALS AND PRACTICES
:
:
:
:
Engineering Materials & Practices
EC-106
04
120
Rationale ; The knowledge of Engineering materials & workshop practices is indispensible to a
diploma holder in Electronics &Communication engineering as per the expectations of the
industry .With the lean staff concept in the industry ,Technicians working at supervisory level
must be versatile and possess interdisciplinary skills. Care has been taken to introduce most
essential and latest topics in the subject which will enhance their understanding of other subjects
in future courses.
Time Schedule
S
No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Major topics
Classification of materials and
properties of conductors
Properties and applications of
Insulating materials
Properties and applications of
magnetic materials
Properties and applications of
Special materials
Introduction to Workshop
processes
Important machines used in the
workshops
Fastening
Soldering Brazing and Welding
Heat treatment
Electrical hazards- First Aid and
safety
Total
No of
periods
20
Weightage of
marks
16
Short answer
questions
20
16
2
2
1
20
13
1
1
12
13
1
1
12
13
1
1
12
13
1
1
12
13
1
1
12
13
1
1
120
110
10
8
OBJECTIVES.
On completion of the study the student will be able to
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
Essay
questions
1
Understand the Classification of Materials
Explain the atomic structure of the atom
Explain the electronic structure of the atom
Explain energy band diagram
Classify the material into conducting, semi conducting and insulating materials
Distinguish between conductor, insulator and semi-conductor with respect
I -47
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.13
1.14
1.15
1.16
1.17
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
to valence electrons
Explain how the resistance of a conductor is affected by presence of impurities
Classify the conducting material as low resistivity and high resistivity materials
List the 4 Metals commonly used in Electrical and Electronics fields .
Define the following Mechanical properties of materials
1.Density 2.stress 3. Strain 4.strength 5.Ductility 6.Hardness 7.Wear 8. Impact resistance
9. Fracture 10. Toughness 11. Fatigue
List the Electrical properties of Copper (conductivity, resistivity, temperature
coefficient) of copper.
Explain the mechanical properties of copper
Explain general properties like conductivity, resistivity, temperature coefficient, Solderability.
Explain general properties like conductivity, resistivity, corrosion, temperature
Coefficient and mechanical properties of Steel.
List 6 important Uses of different conductors in electronics engineering,.
Define corrosion.
List four methods to prevent corrosion of conductors.
Explain the process of anodization of Aluminum
Understand General Properties of Insulating materials;
Define Insulating Materials.
State the important electrical properties of Insulating materials.
Define Insulating resistance ,Volume and Surface resistance
Explain factors affecting insulating resistance.
Classify Insulating materials on the basis of temperature like Y,A,E,B,F,H and C class.
Mention the properties of Impregnated paper, Wood, Cardboard, Asbestos, Mica, Ceramics
and Glass.
List the uses of above insulating materials
Explain Thermoplastic & Thermosetting resins with examples.
Explain the properties & applications of PVC
3.0
3.1
Comprehend Magnetic Materials
Classify the magnetic Materials (Ferromagnetic, Paramagnetic, Diamagnetic and
Ferrimagnetic)
3.2 Define the above magnetic materials.
3.3 Define Soft and Hard magnetic materials
3.4 Distinguish between soft and Hard magnetic Materials
3.5 Give 3 examples for each.
3.6 List the important magnetic materials used in the Electrical &Electronic industry
3.7 List the important properties of Magnetic materials
3.8 Explain the effect of temperature on magnetism
3.9 Define the curie point
3.10 Explain the terms Hysteresis and Hysteresis loss
3.11 Explain the use of Soft Magnetic Materials like Silicon sheet steel for transformers,.
3.12 Explain the merits of Cold rolled grain oriented steels for transformer
4.0
Understand the use of Special Materials and alloys
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
Define an alloy
Explain the need for alloying.
List the 6 important alloys used in electrical engineering
Explain about low resistivity copper alloys: Brass, Bronze
I -48
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.13
4.14
4.15
4.16
4.17
4.18
4.19
4.20
Explain the use of cadmium copper and Beryllium copper
List alloys used for Bimetallic strips , soldering and fuse material,
Give the combination of manganin, constantin, Nichrome, and solder metal
Mention the uses of above alloys.
Explain the use of Nickel-iron alloys,
Define ceramic material.
Explain the use of ceramics for making insulators.
List 6 applications of ceramic materials in the electrical engineering.
Define ferrites
List the important properties of Ferrites
Mention important uses of above materials
Explain the composition of Neodymium.
List any 3 important applications of Neodymium magnets
Explain superconductivity phenomenon.
List 3 superconducting metals
Mention the 3 applications of superconductivity.
5.0
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
5.13
5.14
5.15
5.16
Understand various Workshop practices and Hand Tools
Explain the use of Engineers Files
Show the parts of a file with a sketch.
List various Files used in the workshop
Mention their usage.
Explain the precautions to be taken in handling and maintenance of files.
Explain the use of Hacksaw
Show the parts of hacksaw with a sketch.
List the types of Hacksaw blades
Explain the choice of above blades.
Explain the use of Cold Chisels
List the types of cold chisels
List the types of hammers.
Explain the parts of Ball peen hammer with a sketch.
Explain the use of Screw drivers.
List the types of Screw Drivers used in the workshop.
Explain the use of Taps and Dies
Explain the use of Cutting tools and Cutting Fluids
5.17 List the 6 important types of Cutting tool materials.
5.18 Explain the use of 1. High speed steels 2. Stelite 3.Cemented carbide 4. Ceramic 5. Cubic
Boron nitride 6. Diamond. For cutting tools.
5.19 Explain the need for cutting fluids
5.20 List the 5 types of cutting fluids
5.21 Mention the precautions to be taken while handling cutting fluids.
6.0
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
Understand the use of Machines Used in the workshop
List the important Operations carried out in the workshop 1. Drilling 2.Turning 3. Grinding 4.
Milling
Name the machines used to carry out the above operations.
Name the various parts of a drilling machine and mention their purpose.
List the cutting tools used with drilling machine.
Explain the use of twist drill and Reamer.
Explain Countersunk and Counter bore operations
I -49
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10
6.11
6.12
6.13
6.14
6.19
6.20
6.21
6.22
Explain how sheet metal drilling is carried out.
Explain How Plastic drilling is carried out.
Explain the process of Turning.
List the parts of Centre Lathe machine.
Explain the parts of Centre Lathe machine and their functions.
Explain the use of Face plate.
List the 6 important operations of lathe machine
Explain the operations 1. Turning 2. Drilling 3. Reaming 4. Boring 5. Taper turning.6. Thread
cutting
Explain the purpose of grinding
List the parts of surface grinding machine
Explain the functions of above.
Mention the two Abrasive materials used for grinding wheels and explain the importance of
grain size and grade.
Explain the milling operation.
List the Three types of Milling machines.
List the parts of Milling machines with a sketch.
Mention the purpose of above parts.
7.0
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
7.10
7.11
7.12
7.13
7.14
7.15
7.16
7.17
7.18
7.19
7.20
7.21
7.22
7.23
7.24
7.25
7.26
Comprehend the use of Mechanical Fasteners
List the Four types of Mechanical Fasteners 1. Screws Bolts, Nuts and Rivets.
Classify machine screws based on the types of screw Head
Explain the use of Socket screws and Self tapping screws
Explain the use of Bolts and Nuts
List different types of Nuts used in the industry.
Explain the Purpose of washers
List different types of screw threads
Explain the use of Self locking screws and Bolts.
Explain the use of locking Nuts
Explain thread locking.
Explain the use of Locking washers.
Mention the 4 types of Locking washers and circlips.
Explain the process of Riveting
Mention any 4 advantages of Riveting
Mention the applications of Rivets.
List the metals used for riveting
Explain how electrical connections are secured using mechanical fastening devices
Explain the use of Bullet connector for Automobile Electrical connections.
Explain the use of Adhesives for joining
Explain the advantages of joining parts by using adhesives
Mention the demerits of adhesives.
Classify adhesives
Explain the use of Thermoplastic Resins.
Explain the use of cyanoacrylate (Superglue)
Explain Thermosetting Resins
Explain the use of Epoxys
8.0
8.1
8.2
8.3
Understand the processes Soldering, Brazing and Welding
Explain the process of soft soldering.
Explain the use of flux in soldering
Explain the Heating requirements in the soldering process.
6.15
6.16
6.17
6.18
I -50
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.9
8.10
8.11
8.12
8.13
8.14
8.15
8.16
8.17
8.18
8.19
List three types of soldering joints for joining Electrical conductors.
Explain the metals and their mix ratios used in producing solder alloys.
Explain Eutectic point of metals.
Mention the Tin Lead ratios for a) general purpose Electrical soldering b) Plumber solder
and dipping baths.
Explain the process of Brazing.
Explain alloys used for brazing. brass and Silver Brazing
Explain the purpose of flux in Brazing.
Name the Fluxes used in Brazing
Mention heat sources suitable for brazing
Explain with a sketch the joint designs suitable for brazing
List any 4 applications of Brazing.
Explain the process of welding
Mention the two types of Welding
Explain the process of Arc Welding
Explain the Process of Gas welding.
Mention the applications of Arc and Gas welding.
9.0
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
9.9
9.10
Understand the purpose of Heat treatment of Steel
Explain the Process of Heat treatment.
List the desirable mechanical properties of steel
Explain the properties , Hardness , Toughness, Brittleness , Strength, Ductility, Malleability
Elasticity and toughness
With a Graph explain the relation between Critical temperature and carbon content
Explain the process of annealing
Explain the process of Normalizing
Explain the process of Hardening
Explain the process of surface hardening
Explain the process of Tempering
10.0 Understand Electrical Hazards – First aid and Safety
10.1 Explain the importance of safety in the industry.
10.2 Explain the major hazards which may arise from the use of electrical equipment
10.3 Explain the precautions to be taken to prevent accidents while using Machines
10.4 Explain how human body may act as a part of the circuit and cause Electrical shock
10.5 Explain method of first aid treatment for someone suffering from electric shock.
10.6 State general electrical safety rules
10.7 Explain the safety signs and colors
10.8 Show various safety symbols and explain their meaning.
10.9 Explain the causes of Fire and fire accidents in industry.
10.10 Explain Fire prevention measures.
10.11 List 4 types of Portable fire extinguishers
10.12 Explain the choice of above extinguishers.
10.13 Explain the First aid treatment in the case of burns
Course Content
1. Classification of materials
Atomic structure of the atom - Electronic structure of the atom - Energy band diagram - Types of
materials –Conductors- Insulators& Semiconductors-Effect of impurities - Metals commonly
I -51
used in Electrical and Electronics - Mechanical properties of materials - Electrical and
mechanical & General properties of Copper - Mechanical properties of Steel - Uses of different
conductors in electronics engineering - Corrosion and methods to prevent corrosion.Anodization of Aluminum
2. Insulating Materials
Insulating Materials - Electrical properties of Insulating materials - Insulating resistance, Volume
and Surface resistance - Factors affecting insulating resistance - Types of Insulating materials
on the basis of temperature like Y, A, E, B, F, H and C class - Properties of Impregnated paper,
Wood, Cardboard, Asbestos, Mica, Ceramics and Glass and uses of these insulating materials Thermoplastic & Thermosetting resins - Properties & applications of PVC
3. Magnetic Materials
Magnetic Materials – Classification-Ferromagnetic, Paramagnetic, Diamagnetic and
Ferrimagnetic - Soft and Hard magnetic materials - Important magnetic materials used in the
Electrical &Electronic industry - Properties of Magnetic materials - Effect of temperature on
magnetism - Curie point - Hysteresis and Hysteresis loss - Use of Soft Magnetic Materials like
Silicon sheet steel for transformers - Merits of Cold rolled grain oriented steels for transformer
4. Special Materials
Alloys - Important alloys used in electrical engineering - Low resistivity copper alloys: Brass,
Bronze - Use of cadmium copper and Beryllium copper - Alloys used for Bimetallic strips,
soldering and fuse material - Combination alloys of manganin, constantin, Nichrome, and
solder metal and their uses - Uses of Nickel-iron alloys - Ceramic material - Applications of
ceramic materials in the electrical engineering - Ferrites - Important properties of Ferrites Composition of Neodymium - Applications of Neodymium magnets - Superconductivity
phenomenon - Superconducting metals - Applications of superconductivity.
5. Introduction to Workshop practices and Hand Tools
Engineers Files - Parts of a file - Files used in the workshop and their usage - Precautions to be
taken - Hacksaw - Parts of hacksaw - Types of Hacksaw blades - Choice of Hacksaw blades Types of Cold Chisels and their uses - Types of hammers - Parts of Ball peen hammer – Types
of Screw drivers and their uses - Taps and Dies and their uses - Types of Cutting tools &
Cutting Fluids and their uses - Precautions to be taken while handling cutting fluids.
6. Machines Used in the workshop
Operations carried out in the workshop 1. Drilling 2.Turning 3. Grinding 4. Milling - Machines
used - Parts of a drilling machine – Types of cutting tools used with drilling machine - Twist drill
and Reamer - Countersunk and Counter bore operations - Sheet metal drilling - Plastic drilling Process of Turning - Parts of Centre Lathe machine and their functions - Face plate - Important
operations of lathe machine – Turning, Drilling, Reaming, Boring, Taper turning and Thread
cutting - Parts of surface grinding machine and their functions - Abrasive materials used for
grinding wheels - Importance of grain size and grade – Types of Milling machines - Parts of
Milling machines and their functions
7. Mechanical Fasteners
I -52
Types of Mechanical Fasteners - Screws Bolts, Nuts and Rivets – Classification of machine
screws - Use of Socket screws and Self tapping screws - Use of Bolts and Nuts - Different types
of Nuts used in the industry - Purpose of washers - Different types of screw threads - Use of
Self locking screws and Bolts - Use of locking Nuts - Thread locking - Use of Locking washers Types of Locking washers and circlips – Riveting and advantages of Riveting - Applications of
Rivets - Metals used for riveting - Mechanical fastening devices electrical connections - Use of
Bullet connector for Automobile Electrical connections - Use of Adhesives for joining Advantages of joining parts by using adhesives - Demerits of adhesives - Use of Thermoplastic
Resins - Use of cyanoacrylate (Superglue) - Thermosetting Resins - Use of Epoxys
8. Soldering, Brazing and Welding
Soldering - Use of flux in soldering - Heating requirements in the soldering process - Types of
soldering joints - Metals and their mix ratios used in producing solder alloys - Eutectic point of
metals - Electrical soldering and Plumber soldering – Brazing and alloys used for brazing Brass and Silver Brazing - Fluxes used in Brazing - Applications of Brazing – Types of Welding
and their applications
9. Heat treatment of Steel
Heat treatment of Steel – Steel properties: Hardness, Toughness, Brittleness, Strength, Ductility
and Malleability - Elasticity and toughness - Critical temperature and carbon content – Different
processes: Annealing, Normalizing, Hardening, Surface Hardening and Tempering
10. Electrical hazards - first aid and safety
Importance of safety in the industry - Use of electrical equipment and major hazards Precautions to be taken to prevent accidents - Human body and Electrical shock - Method of
first aid treatment - General electrical safety rules - Safety signs & colors and their meaning Fire and fire accidents in industry and prevention measures - Types of Portable fire
extinguishers - Choice of fire extinguishers
RECOMMENDED BOOKS
1. Material science for Electrical and Electronic engineers by Ian p.Jones
2. Elements of Workshop Technology. Vol. I: Manufacturing Processes Edition 4
by S K Hajra Choudhury & A K Choudhury – J.K. Pubs., Limited
3. Workshop processes, practices and Materials by Bruce J. Black
4. Electrical and Electronic Engineering Materials by SK Bhattacharya, Khanna Publishers,New
Delhi
5. Engineering Materials properties and selection by Kennith G Budinski, Prentice Hall, New
Delhi.
I -53
ENGINEERING DRAWING PRACTICE
Subject Title
Subject Code
Periods/Week
Periods Per Year
:
:
:
:
Engineering Drawing Practice
EC–107
06
180
Major Topics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Importance of
Engineering Drawing
Engineering Drawing
Instruments
Free hand lettering &
Numbering
Dimensioning
Practice
Geometrical
constructions
Projection of points,
Lines, Planes &
Solids
Auxiliary views
Sectional views
Orthographic
Projection
Pictorial drawing
Development of
surfaces
Total
No. of
Drawing
plates
TIME SCHEDULE
S.No
Periods
Weightage
of
Marks
Short
Answer
Questions
--
01
-
-
-
01
05
-
-
-
06
5
1
-
01
09
5
1
-
03
21
15
1
1
03
21
10
-
1
01
01
06
27
5
10
1
-
1
01
33
10
-
1
01
30
10
-
1
01
21
10
-
1
14
180
80
04
06
01
Essay type
Questions
The Course is aimed at developing basic graphic skills so as to enable them to use these skills in
preparation of engineering drawings, their reading and interpretation
Pre-Requisite: Clear visualization and sound pictorial intelligence
OBJECTIVES
Upon completion of the subject the student shall be able to
1.0
Understand the basic concepts of Engineering Drawing
1.1
State the importance of drawing as an engineering communication
I -54
medium
State the necessity of B.I.S. Code of practice for Engineering Drawing.
Explain the linkages between Engineering drawing and other subjects of
study in diploma course.
Use of Engineering Drawing Instruments
2.1
Select the correct instruments and draw lines of different orientation.
2.2
Select the correct instruments and draw small and large Circles.
2.3
Select the correct instruments for measuring distances on the drawing.
2.4
Use correct grade of pencil for different types of lines, thickness and
given function.
2.5
Select and use appropriate scales for a given application.
2.6
Identify different drawing sheet sizes as per I.S. and Standard Lay- outs.
2.7
Prepare Title block as per B.I.S. Specifications.
2.8
Identify the steps to be taken to keep the drawing clean and tidy.
1.2
1.3
2.0
Drawing Plate 1: (Having two exercises)
3.0
Write Free Hand Lettering and Numbers
3.1
Write titles using sloping lettering and numerals of 7mm, 10mm and 14mm height
3.2
Write titles using vertical lettering and numerals of 7mm, 10mm and 14mm height
3.3
Select suitable sizes of lettering for different layouts and applications
3.4
Practice the use of lettering stencils.
Drawing plate 2: (Having 5 to 6 exercises)
4.0
Understand Dimensioning Practice
4.1
Define “Dimensioning.
4.2
State the need of dimensioning the drawing according to accepted
standard.
4.3
Identify notations of Dimensioning used in dimensioned drawing.
4.4
Identify the system of placement of dimensions in the given
dimensioned drawing.
4.5
Dimension a given drawing using standard notations and desired
system of dimensioning.
4.6
Dimension standard features applying necessary rules.
4.7
Arrange dimensions in a desired method given in a drawing.
4.8
Identify the departures if any made in the given dimensioned drawing
with reference to SP-46-1988, and dimension the same correctly.
Drawing Plate 3: (Having 08 to10 exercises)
5.0
Apply Principles of Geometric Constructions
5.1
Divide a given line into desired number of equal parts internally.
5.2
Draw tangent lines and arcs.
5.3
Use General method to construct any polygon.
5.4
Explain the importance of conics
5.5
Construct conics (ellipse, parabola and hyperbola) by general method
5.6
Construct ellipse by concentric circles method
5.7
Construct parabola by rectangle method
5.8
Construct rectangular hyperbola from the given data.
5.9
Construct involute from the given data.
I -55
5.10 Construct cycloid and helix from the given data.
5.11 State the applications of the above constructions in engineering practice.
Drawing Plate -4: Having problems up to construction of polygon
Drawing Plate -5: Having problems of construction of conics
Drawing Plate -6: Having problems of construction of involute, cycloid and helix
6.0
Apply Principles of Projection of points, lines, planes & solids
6.1
Visualize the objects
6.2
Explain the I-angle and III-angle projections
6.2
Practice the I-angle projections
6.3
Draw the projection of a point with respect to reference planes (HP&VP)
6.4
Draw the projections of straight lines with respect to two reference
Planes (up to lines parallel to one plane and inclined to other plane)
6.5
Draw the projections of planes (up to planes perpendicular to one plane and
inclined to other plane)
6.6
Draw the projections of solids (up to axis of solids parallel to one plane and
inclined to other plane)
Drawing Plate -7: Having problems up to projection of points and Lines (15 exercises)
Drawing Plate -8: Having problems of projection of planes (6 exercises)
Drawing Plate -9: Having problems of projection of solids (10 exercises)
7.0
Understand the need of auxiliary views
7.1 State the need of Auxiliary views for a given engineering drawing.
7.2 Draw the auxiliary views of a given engineering component
7.3 Differentiate between auxiliary view and apparent view
Drawing plate No.10: (Having 4 exercises)
8.0
Appreciate the need of Sectional Views
8.1 Explain the need to draw sectional views.
8.2 Select the section plane for a given component to reveal maximum
information.
8.3 Explain the positions of section plane with reference planes
8.4 Differentiate between true shape and apparent shape of section
8.5 Draw sectional views and true sections of regular solids discussed in 6.0
8.6 Apply principles of hatching.
Drawing Plate–11: Having problems of section of solids (6 exercises)
9.0
Apply principles of orthographic projection
9.1 Explain the principles of orthographic projection with simple
sketches.
9.2 Draw the orthographic view of an object from its pictorial drawing.
9.3 Draw the minimum number of views needed to represent a given
object fully.
Drawing Plate 12 : (Having 10 to 12 exercises)
10.0
Prepare pictorial drawings
10.1 State the need of pictorial drawings.
10.2 Differentiate between isometric scale and true scale.
I -56
10.3 Prepare Isometric views for the given orthographic drawings.
Drawing plate 13: (Having 10 to 12 exercises)
11.0 Interpret Development of surfaces of different solids
11.1 State the need for preparing development drawing.
11.2 Prepare development of simple engineering objects (cubes, prisms, cylinders,
cones, pyramid) using parallel line and radial line method.
11.3 Prepare development of surface of engineering components like trays,
funnel, 900 elbow & rectangular duct.
Drawing plate No. 14: (Having 05 exercises)
S.No
1.
2.
Competencies and Key competencies to be achieved by the student
Major topic
Key Competency
 Explain the linkages between Engineering
drawing and other subjects of study in
Importance of Engineering Drawing
Diploma course.
Engineering Drawing Instruments
3.
Free hand lettering & Numbering
4.
Dimensioning Practice
5.
Geometrical construction
6.
Projection of points, Lines, Planes &
Solids

Select the correct instruments to draw
various entities in different orientation

Write titles using sloping and vertical
lettering and numerals as per B.I.S (Bureau
of Indian standards)

Dimension a given drawing using standard
notations
and
desired
system
of
dimensioning

Construct ellipse, parabola, rectangular
hyperbola, involute, cycloid and helix from
the given data.

Draw the projection of a point, straight lines,
planes & solids with respect to reference
planes (HP& VP)
Draw the auxiliary views of a given
Engineering component
Differentiate between Auxiliary view and
apparent view
Differentiate between true shape and
apparent shape of section
Use conventional representation of
Engineering materials as per B.I.S. Code.
Apply principles of hatching.
Draw simple sections of regular solids
Draw the minimum number of views
needed to represent a given object fully.

7.
Auxiliary views


8.

Sectional views



9.
Orthographic Projection

10.
Pictorial drawing

I -57
Differentiate between isometric scale and
true scale.
Draw the isometric views of given objects,.

11.
Development of surfaces
I -58
Prepare development of Surface of
Engineering components like trays,
funnel, 900 elbow & rectangular duct.
COURSE CONTENT
NOTE
1.
2.
B.I.S Specification should invariably be followed in all the topics.
A-3 Size Drawing Sheets are to be used for all Drawing Practice Exercises.
1.0
The importance of Engineering Drawing
Explanation of the scope and objectives of the subject of Engineering Drawing Its
importance as a graphic communication -Need for preparing drawing as per standards –
SP-46 –1988 – Mention B.I.S - Role of drawing in -engineering education – Link between
Engineering drawing and other subjects of study.
2.0
Engineering drawing Instruments
Classifications: Basic Tools, tools for drawing straight lines, tools for curved lines, tools for
measuring distances and special tools like mini drafter & drafting machine – Mentioning of
names under each classification and their brief description -Scales: Recommended scales
reduced & enlarged -Lines: Types of lines, selection of line thickness - Selection of Pencils
-Sheet Sizes: A0, A1, A2, A3, A4, A5, Layout of drawing sheets in respect of A0, A1, A3
sizes, Sizes of the Title block and its contents - Care and maintenance of Drawing Sheet,
Drawing plate:
Lay out of sheet – as per SP-46-1988 to a suitable scale.
Simple Exercises on the use of Drawing Instruments. Importance of Title Block.
3.0
Free hand lettering & numbering
Importance of lettering – Types of lettering -Guide Lines for Lettering
Practicing of letters & numbers of given sizes (7mm, 10mm and 14mm)
Advantages of single stroke or simple style of lettering - Use of lettering stencils
4.0
Dimensioning practice
Purpose of engineering Drawing, Need of B.I.S code in dimensioning -Shape
description of an Engineering object -Definition of Dimensioning size
description -Location of features, surface finish, fully dimensioned Drawing Notations or tools of dimensioning, dimension line extension line, leader line,
arrows, symbols, number and notes, rules to be observed in the use of above
tools -Placing dimensions: Aligned system and unidirectional system ( SP-461988)-Arrangement of dimensions Chain, parallel, combined progressive, and
dimensioning by co-ordinate methods-The rules for dimensioning standard,
features “Circles (holes) arcs, angles, tapers, chamfers, and dimension of
narrow spaces.
5.0
Geometric Construction
Division of a line: to divide a straight line into given number of equal parts
internally examples in engineering application.
Construction of tangent lines: to draw tangent lines touching circles
internally and externally.
Construction of tangent arcs
i) To draw tangent arc of given radius to touch two lines inclined at given
angle (acute, right and obtuse angles).
ii)Tangent arc of given radius touching a circle or an arc and a given line.
iii)Tangent arcs of radius R, touching two given circles internally and externally.
Construction of polygon:construction of any regular polygon of given side length using
I -59
general method
Conical Curves: Explanation of Ellipse, Parabola, Hyperbola, as sections of a
double cone and a loci of a moving point, Eccentricity of above curves – Their
Engg. application viz. Projectiles, reflectors, P-V Diagram of a
Hyperbolic process,
Construction of any conic section of given eccentricity by general method
Construction of ellipse by concentric circles method
Construction of parabola by rectangle method
Construction of rectangular hyperbola
General Curves: Involute, Cycloid and Helix, explanations as locus of a
moving point, their engineering application, viz, Gear tooth profile, screw
threads, springs etc. - their construction
6.0
Projection of points, lines and planes & solids
Projecting a point on two planes of projection -Projecting a point on three
planes of projection -Projection of straight line.
(a) Parallel to both the planes.
(b) Perpendicular to one of the planes.
(c) inclined to one plane and parallel to other planes
Projection of regular planes
(a) Plane perpendicular to HP and parallel to VP and vice versa.
(c) Plane perpendicular to HP and inclined to VP and vice versa.
Projection of regular solids
(a) Axis perpendicular to one of the planes
(b) Axis parallel to VP and inclined to HP and vice versa.
7.0
Auxiliary views
Need for drawing auxiliary views -Explanation of the basic principles of
drawing an auxiliary views explanation of reference plane and auxiliary plane Partial auxiliary view.
8.0
Sectional views
Need for drawing sectional views – what is a sectional view - Location of cutting plane –
Purpose of cutting plane line – Selection of cutting plane to give maximum information
(vertical and offset planes) - Hatching – Section of regular solids inclined to one plane and
parallel to other plane
9.0
Orthographic Projections
Meaning of orthographic projection -Using a viewing box and a model – Number of views
obtained on the six faces of the box, - Legible sketches of only 3 views for describing
object -Concept of front view, top view, and side view sketching these views for a number
of engg objects - Explanation of first angle projection. – Positioning of three views in First
angle projection Projection of points as a means of locating the corners of the
surfaces of an object – Use of miter line in drawing a third view when other two views are
given -Method of representing hidden lines -Selection of minimum number of views to
describe an object fully.
10.0
Pictorial Drawings
I -60
Brief description of different types of pictorial drawing viz., Isometric, oblique,
and perspective and their use - Isometric drawings: Iso axis, angle between
them, meaning of visual distortion in dimensions - Need for an isometric scale, difference
between Isometric scale, and ordinary scale difference between Isometric view and
Isometric projection - Isometric and non-Isometric lines -Isometric drawing of common
features like rectangles, circular - shapes, non-isometric lines - Use of box and offset
methods
11.0
Development of Surfaces
Need for preparing development of surface with reference to sheet metal work
-Concept of true length of a line with reference to its orthographic
projection when the line is (i) parallel to the plane of projection (ii) inclined to one principal
and parallel to the other -Development of simple solids like cubes, prisms, cylinders,
cones, pyramid (sketches only) -Types of development: Parallel line and radial line
development -Procedure of drawing development, drawings of trays, funnels, 900 elbow
pipes and rectangular ducts.
REFERENCE BOOKS
Engineering Graphics by P I Varghese – ( McGraw-hill)
Engineering Drawing by Basant Agarwal & C.M Agarwal - ( McGraw-hill)
Engineering Drawing by N.D.Bhatt.
T.S.M. & S.S.M on “ Technical Drawing” prepared by T.T.T.I., Madras.
SP-46-1998 – Bureau of Indian Standards.
I -61
Basic Electronic Workshop Practice
Subject title
Subject code
Periods per week
Periods / Semester
:
:
:
:
Basic Electronic Workshop Practice
EC-108
6
180
TIME SCHEDULE
Sl
NO
1
2
3
4
5
6
Major Topics
Safety precautions and cleaning
Identification of different Tools and Materials and their working
Identification of wires, cables , House wiring &Troubleshooting
Study and use of Electronic equipment
Testing of Electronic components
Soldering practice & Preparation of PCB
Group Project
Total Periods
Periods
3
33
36
12
42
30
24
180
List of the Experiments
I. Identification of different Tools and Materials and their working
1. To Demonstrate the safety precautions and first aid
2. To Clean the equipment and Work Tables including Visual inspection and
reporting any physical damage
3. To Practice with Measuring and Marking Tools
4. To Work with different types of screw Drivers.
5. To Work With Basic tools
6. To Work with Tools used in Electrical Wiring
7. To Work with different fastening devices, spanners, wrenches and Allen/ Hex keys
8. To Work with Pliers
9. To Work with Drilling Machine .
10. To Identify and observe the function of Grinding machine , Lathe machine ,
Milling machine and Blower.
11. To Work with Adhesives
12. To Identify conductors
insulating materials semiconductors and magnetic
materials
II. Identification of different wires, cables and House wiring
13. To Identify different wires and cables
14. To Practice wire joints
15. To Practice Termination of wires
16. To identify the Electrical accessories and their terminals
17. To Identify the mains supply Phase ,Neutral ,Ground By observation and testing
18. To verify the difference between AC and DC by Experimenting with 12 V battery
&Transformer
I -62
19. To Identify and Draw the electrical symbols of the corresponding component /item
20. To Make simple switch connections using low voltage transformer and 12V lamp
21. To Make either of two lamps glow by two way switch
22. To assemble and connect Tube light set(To be done in the presence of Instructor)
23. To Troubleshoot electrical appliances
III. Study and use of Electronic equipment
24. To Identify electronic equipment and draw their circuit Symbols
25. To Work with Multimeter (Both Digital and analog)
26. To Connect batteries in series and parallel and observe the output voltage
using DMM
27. To use the CRO and Function Generator to observe the signal and measure
Voltage
IV. Testing of Electronic components
28. To identify and work with Resistors
29. To Measure DC Voltage and DC current using Voltmeter , ammeter &Multimeter
30. To Verify Ohms Law and kirchoff’s laws
31. To Measure Resistance using Voltmeter and DRB
32. To Verify the laws of Resistance using a nichrome wire and Multimeter
33. To Verify the effect of temperature on Resistance Using electric lamp , Multimeter,
Voltmeter and Ammeter
34. To Verify voltage and current relationship in series and parallel resistive circuits.
35. To Wind coils using winding machine and test
36. To Experiment with transformer
37. To Identify and find the value of different types of capacitors
38. To verify the behaviour of capacitor
39. To determine the component type (Black box testing )using multimeter and
power supply
40. To Identify different switches &their terminals
41. To Connect a Fan regulator & switch to ceiling fan and test
42. To Test the given relay and identify NO and NC Contacts
43. To Identify the Bimetallic strip (used in Iron box) and observe its construction
VI. Soldering practice & Preparation of PCB
44. To Practice Soldering
45. To Practice Desoldering using Desoldering Wick and Desoldering Pump
46. To Use and populate General purpose PCB
47. To Identify and fix different types of connectors
48. To connect Public Address system and test
49. To Connect audio video equipment and LCD projector Tuning TV and test
50. To Connect the computer hardware (keyboard, mouse etc)
51. Group Project:
Competencies and Key competencies to be achieved by the student
I -63
ExpNo
1
Name of the Experiment
(No of Periods)
Demonstrate the safety
precautions and first aid
(1 ½)
2
To Clean the equipment and
Work Tables including
Visual inspection and
reporting any physical
damage (1 ½))
3
To Practice with Measuring
and Marking Tools (3)
4
To Work with different types
Competencies
Key Competencies
a) Follow the Precautions in
the laboratory ,(starting and
Stopping of equipment /
Machinery)
b)Identify the symbols and
their meaning
c) Identify the types of
emergencies
d) Follow the sequence of
steps to be carried out
e) Demonstrate basic first aid
procedure
a)Keep work area clean
b)Familiarization with
equipment
c)Follow the procedure for
cleaning with Detergents,
Shampoos and solvents.
d) Follow the precautions to
be taken (use of masks,
Gloves, Washing hands with
soda after cleaning the
equipment)
a)Use 1.Measuring Tape 2.
Steel rule 3.Trysquare 4.
Center Punch 5. Plumb
b)Use the measuring tape to
measure a distance of 6 feet
and above accurately and
mark.
c) Use the steel rule to
measure an odd length
given in inches and in
millimeters accurately and
mark.
d) Use the Try square to
mark perpendicular lines by
selecting a finished edge.
e) Use the centre punch to
mark centre points as per the
drawing
f) Use the plumb to observe
1) inclination of wall ii) mark
two horizontal points on a
wall at a given height and at
a given distance.
a)Select right screw driver
a) Take precautions
to prevent accidents
in the laboratory
b) Alert under
emergency
situations
c) Give Basic first
aid.
I -64
a)Clean the
equipment with
appropriate cleaning
agent.
b)Report any
damage of power
cords , missing
fuses , Low battery in
DMMS etc.
a)Use the right
measuring/ marking
tool carry out
measurements and
marking with
precision
b)Select right tool
a)Select right screw
5
6
of screw Drivers. (3)
a) Identify 1. Screw Driver a)
b) Flat Head Screwdrivers c)
Ratcheting Screwdrivers
c) Use the Screw Driver to
Remove and Fix wooden
Screws
d)To Fix and Remove
screws of Metal cabinets
using correct screw Driver
To Work With Basic tools (6)
a) Identify 1.Hacksaw frame/
Blade 2.Ball peen hammers
3. Sledge hammer. 4 Claw
hammer 5 Anvil 6 Chisels
7. Bench vice
b) Fix the Hacksaw blade in
the frame and use it to cut 1)
Conduit pipe 2) Cut the
Wooden piece with hacksaw
frame by fixing it in the
bench vice.
c) Use a cold chisel to cut
the 6mm Rod to required
length.
d) Use the sledge hammer
to bend a 6mm Rod into a
ring by striking it on the
Anvil
e) Drive nails in to a wooden
piece with ball peen
hammer.
f) Remove the Nails using
claw hammer
To Work with Tools used in
Electrical Wiring
(3)
A ) Identify 1. wire stripper
. 2. Insulation remover 3.
Pocket knife 5.Electrical
Tester 4.Phillips Head
Screwdrivers 5. Mallet 6.
Rawl plug jumper 7
.Standard wire Gauge
b) Use the above tools to
remove the insulation.
c) Use the mallet to
straighten the cable/
Conductor
d) Measure the gauge of
wire using Standard Wire
Gauge.
Tightening and removing
screws
b)Work with wood and
metal
c)Handle the screw drivers
with care
driver
b)Tighten and
remove the screws
a) identify and select the right
Hacksaw frame and blade
b) Fix the hacksaw blade
c) Use the hacksaw for
cutting metal
d) Use bench vice for fixing
the job
e) Use hammer with skill
a)Select Right tool
for a particular
situation
b) Use the tools with
skill
c) Fix the hacksaw
blade
d) Use the hacksaw
for cutting metal
e) Use hammer with
skill
a)Select right tool,
b)Remove the insulation
without damaging the
conductor using 1) Pocket
knife 2) Wire stripper
c)Measure the wire Gauge
d)Fix a screw in the wall.
a)Remove the
insulation
b)measure the wire
Gauge
c) Fix a screw in the
wall.
d)Use Rawl plug
jumper
I -65
7
8
9
10
e) Make a hole in the wall for
fixing a Screw/ Nail using
Raw plug Jumper and ball
peen Hammer.
To Work with different
fastening devices, spanners,
wrenches and Allen/ Hex
keys (3)
1. Identification of different
types of fastening devices
like Screws, Bolts and Nuts,
Rivets, and know their
specifications
b) Tighten the bolts and
nuts using correct type and
number of spanner a)
Normal b) Ring type ,
c) Use the Monkey Wrench
and Pipe wrench to Tighten
GI pipe coupling
To Work with Pliers (3)
a) Identify and use the
various features of cutting
pliers, Nose pliers, Pipe
pliers, Flush cutter, top
cutting pliers, Electronics
pliers, Insulated cutting
pliers
b) perform the following
operations 1. Holding 2.
Wire cutting 3. Component
bending 4. Twisting the wire
To Work with Drilling
Machine . (3)
a) Use the Hand drill to
make holes in the wood
c) use Electrical hand held
hammer drill to make holes
in the wall.
b . Identify Electrical drilling
machine and observe how
holes are made in Mild steel
Plates
To Identify and observe the
function of
Grinding
machine , Lathe machine ,
Milling machine and Blower.
(3)
a)identify various fastening
devices by their name and
shape
b)Select the right fastener
c)Use the spanner for
tightening and loosening the
bolts and nuts
d)Use the Monkey Wrench
and Pipe wrench to Tighten
GI pipe coupling
a)Use the fastening
devices
b)Work with bots ,
nuts and couplings
a)identify various types of
{Pliers by their name and
shape
b)Select the right pliers for a
particular job
c)Perform various operations
using pliers
a)Use the suitable
pliers for a given job
a)Identify the parts of Drilling
Machine and drill bits used
with hand drilling machine
a)Use the drilling
machine to make
holes
b)Fix the drilling bit in the
chuck
c) Follow Safety precautions
d)Make the drill with
precision
a) Identify Grinding machines
and observe its usage to
sharpen cutting tools and
Drill bits and for cutting
operation on metals.
b) Identify Lathe machine
and observe various
I -66
a)Identify the
machine and its
function.
b)Identify the
processes carried
out on the job
11
12
13
To Work with Adhesives
(3)
a) Practice the use of
adhesives like Araldite ,
Feviquick, Fevicol, Mseal, to
join Non metals
b) To Use PVC cement to
join PVC Pipes
To Identify conductors
insulating materials
semiconductors and magnetic
materials like (3)
1. Copper , Aluminum , Tin
,Solder Metal .
2. Plastics, Teflon, PVC,
glass, porcelain, ceramic
Bakelite, Mica, Paper,
Cotton sleeves, Prespahn
sheet, Transformer Oil. Etc
3. Carbon rods
4. Iron , Steel, Ferrites
To Identify different wires
and cables (1 ½)
Identify
A).Hookup wires i) PVC
wire ii) Teflon wires iii) single
strand iv) multi strand
B) .Wires used for electrical
wiring i) Service wire
ii) TRS wires /PVC Wires
(Al and Cu)
iii)
Single
strand iv) Multi strand v)
twisted Flexible pair wires
vi). Enameled copper wire
operations like turning , taper
turning , Knurling , Boring Etc
c) Identify the milling
machine and Know its usage.
d) identify the Electric Blower
and use it for Removing dust
and cleaning
a)Practice joining using
different adhesives
b)Select right adhesive
c)Use Quickfix and Feviquick
to fix components on PCBs
a)Join the parts
using Araldite, Mseal
etc.
b)Use Quickfix and
Feviquick to Fix
components on
PCBs
a)Identify the Copper ,
aluminum , iron and other
metals by physical
observation
b)Identify the Insulating
materials by their name and
physical observation
a)identify different
conducting and
Insulating materials
a) Identify the wires by their
technical names
b) Identify the gauge of the
wire
c) Identify the insulation
used and its purpose
d) Identify the difference
between single strand and
Multistrand wire
e) Select a wire for a
particular application
f) Find the current carrying
capacity from the gauge of
wire (refer to the standard
tables)
a) Identify the type of
wire and its current
carrying capacity
b) Measure the wire
gauge
C) i) Power cord. Ii) UTP
cables iii) Co axial cables iV)
Flat ribbon cable for
antennas v) Telephone
cable vi)Ethernet cable vii)
Ribbon cables viii) Optical
fiber
I -67
14
15
16
17
To Practice wire joints (3)
To perform the following
wire joints operations a)
Twisting b) Splicing c)
Insulating d) Western union
joint e) Married joint f)
Britania (straight Joint) g)
Tee joint h) Joining running
cables ,Pigtail or rat tail
joint
To Practice Termination of
wires (1 ½)
a) Using lugs Using screws
, nuts Terminal blocks
Fixing Fuse wire
To identify the Electrical
accessories(1 ½)
a) SPST Switch ,SPDT
switch , Two pin and 3pin
Sockets and plugs ,Power
Socket and Power plugs
Lamp holders, Ceiling rose,
Mains Switch,MCB ,Kitkat
Fuse – Fuse wire ratings
To Identify the mains supply
Phase ,Neutral ,Ground
By observation and testing
(3)
a) To Repair /prepare 2pin
and 3pin power cords
18
To verify the difference
between AC and DC by
Experimenting with 12 V
battery &Transformer (3)
1. To Verify unidirectional
current flow
2. To Verify the effects of
polarity
3. To Determine polarity
using a Voltmeter /LED
4. To verify reversal of
current using battery
and DPDT switch
a) Identify the types of joints
and state their purpose.
b) Select the right joint
c) Remove the insulation
d) Make the joint
e) Tape the joint
a) Make the joint
professionally and
tape
a) Identify different types of
terminal blocks
b) Make connections using
lugs,Screws
c) Fix the fuse wire
a) Identify different electrical
accessories
b) Identify the item by its
shape
c) Use appropriate electrical
accessories
Use the terminal
Block
Fix the fuse wire
a) Follow Precautions
Identification of Phase
Neutral and Earth terminals
in mains supply by
b) 1 observation 2 Using
Tester 3 Using Test Lamp
4) Using DMM
c) Make 2pin and 3pin Plug
connections
d) Make Power socket and
switch connections
e) Test the earth connection
a) To Check the polarity of
DC voltage source
b) Find the polarity in DC
circuits by using DMM/
multimeter
c) Observe the AC signal on
CRO
a) Identify phase
and Neutral
terminals in mains
supply with tester
b) Identify Earth
connections with
Test lamp
6. To observe AC waveform
I -68
a) Select appropriate
Electrical
accessories.
b) make
connections
professionally
c) Work with MCBS
KITKAT Fuses
a) Check the source
type (AC/DC) using
DMM / Multimeter
b) Finding polarity in
DC circuits
c) Use the CRO to
observe waveform
19
20
21
22
23
24
on CRO using a Low voltage
Transformer
To Identify and Draw the
a) Identify the physical
a) Identify the
electrical symbols of
component from the symbol
physical component
the corresponding
from the symbol
component /item(1 ½)
To Make simple switch
a) Make the simple Switch
a) Use the switch for
connections using low
connections
controlling lamp
voltage transformer and 12V b) use the two way switch
circuits
lamp(1 ½)
for stair case wiring and
a) Use Two way
1. Connecting a 6V lamp to
c) Series and parallel
switches for stair
a switch (toggle)
connection of lamps
case wiring and
2. 2 way switch connections
other controls
3. Series and parallel
connection of lamps
To Make either of two
a) Make two way Switch
a) Use two way
lamps glow by two way
circuit connections
switch circuits for
switch(1 ½)
b) Use two way switch for
controlling different
5. Bright and Dim light
controlling lamps.
circuits and
arrangement
equipment.
(using a series lamp / using
a Diode)
6.either two lamps bright or
two lamps dim
To assemble and connect
a) Identify the parts of tube
a) Make tube light
Tube light set(To be done in
light set
connections
the presence of Instructor)
b) Make tube light
(1 ½)
connections
b)To test the Effect of Low
c) Identify the Choke and
Voltage On tube light (
starter
Instructor applies low
d) Observe the behavior of
voltage With an auto
tubelight under low voltage
Transformer)
conditions
c) To start the tube light with e) Open and observe the
starter removed.
construction of choke
d) To Open the choke cover
f)
and observe the
g) Verify the purpose of
constructional details
starter
e) To connect a CFL Lamp h) Observe the CFL lamp
and draw comparison
To Troubleshoot electrical
a) Identify the problem in
a) Identify and
appliances (15) , like
Electrical gadgets by testing
rectifythe problem in
a) Electric Iron
it with
Electrical Gadgets
b) heating coil
b) a) physical observation
c) Electric Heater
c) b) Troubleshoot
d) Air cooler
d) i. Using tester ii. Using test
Lamp
To Identify electronic
a) Draw the symbols used in a) Identify and draw
equipment and draw their
Electronic Circuits
the symbols used in
circuit Symbols(3)
b) Identify the meters and
Electronic Circuits
I -69
25
26
. Identification of meters and
equipment
1. DMM 2. Analog Multimetr
3.DC Voltmeters/Ammeters
4. DC Power supply
5. DRB 6. DCB 7. DIB
8. CRO 9. Function
Generator etc
To Work with Multimeter
(Both Digital and analog) (3)
a)To Measure resistance of
a wire/Component using
multimeter
b) To check continuity with
multimeter
c)To Measure Battery
Voltage using Voltmeter and
Multimeter
To Connect batteries in
series and parallel and
observe the output voltage
using DMM (3)
equipment
c) Use DRB, DIB and DCB
d) Set the required voltage
On power supply
a) Identify analog and Digital
multimeters
b) Zero adjusting analog
multimeter
c) Select the correct Range
d) Measuring Voltage ,
Current and Resistance with
Multimeter
b) Identify the
meters and
equipment
c) Use DRB, DIB
and DCB
d) Set the required
voltage On power
supply
a) Use the
Multimeter to
measure Voltage,
current , Resistance
by choosing correct
range and mode.
a) Measure DC voltage with
DMM
b) Test the cells
c) practice Series and
Parallel connection of Cells
d) Observe the polarity
e) observe the effect on
Terminal Voltage
a) Make series and
parallel connection
of batteries
b) Use DMM to
measure Voltage
a)Connect function
generator to CRO with
BNC connector
b)Adjust front panel
controls
c) Measure the voltage
Measure the AC/DC
signal Voltage using
CRO
27
To use the CRO and
Function Generator to
observe the signal and
measure Voltage (3)
28
Toidentify & Work with
Resistors (3)
a) To Identify different types
of resistors i) CFR ii) MFR
iii)Resistor packs iv) Wire
wound Resistors,v) Presets
b) To determine Resistance
from colour code
c) To Connect resistors in
series and parallel and
measuring the resistance
using multimeter
d) To make Rheostat
connections
a) Identify different types of
resistors
b) Find the value of
Resistance from colour code
of CFR and MFR types
c) Use resistor combination
to get desired resistance
d) Identify the terminals on
Rheostat
e) Set the Rheostat to
Minimum and maximum
positions
f) Observe Resistance
change using DMM
a) Identify resistance
type by observation
b) Finding the value
of Resistance from
colour code of CFR
ang MFR types
c) Set the Rhrostat
to Minimum and
maximum positions
29
To Measure DC Voltage and
DC current (3)
b) To measure Voltage
a) Connect Voltmeter and
Ammeter to measure DC
Voltage and Current using
a) measure DC
Voltage and Current
using Voltmeter and
I -70
&current using Multimeter
30
To Verify Ohms Law and
Kirchoffs laws(3)
31
To Measure Resistance
using Voltmeter and DRB
(1 ½)
32
To Verify the laws of
Resistance using a nichrome
wire and Multimeter(1 ½)
33
34
35
36
37
Voltmeter and Ammeter
b) Measure Voltage &Current
using Multimeter
a) verify ohms law&
Kirchoff’s laws and establish
relation between Voltage
current and Resistance
a) Use the DRB
b) Apply Ohms law in
practical situations
a) verify the laws of
Resistance experimentally
b) Measure resistance
using Multimeter
To Verify the effect of
a) Measure Resistance
temperature on Resistance
using multimeter by selecting
Using electric lamp
correct range
,Multimeter, Voltmeter and
b) Observe the difference
Ammeter (3)
between Cold Resistance
and Hot Resistance
To Verify voltage and current a) Observe branch currents
relationship in series and
in series Parallel circuits
parallel resistive circuits(3)
b) Verifying current division
in parallel circuits with
calculated values
To Wind coils using winding
a) use Coil winding Machine
machine (3)
and wind a coil of required
.a) To Make an
number of turns
Electromagnet and testing it
b) Make an electromagnet
on a DC power supply.
c) Observe the relation
between Current , Number of
turns and Power of magnet
To Experiment with
a) Identify the transformer
transformer (3)
type based on tappings
a)Identify the transformer
b) i. Center tapped ii. Multi
type based on tappings
tapped iii. Normal
i. Center tapped ii. Multi
c) Test the given
tapped iii. Normal
transformer using a
b) To test the given
multimeter identify the
transformer using a
windings
multimeter identify the
d) Find the Transformation
windings
ratio
c) To find the Transformation e) Verify step up or step
ratio
down action of transformer
d) To Verify step up or step
down action of transformer
To Identify and find the
a) Identify different types of
value of different types of
capacitors by their name
capacitors (1 ½)
b) Read the specifications
a) Find the
and Ratings
I -71
Ammeter
a) Practically verify
the relation between
Voltage current and
Resistance
a) Measure the
Resistance using
Voltmeter and DRB
a) Use the
multimeter to
measure
Resistance
a) Measure Voltage
current and
resistance
a) Measure
currents and
Voltages and draw
inferences
a) Wind the coil and
Test it
a) Identify the type
of transformer
b) Test the
transformer with
multimeter
a) Identify capacitor
type
b) Read the value of
capacitor
38
39
40
41
42
value/specifications of
capacitor from Value printed
,and from Color code
To verify the behavior of
capacitor (3)
a) To verify charging and
discharging using an LED
a) Investigate the effect of
connecting capacitors in
series and parallel
b) To Test the capacitor
Using multimeter, AC
source (Transfomer /
Function generator) and
headphones
To determine the component
type (Black box testing
)using multimeter and power
supply(1 ½)
a) identify the given
component concealed in a
box with two terminals
available for testing using
multimeter and power supply
To Identify different
switches &their terminals (3)
a) Identify different types of
switches and their symbols
b) To use Toggle switches
Rotary switches, Push
button switches, DIP
switches
b)To Control a small Tape recorder motor with a DPDT
switch to run in forward and
Reverse Directions.
To Connect a Fan regulator
& switch to ceiling fan and
test(3)
a)To observe the rotary
switch connections and
power Resistors
To Test the given relay and
identify NO and NC
Contacts(3)
b) To Use the relay to
control a lamp load
c) Find the value of
capacitor from the color code
c) Test the capacitor
a) Verify the behavior of
capacitor by experimentation
b) Connect Capacitors in
series and parallel and
observing the effect on total
capacitance
c) Test the capacitor using
multimeter and other
methods
a) Verify the
behavior of
capacitors
b)
c) Connect
capacitors in series
parallel combination
to get desired value
d)
e) Test the
capacitors
a) Identify a given
component by testing with
DMM and power supply
a) Identify a given
component by
testing with DMM
and power supply
b)
a) Identify different types of
switches by observation , By
name and symbol
b) Use DPDT switch to
reverse the Direction Tape
recorder motor
c) Observe the
constructional details and
ratings of tape recorder
motor
a) Identify the type
of switch and its
name
b) Use DPDT switch
c) Test switches
using DMM
a) Identify and Use the
Rotary switch
b) Read the Fan Regulator
circuit
c) Make Fan Regulator
connections
d) Identify the type of
Resistors used in the Fan
Regulator
a) Observe the
constructional details of
Relay
b) Test /identify the coil
connections with Multimeter
a) Make Fan
Regulator
connections
I -72
a) Make relay
connections
b) Test and use
the relay
43
44
45
46
47
c) To Use the double pole
relay to control a fan motor
d) To Make a simple relay
motor control using double
pole relay and push button
switches
To Identify the Bimetallic
strip (used in Iron box) and
observe its construction(3)
a)To Open the tube light
starter and observe its
construction.
b) To Connect a tubelight
starter in series with an
incandescent lamp and
observe the operation of
bimetallic strip
To Practice Soldering (9)
by
I. Making wire tips
II. joining wires
III. joining components
IV. populating simple circuits
like, Audio amplifier ) on a
breadboard
b)To test the soldered
connections using
multimeter
To Practice Desoldering
using Desoldering Wick and
Desoldering Pump(3)
To Use and populate
General purpose PCB (6)
a) To work with solder less
bread board
To Identify and fix different
types of connectors
Identify(3)
a) power connectors
b) Molex connectors
c)Edge connectors
d)Terminal blocks
e) Wire to Board, Board to
c) Use the relay in practical
circuits
a) Identification of Bimetallic
Strip
b) Verify the behavior of
Bimetallic strip
c) Observe the
constructional details of tube
light starter
d) Use bimetallic strip in
practical circuits
a) Identify Bimetallic
strips
b) Use the Bimetallic
strips in practical
applications.
a) Check whether a metal is
solderable
b) Check solder
specifications
c) use the Flux in soldering
Practice the soldering
d) check the soldered joint by
physical observation and
Multimeter
a) Practice
soldering
b) Populate PCBs
c) Test the PCB
tracks with DMM
a) Desolder using
b) a) Desoldering Wick
c) b)Desoldering Pump
a) Bend the components
b) Design the component lay
out
c) Form common Ground
d) Populate the circuit
e) Cut and join the tracks
wherever necessary
f) Use the correct colour
code for wires
g) Work with solderless
bread board
a) Identify different types of
connectors used in electronic
circuits by their name
b) Select the right
connector and terminal
blocks based on the
requirements
a) Desolder using
Wick and Pump
I -73
a) Bend the
component leads As
per layout design
b) Use correct
colour code for wires
c) Work with
solderless Bread
board
a) Identify different
types of connectors
used in electronic
circuits by their
name and use them
in the circuits
b) Select the right
connector
48
49
50
51
Board , Flat cable
connectors Keyed
connectors for microphone
Male and Female types
f) Lugs , Blade connectors,
Ring and spade terminals
etc
To connect Public Address
system and test(3)
c) Fix the wire
terminals.
d) Connect lugs by
crimping and
soldering
a) Make amplifier and
a) Connect the
speaker connections
amplifier ,
b) Observe Impedance
microphone and
matching
speakers
c) Use the various front
panel and back panel
controls
To Connect audio video
a) Identify user controls on
a) Set up the
equipment and LCD
the equipment
projector using
projector Tuning TV and test b) Set up the LCD projector
menu control/
(3)
using menu control/ Remote
Remote control
control
b) Tune the TV
c) Identify audio video
receiver/ set top box
sockets on LCD projector /TV
monitor/DVD player
d) Connect audio video cable
to the Monitor/ Projector to
the DVD / Settop box and
testing
To Connect the computer
a) Connect the basic
a) Connect external
hardware (keyboard, mouse
computer Hardware CPU ,
hardware to the CPU
etc) (3)
Keyboard , Mouse etc
b) Set up LCD
a) connect computer to LCD b) Identify the ports on CPU projector
projector
c) Connect Speakers to the
c) Connect
computer)
PC/Laptop to
d) Identify Computer Power
Projector
switch and various ports on
CPU
e) Identify various computer
cables
f) Connect mouse &
keyboard
g) Connect headphones
/speakers/ Microphone
h) Connect the monitor/ LCD
Projector using VGA /HDMI
cable
Group Project (24)
a) Read the circuit diagram
a) Complete the
Assemble and test a small
b) Identify & select the
project and Test it
0 to 12V , 500mA DC Power Electronic components
supply using Multi tapped c) Populate on General
transformer and a Rotary purpose PCB
switch with enclosure
d) Test the circuit
I -74
e) Assemble the circuit and
fix it in an enclosure
Note : Group Project is compulsory (Not to be given in the End Examination)
I -75
ENGINEERING PHYSICS LAB PRACTICE
Subject Title
Subject Code
Periods per week
Total periods per year
:
:
:
:
Engineering Physics Lab Practice
EC -109 A (Common)
03
45
TIME SCHEDULE
Name of the Experiment
S.No
No. of
Periods
2.
Hands on practice on Vernier Calipers
Hands on practice on Screw gauge
03
03
3.
Verification of Parallelogram law of forces and Triangle law of forces
03
4.
Simple pendulum
03
5.
Velocity of sound in air – (Resonance method)
03
6.
Focal length and Focal power of convex lens (Separate & Combination)
03
7.
Refractive index of solid using traveling microscope
03
8.
Surface tension of liquid using traveling microscope
03
9.
Coefficient of viscosity by capillary method
03
1.
10. Boyle’s law verification
11. Meter bridge
12.
03
03
Mapping of magnet lines of force
03
Revision
06
Test
03
Total:
Objectives:
Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to
1.0
2.0
Practice the Vernier caliper to determine the volume of a cylinder and sphere
Practice the Screw gauge to determine thickness of a glass plate and cross section
of a wire
3.0 Verify the parallelogram law and Triangle law
4.0 Determine the value of acceleration due to gravity using Simple Pendulum
5.0 Determine the velocity of sound in air at room temperature
6.0 Determine the Focal length and focal power of convex lenses using U-V method
7.0 Determine the refractive index of a solid using travelling microscope
8.0 Determine the surface tension of a liquid using travelling microscope
9.0 Determine the viscosity of a liquid using capillary method
10.0 Verify the Boyle’s law employing a Quill tube
11.0 Determine the specific resistance of wire material using Meter Bridge
12.0 Practice the mapping of magnetic lines of force
I -76
45
Competencies and Key competencies to be achieved by the student
Name of the Experiment
Competencies
Key competencies
1. Hands on practice on Vernier
Calipers




2. Hands on practice on Screw gauge
 Find the Least count
 Fix the specimen in posit
 Read the scales
 Calculate thickness of
glass place and cross
section of wire
 Fix suitable weights
 Note the positions of
threads on drawing
sheet
 Find the angle at
equilibrium point
 Construct
parallelogram
 Compare the
measured diagonal
 Construct triangle
 Find
thesimple
length of sides
Fix the
 pendulum to the stand
 Adjust the length of
pendulum
 Find the time for
number of oscillations
 Find the time period
 Calculate the
acceleration due to
gravity
 Draw l-T and l-T2 graph
 Read the scales
 Calculate thickness of
given glass plate
 Calculate cross section
of wire


3. Verification of Parallelogram law of
forces and Triangle law of forces
4. Simple pendulum
5. Velocity of sound in air
–Resonance method



Find the Least count
Fix the specimen in posit
Read the scales
Calculate the volume of
given object
Arrange the resonance
apparatus
Adjust the reservoir
level for booming sound
Find the first and
second resonanting
lengths
Calculate velocity of
sound
I -77
 Read the scales
 Calculate the volume
of given object
 Find the angle at
equilibrium point
 Constructing
parallelogram
 Construct triangle
 Compare the ratios of
force and length







Find the time for number
of oscillations
Find the time period
Calculate the
acceleration due to
gravity
Draw l-T and l-T2 graph
Adjust the reservoir
level
Find the first and
second resonanting
lengths
Calculate velocity of
sound
Calculate velocity of
sound at 00 C
Name of the Experiment
6. Focal length and Focal power of
convex lens (Separate &
Combination)
7. Refractive index of solid using
traveling microscope
Competencies







8. Surface tension of liquid using
traveling microscope





9. Coefficient of viscosity by capillary
method







Fix the object distance
Find the Image distance
Calculate the focal
length and power of
convex lens and
combination of convex
lenses
Draw
u-vleast
and 1/u
– 1/v
Find the
count
of
vernier on microscope
Place the graph paper
below microscope
Read the scale
Calculate the refractive
index of glass slab
Find the least count of
vernier on microscope
Focus the microscope
to the lower meniscus &
bent pin
Read the scale
Calculate height of
liquid rise
Calculate the surface
tension of water
Find the least count of
vernier
Fix the capillary tube to
aspiratory bottle
Find the mass of
collected water
Find the pressure head
Calculate rate of
volume of liquid
collected
Find the radius of
capillary tube
Calculate the viscosity
of water using capillary
method
I -78
Key competencies


Calculate the focal
length and power of
convex lens
Draw u-v and 1/u – 1/v
graph


Read the scale
Calculate the refractive
index of glass slab


Read the scale
Calculate height of
liquid rise
Calculate the surface
tension of water





Find the pressure head
Calculate rate of
volume of liquid
collected
Find the radius of
capillary tube
Calculate the viscosity
of water
Name of the Experiment
10. Boyle’s law verification
Competencies





11. Meter bridge



12. Mapping of magnet lines of
force






Note the atmospheric
pressure
Fix the quill tube to
retort stand
Find the length of air
column
Find the pressure of
enclosed air
Find and compare the
calculated value P x l
Make the circuit
connections
Find the balancing
length
Calculate unknown
resistance
Find the radius of wire
Calculate the specific
resistance
Draw magnetic
meridian
Placed the bar
magnet in NN and
NS directions
Draw magnetic
lines of force
Locate the neutral
points along
equatorial and axial
lines
I -79
Key competencies








Find the length of air
column
Find the pressure of
enclosed air
Find the value P x l
Find the balancing
length
Calculate unknown
resistance
Calculate the specific
resistance
Draw magnetic lines
of
force
Locate the neutral
points
along equatorial and
axial lines
ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY LAB PRACTICE
Subject Title
Subject Code
Periods per week
Total periods per year
:
:
:
:
Engineering Chemistry Lab Practice
EC-109 B (Common)
03
45
TIME SCHEDULE
Name of the Experiment
S.No
No. of Periods
03
03
2.
Familiarization of methods for Volumetric analysis
Preparation of Std Na2 CO3 and making different diluted solution.
3.
Estimation of HCl solution using Std. Na2 CO3 solution
03
4.
Estimation of NaOH using Std. HCl solution
03
5.
Estimation of H 2 SO 4 using Std. NaOH solution
03
6.
Estimation of Mohr’s Salt using Std. KMnO4
03
7.
Determination of acidity of water sample
Determination of alkalinity of water sample
03
1.
8.
03
Determination of total hardness of water using Std. EDTA
10. Estimation of Chlorides present in water sample
11. Estimation of Dissolved Oxygen (D.O) in water sample
03
12.
03
9.
Determination of pH using pH meter
13.
Determination of conductivity of water and adjusting ionic strength to
required
level.
14. Determination
of turbidity of water
15. Estimation of total solids present in water sample
Total:
03
03
03
03
03
45
Objectives:
Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
Practice volumetric measurements (using pipetts, measuring jars, volumetric flask,
burettes) and gravimetric measurements (using different types of balances), making
dilutions, etc.
Practice making standard solutions with pre weighted salts and to make desired dilutions
using appropriate techniques.
Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures and using Std. Na2 CO3 solution for
estimation of HCl
Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures and using Std. HCl solution for
estimation of NaOH
Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures and using Std. NaOH solution for
estimation of H 2 SO 4
I -80
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
10.0
11.0
12.0
13.0
14.0
15.0
Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures and using Std. KMnO4 solution for
estimation of Mohr’s Salt
Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures to determine the acidity of given samples
of water (One ground water and one surface / tap water, and rain water if available)
Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures to determine the alkalinity of given
samples of water (One ground water and one surface / tap water)
Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures to determine the total hardness of given
samples of water (One ground water and one surface / tap water) using Std. EDTA
solution
Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures to determine the chlorides present in the
given samples of water and wastewater (One ground water and one surface / tap water)
Conduct the test using titrometric / electrometric method to determine Dissolved Oxygen
(D.O) in given water samples (One sample from closed container and one from open
container / tap water)
Conduct the test on given samples of water / solutions (like soft drinks, sewage, etc.) to
determine their pH using standard pH meter
Conduct the test on given samples of water / solutions
a)
To determine conductivity
b)
To adjust the ionic strength of the sample to the desired value
Conduct the test on given samples of solutions (coloured and non coloured) to determine
their turbidity in NTU
Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures to determine the total solids present in
given samples of water (One ground water and one surface / tap water)
Competencies and Key competencies to be achieved by the student
Name of the Experiment
Competencies
Familiarization of methods for
Volumetric analysis
Preparation of Std Na2 CO3
and making different diluted
solution
Key competencies
--
--
 Weighting the salt to the
accuracy of .01 mg
 Measuring the water with
volumetric flask, measuring
jar, volumetric pipette and
graduated pipette
 Making appropriate dilutions
 Weighting the salt to the
accuracy of .01 mg
 Measuring the water with
volumetric flask, measuring
jar, volumetric pipette and
graduated pipette
 Making appropriate dilutions
I -81
Name of the Experiment
Competencies
Key competencies
Estimation of HCl solution
using Std. Na2 CO3 solution
 Cleaning the glassware and
Estimation of NaOH using Std.
HCl solution
Estimation of H 2 SO 4 using Std.
NaOH solution
Estimation of Mohr’s Salt
using Std. KMnO4
Determination of acidity of
water sample
Determination of alkalinity of
water sample
Determination of total
hardness of water using Std.
EDTA solution
rinsing with appropriate
solutions
 Making standard solutions
 Making standard solutions
 Measuring accurately the
 Measuring accurately the
standard solutions and titrants
 Filling the burette with titrant
 Fixing the burette to the stand
 Effectively Controlling the flow
of the titrant
 Identifying the end point
 Making accurate observations
standard solutions and
titrants
 Effectively Controlling the
flow of the titrant
 Identifying the end point
 Making accurate
observations
 Calculating the results
Estimation of Chlorides
present in water sample
Estimation of Dissolved
Oxygen (D.O) in water
sample (By titration method)
Estimation of Dissolved Oxygen
(D.O) in water sample (By
electrometric method)
Determination of pH using pH
meter
Determination of conductivity of
water and adjusting ionic
strength to required level
Determination of turbidity of
water
 Familiarize with
instrument
 Choose appropriate
‘Mode’ / ‘Unit’
 Prepare standard
solutions / buffers, etc.
 Standardize the
instrument with
appropriate standard
solutions
 Plot the standard curve
 Make measurements
accurately
 Follow Safety precautions
I -82
 Prepare standard
solutions / buffers, etc.
 Standardize the
instrument with
appropriate standard
solutions
 Plot the standard curve
 Make measurements
accurately
Name of the Experiment
Estimation of total solids
present in water sample
Competencies
 Measuring the accurate
volume and weight of
sample
 Filtering and air drying
without losing any filtrate
 Accurately weighing the
filter paper, crucible and
filtrate
 Drying the crucible in an
oven
I -83
Key competencies
 Measuring the accurate
volume and weight of
sample
 Filtering and air drying
without losing any
filtrate
 Accurately weighing the
filter paper, crucible and
filtrate
COMPUTER FUNDEMENTALS LAB PRACTICE
Subject Title
Subject Code
Periods/Week
Periods/Year
: Computer Fundamentals Laboratory Practice
: EC-110 (Common)
: 03
: 90
List of Experiments:
S. No.
Major Topics
No. of sessions
each of 3 periods duration
No. of
Periods
I.
Computer hardware Basics
01
03
II.
Windows Operating System
02
06
III.
MS Word
09
27
IV.
MS Excel
09
27
V.
MS PowerPoint
09
27
30
90
Total
Rationale:
The knowledge of Computer usage has become a must for everyone, due to
widespread computer usage and related applications in all fields. This laboratory is designed to
give the students hands on practice of Windows Operating System and MS Office to enable the
students to use these skills in future courses.
I. Computer Hardware Basics (Not for end examination)
1. a).To Familiarize with Computer system and hardware connections
b).To start and Shut down Computer correctly
c). To check the software details of the computer
2. To check the hardware present in your computer
II. Windows’s operating system (Not for end examination)
3. To Explore Windows Desktop
4. Working with Files and Folders
5. Windows Accessories: Calculator – Notepad – WordPad – MS Paint
III. Practice with MS-WORD
6. To familiarize with Ribbon layout of MS Word
Home - Insert - Page layout – References – Review - View
7. To practice Word Processing Basics
8. To practice Formatting techniques
I -84
9. To insert a table of required number of rows and columns
10. To insert Objects, Clipart and Hyperlinks
11. To use Mail Merge feature of MS Word
12. To use Equations and symbols features
IV. Practice with MS-EXCEL
13. To familiarize with MS-EXCEL layout
14. To access and Enter data in the cells
15. To edit a spread sheet- Copy, Cut, Paste, and selecting Cells
16. To use built in functions and Formatting Data
17. To create Excel Functions, Filling Cells
18. To enter a Formula for automatic calculations
19. To practice Excel Graphs and Charts
20. To format a Worksheet in Excel, Page Setup and Print
V. Practice with MS-POWERPOINT
21. To familiarize with Ribbon layout features of PowerPoint 2007.
22. To create a simple PowerPoint Presentation
23. To set up a Master Slide in PowerPoint
24. To insert Text and Objects
25. To insert a Flow Charts
26. To insert a Table
27. To insert a Charts/Graphs
28. To insert video and audio
29. To practice Animating text and objects
30. To Review presentation
I -85
Competencies and Key Competencies to be achieved by the students
Exp
No.
1 (a).
Name of the Experiment
Competencies
To familiarize with Computer
system and hardware
connections
a. Identify the Parts of a Computer
system a). CPU b) Monitor c)
CD/DVD Drive d) Power Switch
e) Start Button f) Reset Button
b. Identify and connect various
peripherals
c. Identify and connect the cables
used with computer system
d. Identify various ports on CPU
and connect Keyboard & Mouse
a. Log in using the password
b. Start and shut down the
computer
c. Use Mouse and Key Board
Connect cables to external
hardware and operate the
computer
a. Familiarize with Start Menu,
Taskbar, Icons and Shortcuts
b. Access application programs
using Start menu, Task manager
c. Use Help support
a. Find the details of Operating
System being used
b. Find the details of Service
Pack installed
a. Access application
programs using Start menu
b. Use taskbar and Task
manager
a. Find the CPU name and clock
speed
b. Find the details of RAM and
Hard disk present
c. Access Device manager using
Control Panel and check the
status of devices like mouse and
key board
d. Use My Computer to check the
details of Hard drives and
partitions
e. Use the Taskbar
a. Create folders and organizing
files in different folders
b. Use copy / paste move
commands to organize files and
folders
a. Access device manager
and find the details
b. Type /Navigate the correct
path and Select icon
related to the details
required
1 (b). To Start and Shut down
Computer correctly
1 (c).
To Explore Windows Desktop
2.
To check the software details of
the computer
3.
To check the hardware present in
your computer
4.
Working with Files and Folders
I -86
Key Competencies
a. Login and logout as per the
standard procedure
b. Operate mouse &Key
Board
Access the properties of
computer and find the
details
a. Create files and folders
Rename , arrange and
search for the required
folder/file
Exp
No.
Name of the Experiment
Working with Files and Folders
Continued....
To use Windows Accessories:
5.
Calculator – Notepad – WordPad
– MS Paint
Competencies
Key Competencies
c. Arrange icons – name wise, size,
type, Modified
d. Search a file or folder and find
its path
e. Create shortcut to files and
folders (in other folders) on
Desktop
f. Familiarize with the use of My
Documents
g. Familiarize with the use of
Recycle Bin
a. Familiarize with the use of
Calculator
b. Access Calculator using Run
command
c. Create Text Files using Notepad
and WordPad and observe the
difference in file size
d. Use MS paint and create .jpeg,
.bmp files using MS Paint
a. Create/Open a document
b. Use Save and Save as features
c. Work on two documents
simultaneously
d. Choose correct Paper size and
Printing options
b. Restore deleted files from
Recycle bin
a. Use windows accessories
and select correct text
editor based on the
situation.
b. Use MS pain to create /Edit
pictures and save in the
required format.
6.
To familiarize with Ribbon layout
of MS word. – Home – Insertpage layout- References-ReviewView
7.
To practice Word Processing
Basics
a. Typing text
b. Keyboard usage
c. Use mouse (Left click / Right
click / Scroll)
d. Use Keyboard shortcuts
e. Use Find and Replace features
in MS- word
f. Use Undo and Redo Features
g. Use spell check to correct
Spellings and Grammar
a. Use key board and mouse
to enter/edit text in the
document.
b. Use shortcuts
c. Use spell check/ Grammar
features for auto
corrections.
8.
To practice Formatting
techniques
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
a. Format Text and
paragraphs and use
various text styles.
b. Use bullets and numbers to
create lists
c. Use Templates /Themes
d. Insert page numbers date,
headers and footers
Formatting Text
Formatting Paragraphs
Setting Tabs
Formatting Pages
The Styles of Word
Insert bullets and numbers
Themes and Templates
Insert page numbers, header
and footer
I -87
a. Create a Document and
name appropriately and
save
b. Set paper size and print
options
Exp
No.
Name of the Experiment
Competencies
Key Competencies
9.
To insert a table of required
number of rows and columns
a. Edit the table by adding the
fields – Deleting rows and
columns –inserting sub table –
marking borders. Merging and
splitting of cells in a Table
b. Changing the background colour
of the table
c. Use table design tools
d. Use auto fit – fixed row/ column
height/length – Even distribution
of rows / columns features
e. Convert Text to table and Table
to Text
f. Use Sort feature of the Table to
arrange data in
ascending/descending order
a. Insert table in the word
document and edit
b. Use sort option for
arranging data.
10.
To Insert objects, clipart and
Hyperlinks
a. Create a 2-page document.
&Insert hyperlinks and t
Bookmarks.
b. Create an organization chart
c. Practice examples like preparing
an Examination schedule notice
with a hyperlink to Exam
schedule table.
a. Insert hyperlinks
&Bookmarks
b. Create organization
charts/flow charts
11.
To Use Mail merge feature of MS
Word
a. Use mail merge to prepare
individually addressed letters
b. Use mail merge to print
envelopes.
Use Mail merge feature
12.
To use Equations and symbols
features.
Enter Mathematical symbols
and Equations in the word
document
13.
To Practice with MS-EXCEL
14.
To access and Enter data in the
cells
a. Explore various symbols
available in MS Word
b. Insert a symbol in the text
c. Insert mathematical equations in
the document
a. Open /create an MS Excel
spreadsheet and familiarize with
MS Excel 2007 layout like MS
office Buttonb. Use Quick Access Toolbar- Title
Bar- Ribbon-WorksheetsFormula Bar-Status Bar
a. Move Around a WorksheetsQuick access -Select Cells
b. Enter Data-Edit a Cell-Wrap
Text-Delete a Cell Entry-Save a
File-Close Excel
I -88
a. Familiarize with excel
layout and use
b. Use various features
available in toolbar
a. Access and select the
required cells by various
addressing methods
b. Enter data and edit
Exp
No.
15.
Name of the Experiment
Competencies
To edit spread sheet Copy, Cut,
Paste, and selecting cells
a. Insert and Delete Columns and
Rows-Create Borders-Merge and
Center
b. Add Background Color-Change
the Font, Font Size, and Font
Color
c. Format text with Bold, Italicize,
and Underline-Work with Long
Text-Change a Column's Width
a. Sort and filter data in a
worksheet
b. Perform Mathematical
Calculations verify -AutoSum
c. Perform Automatic CalculationsAlign Cell Entries
a. Enter formula
b. Use Cell References in Formulae
c. Use Automatic updating function
of Excel Formulae
d. Use Mathematical Operators in
Formulae
e. Use Excel Error Message and
Help
a. Use Reference Operators
b. Work with sum, Sum if , Count
and Count If Functions
c. Fill Cells Automatically
Format the excel sheet
a. Use data in Excel sheet to
Create technical charts and
graphs Produce Excel Line
Graph
b. Produce a Pictograph in
Excel
a. Format Excel sheet
b. Insert headers &footers
and print
16.
To use built in functions and
Formatting Data
17.
To enter a Formula for automatic
calculations
18.
To Create Excel Functions,
Filling Cells
19.
To Practice Excel Graphs and
Charts
a. Produce an Excel Pie Chart
b. Produce
c. Excel Column Chart
20.
To format a Worksheet in Excel,
page setup and print
21.
To familiarize with Ribbon layout
&features of PowerPoint 2007.
a. Shade alternate rows of data
b. Add currency and percent
symbols
c. Change height of a row and
width of a column
d. Change data alignment
e. Insert Headers and Footers
f. Set Print Options and Print
Use various options in Home, insert
, design, animation , slideshow,
Review &View in the PowerPoint
I -89
Key Competencies
Use built in functions in
Excel
Enter formula for automatic
calculations
a. Create Excel sheets
involving cross references
and equations
b. Use the advanced
functions for conditional
calculations
Access required options in
the tool bar
Exp
No.
22.
Name of the Experiment
To create a simple PowerPoint
Presentation
23.
To Set up a Master Slide in
PowerPoint and add notes
24.
To Insert Text and Objects
25.
To insert a Flow Chart /
Organizational Charts
26.
To insert a Table
27.
To insert a Charts/Graphs
Competencies
a. Insert a New Slide into
PowerPoint
b. Change the Title of a PowerPoint
Slide
c. PowerPoint Bullets
d. Add an Image to a PowerPoint
Slide
e. Add a Textbox to a PowerPoint
slide
a. Create a PowerPoint Design
Template
b. Modify themes
c. Switch between Slide master
view and Normal view
d. Format a Design Template
Master Slide
e. Add a Title Slide to a Design
Template
f. The Slide Show Footer in
PowerPoint
f. Add Notes to a PowerPoint
Presentation
a. Insert Text and objects
b. Set Indents and line spacing
c. Insert pictures/ clipart
d. Format pictures
e. Insert shapes and word art
f. Use 3d features
g. Arrange objects
a. Create a Flow Chart in
PowerPoint
b. Group and Ungroup Shapes
c. Use smart art
a. PowerPoint Tables
b. Format the Table Data
c. Change Table Background
d. Format Series Legend
a. Create 3D Bar Graphs in
PowerPoint
b. Work with the PowerPoint
Datasheet
c. Format a PowerPoint Chart Axis
d. Format the Bars of a Chart
e. Create PowerPoint Pie Charts
f. Use Pie Chart Segments
g. Create 2D Bar Charts in
PowerPoint
h. Format the 2D Chart
e. Format a Chart Background
I -90
Key Competencies
a. Create simple PowerPoint
presentation with
photographs/ClipArt and
text boxes
b. Use bullets option
a. Setup Masterslide and
format
b. Add notes
Inset Text and Objects
Use 3d features
Create organizational charts
and flow charts using smart
art
Insert tables and format
Create charts and Bar
graphs, Pie Charts and
format.
Exp
No.
28.
Name of the Experiment
To Insert audio &video, Hyper
links in a slide
Add narration to the slide
29.
To Practice Animation effects
30.
Reviewing presentation
Competencies
a. Insert sounds in the slide and
hide the audio symbol
b. Adjust the volume in the settings
c. Insert video file in the format
supported by PowerPoint in a
slide
d. Use automatic and on click
options
e. Add narration to the slide
f. Insert Hyperlinks
a. Apply transitions to slides
b. To explore and practice special
animation effects like Entrance,
Emphasis, Motion Paths &Exit
a. Checking spelling and grammar
b. Previewing presentation
c. Set up slide show
d. Set up resolution
e. Exercise with Rehearse Timings
feature in PowerPoint
f. Use PowerPoint Pen Tool during
slide show
g. Saving
h. Printing presentation
(a) Slides
(b) Handout
I -91
Key Competencies
a.
b.
c.
Insert Sounds and Video
in appropriate format.
Add narration to the slide
Use hyperlinks to switch
to different slides and
files
Add animation effects
a.
b.
c.
d.
Use Spell check and
Grammar feature
Setup slide show
Add timing to the slides
Setup automatic slide
show
III SEMESTER
I -92
DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION ENGINEERINGSCHEME OF
INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATIONS
III Semester
Instruction
Subject
Code
period / week
Name of the Subject
Theor
y
Practical/
Tutorial
Total
Period
/ Sem
Scheme of Examination
Duration
(hours)
Sessiona
l Marks
End
Exam
Marks
Marks
Total
THEORY:
4
-
60
3
20
80
100
EC -302
Electronic Devices &
Circuits
4
-
60
3
20
80
100
EC -303
Electronic Measuring
Instruments
4
-
60
3
20
80
100
Analogue communication
4
-
60
3
20
80
100
Digital Electronics
4
-
60
3
20
80
100
Electrical Technology
4
_
60
3
20
80
100
EC- 301
EC-304
EC-305
EC-306
Mathematics - II
PRACTICAL:
EC-307
EDC lab
-
6
90
3
40
60
100
EC-308
Analogue Communication
Lab
-
3
45
3
40
60
100
EC-309
Digital Electronics & CAD
tools lab
-
6
90
3
40
60
100
EC-310
Electrical Technolgy Lab
-
3
45
3
40
60
100
24
18
630
280
720
1000
TOTAL
I -93
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – II
Subject Title
Subject Code
Periods per week
Periods per Semester
S.
No
Major Topic
:
:
:
:
Engineering Mathematics-II
M-301
04
60
Blueprint
No of
Periods
Weightage
of Marks
Unit - I
1
Indefinite Integration
Short Type
Essay Type
R
U
App
R
U
App
18
34
2
1
0
1
1
1/2
17
31
0
1
1
0
1
1 1/2
15
29
2
1
0
1/2
1/2
1
10
16
1
1
0
1
0
0
60
110
5
4
1
2 1/2
2 1/2
3
Marks:
15
12
3
25
25
30
Unit - II
2
Definite Integration
and its applications
Unit - III
3
Differential Equations
of first order
Unit - IV
4
Statistical Methods
Total
R: Remembering type
U: Understading type
App: Application type
I -94
40 marks
37 marks
33 marks
Objectives
Upon completion of the subject the student shall be able to :
Unit-I
1.0
Use Indefinite Integration to solve engineering problems
1.1
Explain the concept of Indefinite integral as an anti-derivative.
1.2
State the indefinite integral of standard functions and properties of Integrals  (u + v)
dx and
 ku dx where k is constant and u, v are functions of x.
1.3
Solve integration problems involving standard functions using the above rules.
1.4
Evaluate integrals involving simple functions of the following type by the method of
substitution.
i)
 f(ax + b) dx where f(x) dx is in standard form.
ii)
 [f(x)]n f (x) dx
iii)
 f (x)/[f(x)] dx
iv)
 f {g(x)} g (x) dx
1.5
Find the Integrals of tan x, cot x, sec x and cosec x using the above.
1.6
Evaluate the integrals of the form  Sinm Cosn . d where m and n are positive
integers.
1.7
Evaluate integrals of powers of tan x and sec x.
1.8
Evaluate the Standard Integrals of the functions of the type
1
1
1
,
,
a2  x2 a2  x2 x2  a2
1
1
1
ii )
,
,
a2  x2
a2  x2
x2  a2
i)
iii ) x 2  a 2 ,
x2  a2 , a2  x2
I -95
1.9
Evaluate the integrals of the type
1
1
1
 a  bSin d ,  a  b cos d and  a cos  b sin  cd .
1.10
Evaluate integrals using decomposition method.
1.11
Evaluate integrals using integration by parts with examples.
1.12
State the Bernoulli’s rule for evaluating the integrals of the form u.vdx .
1.13
Evaluate the integrals of the form  ex [f(x) + f (x)] dx.

Unit-II
2.0
Understand definite integral and use it in engineering applications
2.1
State the fundamental theorem of integral calculus
2.2
Explain the concept of definite integral.
2.3
Calculate the definite integral over an interval.
2.4
State various properties of definite integrals.
2.5
Evaluate simple problems on definite integrals using the above properties.
2.6
Explain definite integral as a limit of sum by considering an area.
2.7
Find the areas under plane curves and area enclosed between two curves using
integration.
2.8
Obtain the volumes of solids of revolution.
2.9
Obtain the mean value and root mean square value of the functions in any given
interval.
2.10
Explain the Trapezoidal rule, Simpson’s 1/γ rules for approximation of integrals and
provide some examples.
I -96
Unit -III
3.0
Solve Differential Equations in engineering problems.
3.1
Define a Differential equation, its order, degree
3.2
Form a differential equation by eliminating arbitrary constants.
3.3
Solve the first order first degree differential equations by the following methods:
i.
Variables Separable.
ii.
Homogeneous Equations.
iii.
Exact Differential Equations
iv.
Linear differential equation of the form dy/dx + Py = Q,
where P and Q are functions of x or constants.
iv.
3.4
Bernoulli’s Equation (Reducible to linear form.)
Solve simple problems leading to engineering applications
Unit -IV
4.0
Use Statistical Methods as a tool in data analysis.
4.1
Recall the measures of central tendency.
4.2
Explain the significance of measures of dispersion to determine the degree of
heterogeneity of the data.
4.3
Find the measures of dispersion – range, quartile deviation, mean deviation, standard
deviation for the given data.
4.4
Explain the merits and demerits of the above measures of dispersion.
4.5
Express relationship between measures of dispersion
4.6
Find the coefficient of variation
I -97
4.7
Explain bivariate data.
4.8
Explain the concept of correlation between two variables and co-varience.
4.9
Explain coefficient of correlation and its properties
4.10
Calculate the coefficient of correlation between two variables.
4.11
Find rank correlation co-efficient.
COURSE CONTENT
Unit-I
Indefinite Integration:
1. Integration regarded as anti-derivative – Indefinite integral of standard functions. Properties of
indefinite integral. Integration by substitution or change of variable. Integrals of the form
sinm. cosn . where m and n are positive integers. Integrals of tan x, cot x, sec x, cosec x
and
powers of tan x, sec x by substitution.
Evaluation of integrals which are reducible to the following forms :
1
1
1
, 2
, 2
2
2
a  x a  x x  a2
1
1
1
ii )
,
,
a2  x2
a2  x2
x2  a2
i)
2
iii ) x 2  a 2 , x 2  a 2 , a 2  x 2
Integration by decomposition of the integrand into simple rational, algebric functions.
Integration by parts , Bernoulli’s rule.
Unit-II
I -98
Definite Integral and its applications:
2. Definite integral-fundamental theorem of integral calculus, properties of definite integrals,
evaluation of simple definite integrals. Definite integral as the limit of a sum. Area under
plane
curves – Area enclosed between two curves. Volumes of solids of revolution.
Mean and RMS values of a function on a given interval. Trapezoidal rule, Simpson’s 1/γ
rule to evaluate an
approximate value of a define integral.
Unit -III
Differential Equations:
3. Definition of a differential equation-order and degree of a differential equation- formation of
differential equations-solution of differential equation of first order, first degree: variableseparable, homogeneous, exact, linear differential equation, Bernoulli’s equation.
Unit –IV
Statistical Methods:
4. Revise measures of central tendency, measures of dispersion: range, quartile deviation,
mean
between
deviation, standard deviation for the given data, merits and demerits, relationship
measures of dispersion, coefficient of variation, bivariate data, concept of
correlation, covariance,
coefficient of correlation and its properties, rank correlation co-
efficient.
Reference Books:
1. Integral Calculus Vol.I, by M.Pillai and Shanti Narayan
β. Thomas’ Calculus, Pearson Addison –Wesley Publishers
3. Statistical Methods Vol.I, Das, Tata McGraw-Hill
4. Statistics, 4/e, Schaum’s Outline Series (SIE), McGraw-Hill
I -99
ELECTRONIC DEVICES & CIRCUITS
Subject Title
Subject Code
Periods/Week
Periods/Semester
:
:
:
:
Electronic Devices & Circuits
EC-302
04
60
Rationale: Electronic devices and circuits is a core subject since Semi Conductor Devices and
circuits form the basis of Electronics & Communication Engineering , Knowledge of
semiconductor devices and their applications is very much essential for an Electronics and
communication engineering student not only from the industry point of view but also from
knowledge perspective also. Stress is laid on study of the behavior of various devices and
circuits including practical applications. This course serves as a foundation for other advanced
courses.
TIME SCHEDULE
Sl
1
2
3
4
5
Major Topics
Transistors & Field Effect
Transistors
Biasing and Small signal
Model of BJT and FET.
Feedback Amplifiers ,
Power Amplifiers,
Oscillators
Special Semiconductor
Devices
Practical Applications
TOTAL
Periods
Weightage
of Marks
Short Answer
Questions
Essay Type
Questions
10
13
1
1
16
29
3
2
20
29
3
2
10
26
2
2
8
60
13
110
1
10
1
8
I -100
11.0 Understand the working principle of BJT and FET
11.1 Explain the formation of transistor
11.2 Draw the symbol of transistor.
11.3 Explain the working of PNP and NPN Transistors.
11.4 Give reasons for popularity of NPN Transistor
11.5 Describe working of transistor as an amplifier (CB configuration)
11.6 Draw the different transistor configurations.
11.7 Explain cut off, saturation and active regions of transistor
11.8 Draw the input/output characteristics of CB, CC and CE configurations.
11.9 Define alpha, beta and gamma Factors.
11.10 Relate alpha, beta and gamma Factors.
11.11 Write collector current expression in CB and CE modes of transistors in terms of α, , ,
IB, IC and ICBO, ICEO
11.12 Compare the performance characteristics of CB, CE and CC configurations
11.13 Explain the use of Each configuration a) CB configuration for impedance matching b)CE
configuration for amplification and switching
c) CC configuration for low output
impedance, boot strapping and as current source
11.14 Give important specifications of Transistor
11.15 List 6 important applications of Transistor
11.16 Classify different types of JFETs
11.17 Describe the construction and principle of operation of n channel JFET.
11.18 Draw and explain the drain characteristics of JFET.
11.19 Draw and explain the mutual characteristics of JFET.
11.20 Define the parameters of JFET and obtain the relation among them.
11.21 List the advantages of JFET over BJT.
12.0
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
12.7
Understand transistor biasing and working of small signal amplifiers
Explain the basic amplifier concept using BJT–CE mode.
Explain the reasons for wide use of CE amplifier.
Explain the concept of DC and AC load lines.
Explain the selection of operating point on the DC load line with wave forms.
List the factors effecting the Q point
Explain thermal runaway
Explain the need for proper biasing in amplifier circuits and List the types of biasing
circuits.
12.8 Explain the need for stabilization.
12.9 Define stability factor and derive an expression for stability factor of CE configuration.
12.10 Explain collector to base resistor method of biasing and explain its advantages and
disadvantages.
12.11 Explain potential divider method of biasing and explain its advantages.
12.12 Draw the practical transistor CE amplifier and explain the function of each
component(such as Cin,Cc,Ce,R1,R2 and Re)
12.13 Define h parameters of a transistor
12.14 Classify the amplifiers based on frequency(AF,RF), period of conduction(Class A,AB, B,
C), and coupling(DC,RC,TC).
12.15 Need for Multistage amplifier (Cascading of amplifiers).
12.16 Define gain, frequency response and bandwidth of an amplifier.
12.17 Explain the principle of operation of two-stage RC coupled amplifier with circuit diagram.
12.18 Draw and explain the frequency response of RC coupled amplifier.
I -101
12.19 Explain the principle of operation of two-stage transformer coupled amplifier with circuit
diagram.
12.20 Draw and explain the frequency response of transformer-coupled amplifier.
12.21 Explain the working of direct coupled amplifier with circuit diagram.
12.22 Explain the operation of Darlington pair with the help of circuit diagram.
12.23 Give the formula for the current gain
12.24 List 3 applications of Darlington pair
12.25 Draw and explain the frequency response of tuned amplifier(single, double tuned)
12.26 Compare different types of couplings.
12.27 Draw and explain the circuit of common source FET amplifier.
13.0 Understand working of Feedback amplifiers, Power Amplifier and oscillators
Feedback amplifiers
Explain the concept of feedback
Explain the Positive and Negative Feedback .
Compare Negative and Positive feedback.
Draw the block diagram of negative feedback amplifier and explain
List the 4 types of negative feedback amplifiers
Draw the block diagrams of voltage series ,current series, current shunt and voltage Shunt
feedback amplifiers
13.7 Derive the expression for the gain of negative feedback amplifiers
13.8 Explain the effect of negative feedback on gain, bandwidth, input and output impedances.
13.9 List important merits of negative feedback amplifiers.
13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4
13.5
13.6
Large signal Amplifiers
13.10 Explain the need for Power Amplifier
13.11 Compare Voltage amplifier and Power amplifier
13.12 List 3 performance measures of power amplifier
13.13 Classify power amplifiers based on conduction (Class A, B, AB, C and D)
13.14 Explain the operation of Class A, Class B, Class AB & Class c with waveforms.
13.15 Draw the block diagram of power amplifier showing various stages
13.16 Explain the working of Transistor Push-pull amplifier circuit.
13.17 Explain the effect of distortion in amplifiers
13.18 List 6 distortions in power amplifiers
13.19 Explain Amplitude distortion and Cross over distortion in amplifiers.
13.20 Explain the choice of Class A , Class B Class AB Amplifier and Class C Amplifiers.
13.21 Mention the applications of Class C Amplifiers as Harmonic Generator and Frequency
multiplier
13.22 Compare Efficiency of different types of amplifiers(A,B,C,D)
Oscillators
13.23 State the condition for an amplifier to work as an oscillator.
13.24 State the requisites of an Oscillator
13.25 Explain the Barkhausen criteria in oscillators.
13.26 Classify oscillator circuits.
13.27 Draw and Explain the working of an RC phase shift oscillator
13.28 Draw and Explain the working of tuned collector oscillator
13.29 Draw and explain the working of Hartley oscillator.
13.30 Draw and Explain the working of Colpitts oscillator
I -102
13.31 Write the expressions for frequency of oscillation and condition for sustained oscillations
of the above circuits
13.32 State the reasons for instability in oscillator circuits.
13.33 Suggest the remedies for instability in oscillator.
13.34 List the advantages of crystal oscillators over other types
13.35 Draw the equivalent circuit of crystal and explain.
13.36 Draw and explain the working of transistor crystal oscillator
13.37 Explain the merits and demerits of RC and LC oscillators.
14.0 Understand working of special semiconductor devices
14.1 Explain the construction and principle of operation of depletion type n channel MOSFET.
14.2 Explain the construction and principle of operation of enhancement type n channel
MOSFET.
14.3 Compare JFET and MOSFET.
14.4 Explain the principle of operation of CMOSFET.
14.5 Explain the working principle of Varactor diode and draw its characteristics.
14.6 List the applications of varactor diode.
14.7 Explain the construction, operation and characteristics of photo diode.
14.8 Explain the construction, operation and characteristics of photo transistor.
14.9 List the applications of photo diode and photo transistor
14.10 Explain the principle of photovoltaic cell.
14.11 List 3 important specifications of photovoltaic cells.
14.12 List 3 applications of photovoltaic cells.
14.13 Explain the working of opto-coupler
14.14 Explain the construction, working principle and characteristics of LED
14.15 Explain the construction and working principle of LCD.
14.16 Explain the applications of LED and LCD in discrete displays, dot-matrix and seven
segment displays.
15.0 Practical Applications(circuit diagrams and component values)
15.1 Explain the operation of transistor series voltage regulator.
15.2 Explain the disadvantages of series Voltage Regulator
15.3 Explain the working of a transistor as a switch in CE and CC configurations.
15.4 Draw a Transistor circuit to drive a relay
15.5 Give design rules
15.6 Draw a Twilight Switch circuit using LDR/Photo Diode , Transistor and Relay
15.7 Explain the operation of above circuit.
15.8 Draw the circuit of Mains operated lamp using Opto-Coupler and relay.
15.9 Explain the operation of above circuit
15.10 Explain the use of JFET as current source.
15.11 Explain the operation of Transistor Astable multivibrator circuit to generate square wave.
COURSE CONTENT:
1. Formation and properties of PNP and NPN Transistor, Transistor configurations,
input and output characteristics. α, , and factors. Comparison of CB, CE, and
CC configurations. Transistor as an amplifier. Classification of FETS,N-channel
JFET construction, Working principle, characteristics, applications, FET
parameters, MOSFET – types, working principle.
I -103
2. Transistor biasing and small signal amplifiers Transistor CE amplifier, DC and A.C load
lines, operating point, stabilization, stability factor, proper biasing, types of biasingcollector to base biasing, potential divider biasing, practical transistor CE amplifier,
definition of h parameters of a transistor , Classification of amplifiers, need of multi stage
amplifier, working and frequency response of two-stage RC coupled amplifier,
transformer coupled amplifier, direct coupled amplifier, emitter follower, Darlington pair,
Common Source Amplifier.
3. Feedback , Power amplifiers and Oscillators, Principle of negative and positive
feedback. Feedback amplifiers, block diagram, types, expression for gain, effects
on gain, bandwidth, input and output impedances, advantages, power amplifier classification amplifier. Requisites of an oscillator. Classification of oscillators. RC
phase shift oscillator, Colpitts oscillator
4. Opto Electronic Devices, Classification of optoelectronic devices, LDR- working
principle, characteristics. LED &LCD–construction, working principle,
characteristics, photo diode and phototransistor – working principle
characteristics, applications. photovoltaic cell
5. Practical applications Transistor works as a switch, crystal oscillators, Transistor
circuit driving a relay Twilight Switch using LDR/Photo Diode, Mains operated
lamp using Opto coupler and relay JFET current source
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1.
Electronic Devices and Circuits by .David A.Bell 4th edition PHI
2.
Basic Electronic Principles by Malvino. TMH
3.
Electronic Circuits by Bogart
4.
Basic Electronic Principles by Malvino. TMH
5.
Principles of Electronics by V.K. Mehta.
6.
Basic Electronics by B.L. Theraja S Chand
I -104
ELECTRONIC MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
Subject Title
Subject Code
Periods/Week
Periods/Semester
:
:
:
:
ELECTRONIC MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
EC-303
04
60
Rationale: Electronic Measuring Instruments is introduced in III semester to make the students
understand the principles of Electronic measurements which is essential for Instrumentation
industry and also to provide necessary cognitive inputs to handle equipment in the
laboratory/Industry.
TIME SCHEDULE
Sl
1
2
3
4
5
Major Topics
Analog instruments
Digital instruments
Cathode Ray
Oscilloscope
Signal generators
Testing Instruments
Total
No. of
periods
Weightage
of Marks
12
12
32
26
Short
Answer
Questions
2
2
12
32
2
2
12
12
60
26
20
136
2
2
10
1½
1
8
Essay
Questions
2
1½
OBJECTIVES
On completion of the study of the subject a student should be able to comprehend the following:
1.0 Understand the working Analog instruments
1. 1 List the characteristics of ideal Voltmeter and ideal Ammeter.
1. 2 Explain the construction and principle of operation of PMMC instrument.
1. 3 Explain the principle of extending the range of DC ammeter
1. 4 Explain the principle of extending the range of DC voltmeter.
1. 5 Explain the principle and working rectifier type voltmeter and ammeter.
1. 6 Explain the construction and principle of series and shunt type ohmmeters.
1. 7 Explain the use of Megger for measuring the insulation resistance
1. 8 Explain loading effect with an example.
1. 9 Explain the need for high input impedance for Voltmeters.
1. 10 Explain the working of FET input voltmeter with a circuit diagram
1. 11 Explain the drift problem in FET Voltmeters
1. 12 Explain the working of differential voltmeters.
1. 13 Explain the use of high voltage probe and clamp on current probe.
1. 14 Explain the resistance measurement using Wheat Stone Bridge.
1. 15 Explain the inductance measurement using Maxwell’s Bridge
1. 16 Explain the capacitance measurement using Schering Bridge
I -105
1. 17 List 4 important errors and prevention in bridge measurements
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
4.0.
4. 1
4. 2
4. 3
4. 4
4. 5
4. 6
4. 7
4. 8
4. 9
4. 10
Understand working of Digital instruments
List the 4 advantages of digital instruments over analog instruments.
Explain the working of Ramp type digital voltmeter with block diagram.
Explain the working of successive approximation type digital voltmeters with block
diagram.
List the 4 important specifications of digital voltmeters.
Explain the working of digital frequency meter with block diagram.
List the 4 important specifications of digital frequency meter.
Explain factors effecting the accuracy and Resolution of a frequency meter.
Explain the working of digital LCR meter with block diagram
List the 4 specifications of digital LCR meter.
Understand construction, working principle and use of CRO
Draw block diagram of general purpose CRO and describe the function of each block.
Explain the necessity of time base and deflection amplifiers.
Define deflection sensitivity of CRO
List the conditions for stationary waveforms.
Mention the conditions for flicker free waveforms.
Explain triggered sweep with necessary circuit,
Mention the advantages of triggered sweep.
Explain the function of various controls on front panel of CRO
Explain the procedure for measurement of a) voltage (DC & AC) b) frequency c) phase
angle d) time interval e) depth of modulation,
Define a pulse
Draw the waveform of a pulse
Define the pulse parameters a) Pulse width b) Rise time c) Fall time d) Duty cycle e)
delay time
Explain the procedure for measuring above pulse parameters with CRO.
List different types of probes and connectors used in oscilloscopes.
Understand the construction, working principle of AF, RF signal generators and
power meters
Explain the working of AF Oscillator (sine & square) with block diagram.
List the front panel controls and specifications of AF Oscillator.
Explain the working of function generator with block diagram.
List the applications of AF oscillators and function generators.
Explain the working of RF signal generator.
List the specifications of RF signal generator.
Mention the 2 important applications of RF signal generators
Explain the importance of shielding in RF generators.
Explain the working of AF power meter.
List the applications of power meters.
5.0 Understand the construction and working of test instruments
5. 1 Mention the limitations of AC bridge method for measurement of small inductances and
capacitances
5. 2 Define Stray inductance and stray capacitance of a coil.
I -106
5. 3 Explain the working of Q meter with a block diagram.
5. 4 List various parameters that can be measured using Q meter
5. 5 Define distortion factor.
5. 6 Explain the working of Distortion Factor Meter with block diagram.
5. 7 Explain the working of digital IC tester with block diagram.
5. 8 Explain the working of logic analyser with block diagram.
5. 9 Explain the basic working principle of spectrum analyser and mention its use.
5. 10 State the need for plotters and recorders.
5. 11 Explain the working of XY recorders.
5. 12 Explain the working of plotter.
5. 13 Explain the working of logic probe.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Analog instruments:
PMMC Instrument, extending the range of instruments, series and shunt type ohmmeter,
Megger, FET input voltmeter, differential voltmeter, Wheatstone, Maxwell, Schering
Bridge.
2. Digital Instruments:
Digital voltmeter, Digital Multimeter. Digital frequency meter, Digital LCR Meter.
3. Cathode Ray Oscilloscope:
Block diagram of general purpose CRO, study of different blocks (in detail) sweep
circuits, triggered sweep circuit, controls, specifications, applications, single trace CRO,
dual trace CRO, sampling CRO.
4. Signal Generators & Power meters
AF oscillator, function generator, RF signal generator and specifications, AF and RF
power meters.
5. Test instruments:
Q meter, Distortion Factor Meter, Plotter and Recorders. digital IC tester, Logic analyser,
spectrum analyser.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Electronic measurements by A K Sawhaney
2. Electronic Measurements & Instruments by William David Cooper PHI
3. Modern Electronic Equipment by Khandpur
4. Electrical, Electronic Measurements and Instruments by Sahney
5. Electronic Measuring Instruments Gupta
TMH
6. Electronic instrumentation and measurements by David A Bell, PHI
7. Electronic Instrumentation by H S Khalsi, TMH
I -107
ANALOG COMMUNICATIONS
Subject Title
Subject Code
Periods/Week
Periods/Semester
:
:
ANALOG COMMUNICATIONS
EC-304
:
04
:
60
Rationale: Analog communications is another core subject which forms the basis for Analogue
Communication Hence the understanding of Analogue Communication is very much essential
for an electronics and communication engineering student not only from the industry point of
view but also from knowledge perspective also. Stress is laid on study of fundamentals . This
course serves as a foundation for other advanced courses.
TIME SCHEDULE
No. of
periods
Weightage of
marks
Short
Answer
Questions
Essay
Questions
10
16
2
1
14
26
2
2
3
Analog modulation
techniques
Transmitters & Receivers
12
26
2
2
4
Antennas
14
26
2
2
5
Wave propagation
10
16
2
1
Total
60
110
10
8
Sl
1
2
Major topics
Introduction to
Communication System
& Noise
OBJECTIVES
On completion of the study of the subject a student should be able to comprehend the following:
1.0
Understand Communication systems.
I -108
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.13
1.14
1.15
1.16
Describe the basic elements of a communication system with block diagram.
Explain frequency spectrum and mention the usage of frequencies for different
applications
Define modulation
State the need for modulation in communication systems.
Define amplitude modulation
Draw the wave form of an AM wave
Define Frequency modulation
Draw the waveform of FM Wave
Define phase modulation
Distinguish between baseband, carrier, and modulated signals and give examples.
Explain the relationship between channel bandwidth, baseband bandwidth and
transmission time.
List causes of distortion in transmission and measures for distortion less transmission.
Explain the terms time domain and frequency domain.
Classify different types of noise
Describe internal and external Noise
Define signal to noise ratio, noise figure and noise temperature
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
2.15
2.16
2.17
2.18
2.19
2.20
Understand the principles of Analog Modulation Techniques
Derive the time-domain equation for an AM signal.
Define the modulation index of an AM signal.
Draw the frequency spectrum of an AM signal.
Describe the effects of over modulation.
Calculate the bandwidth of an AM signal.
Derive the relation between total power and carrier power in AM
Explain the need for DSBSC and SSB modulation
List the advantages and disadvantages of SSB
List applications of SSB.
Explain Vestigial side band transmission
Solve simple problems on power calculations.
State the need for angle modulation
List two types of angle modulation
Derive the time domain equation for FM signal
Define the modulation index of an FM signal
Explain noise triangle in FM
Compare AM , FM and PM
Explain narrow band and wide band FM
Define pre-emphasis and de-emphasis
State the need for pre-emphasis and de-emphasis in FM
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
Understand transmitters and receivers.
List the requirements and specifications of transmitters.
Draw the block diagram for high level modulated transmitter and explain
Draw the low level modulated Transmitter and explain.
Distinguish between low level and high level modulation
Draw the block diagram of basic SSB transmitter and briefly explain.
Draw the block diagram of FM transmitter using PLL and explain its working.
Draw the block diagram of indirect FM transmitter and explain (Armstrong method).
Draw the block diagram of TRF receiver and explain.
I -109
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
3.15
3.16
3.17
State the limitations of TRF Receiver.
Explain the need for super heterodyning in radio receiver.
Explain the working of super heterodyne receiver with a block diagram.
Explain the choice of IF.
Define sensitivity, selectivity and fidelity, image rejection ratio
Explain the need for AVC (AGC).
Explain the process of demodulation in AM receivers.
Draw the block diagram of FM receiver and explain
Explain Foster-seely discriminator.
4.0
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
Understand the working Principle of antennas
Explain the principle of an antenna
Define radiation pattern
Define isotropic antenna and draw its radiation pattern
Explain an elementary doublet
Explain half wave dipole and give its radiation pattern
Define the terms power gain, directivity, beam width, radiation resistance
and front to back ratio of an antenna..
Explain the terms antenna impedance and polarization.
Explain the concept of grounding.
State the need for folded dipole.
State the need of antenna array.
Explain the operation of broadside and end fire arrays.
Define resonant and non-resonant antennas
Explain the construction and working of Rhombic antenna.
Describe the working of Yagi-Uda antenna.
Explain turnstile antenna
State the need for binomial array
Explain the principle of parabolic reflector.
Explain different feed arrangements
Explain the working of Horn and Loop antennas
Explain the working of Helical and Log periodic antenna
List the applications of dish antenna
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.13
4.14
4.15
4.16
4.17
4.18
4.19
4.20
4.21
5.0
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
5.13
Understand the methods of wave propagation
Describe the properties of electromagnetic waves (Absorption, attenuation)
Define power density and electric field intensity
Calculate power density and electric field intensity for waves propagating in free space.
Define Decibel and Neper
Define polarization of EM waves
Explain vertical and horizontal polarization.
Know the characteristic impedance of free space.
Describe reflection, refraction, diffraction and interference of EM waves.
List 4 types of wave propagation methods
Explain ground wave propagation
Explain sky wave propagation
Explain different layers in ionosphere
Define the terms critical frequency, MUF, skip distance and virtual height in sky wave
propagation.
5.14 Explain space wave propagation
I -110
5.15
5.16
5.17
5.18
5.19
5.20
Define the term line of sight
Give the expression for LOS
Define fading
Explain the methods of diversity to reduce fading effects
Explain duct propagation
Explain tropospheric scatter propagation.
COURSE CONTENTS
1.
Introduction to communication system.
Elements of communication system, need for modulation, types of modulation, Noise,
Signal to noise ratio, noise figure, noise temperature.
2.
Analog modulation techniques.
AM-Modulation index in AM, effects of over modulation, bandwidth, power and voltage of
AM signal. DSBSC-SSB-VSB-advantages and disadvantages of angle modulation,
Modulation index in FM, bandwidth, side bands, frequency deviation, pre-emphasis, deemphasis
3.
Transmitters and Receivers.
Requirements and specifications of transmitters, low level modulated, high level
modulated, SSB transmitter, FM transmitters. TRF receiver, super heterodyne receiver,
selection of IF, AVC, sensitivity, selectivity, fidelity- IMRR, AM detector, FM receiver-FM
detector.
4.
Antennas
Isotropic antenna-elementary doublet-half wave dipole – radiation resistance-efficiency,gain, directivity- beam width-front to back ratio-radiation pattern-polarisation-effect of
ground on antennas-folded dipole-non resonant antennas-antenna arrays – broadside
&end-fire arrays- binomial-Yagi-turnstile-parabolic reflectors-Loop antenna-log periodichelical antenna-horn antenna
5.
Wave Propagation
Electromagnetic waves-reflection- refraction-diffraction-ground wave propagationionosphere propagation- space wave propagation-LOS-duct propagation- tropospheric
scatter-propagation
REFERENCE BOOKS
1.
Electronic communications systems by Roy Blake, Thomson Delmar
2.
Electronic Communication System by George Kennedy.
3.
Communication Electronics Frenzel TMH
I -111
4.
Electronic Communication Modulation and Transmiission 2nd Edition-Schoenbeck
Publisher PHI
5.
Communication Systems By Simon Haykin-John Wiley
6.
Modern analog and digital communications by B.P.Lathi –Oxford university press
7.
Radio communication by G.K.Mithal- khanna publishers
8.
Radio engg by Terman- McGrawhill
9.
Antennas and Wave propagation by K.D.Prasad- Sathya Prakasahan Publications
I -112
DIGITAL ELECTRONICS
Subject Title
Subject Code :
Periods/Week
Periods/Semester
:
:
:
:
DIGITAL ELECTRONICS
305
4
60
Rationale: Digital Electronics is a core subject as Digital Electronics form the basis for Digital
Communication and Microcontrollers .Hence the understanding of Digital electronics and their
applications is very much essential for an electronics and communication engineering from the
industry point of view Stress is laid on study of the behaviour of various devices and circuits
including practical applications. This course serves as a foundation for other advanced courses.
TIME SCHEDULE
Sl
Major topics
1
2
3
4
Basics of Digital Electronics
Logic Families
Combinational Logic circuits
Sequential Logic Circuits
Registers and
Semiconductor Memories
Total
5
No. of
periods
Weightage
of marks
12
15
15
10
16
29
29
26
Short
Answer
Questions
2
3
2
2
8
10
1
1
60
110
10
8
Essay
Questions
1
2
2
2
OBJECTIVES
On completion of this unit the student shall be able to
1.0 Understand the basics of Digital Electronics
1.1 Explain Binary, Octal, Hexadecimal number systems and compare with Decimal system.
1.2 Convert a given decimal number into Binary, Octal, and Hexadecimal numbers and vice
versa.
1.3 Convert a given binary number into octal and hexadecimal number system and vice versa.
1.4 Perform binary addition, subtraction, Multiplication and Division.
1.5 Write 1’s complement and β’s complement numbers for a given binary number.
1.6 Perform subtraction of binary numbers in β’s complement method.
1.7 Explain the use of weighted and Un-weighted codes.
1.8 Write Binary equivalent number for a number in 8421, Excess-3 and Gray Code and viceversa.
1.9 Explain the use of alphanumeric codes (ASCII & EBCDIC)
1.10 Explain the importance of parity Bit.
1.11 State different postulates in Boolean algebra.
1.12 Explain the basic logic gates AND, OR, NOT gates with truth table.
1.13 Explain the working of universal logic gates (NAND, NOR gates) using truth tables.
1.14 Explain the working of an exclusive – OR gate with truth table.
I -113
1.15 State and explain De-Morgan’s theorems.
1.16 Realize AND, OR, NOT operations using NAND, NOR gates.
1.17 Apply De-Morgan’s theorems related postulates to simplify Boolean expressions (up to
three variables).
1.18 Explain standard representations for logical functions (SOP and POS form)
1.19 Write Boolean expressions from the given truth table.
1.20 Use Karnaugh map to simplify Boolean Expression (up to 4 variables only)
2.0 Understand different logic families.
2.1 Give the classification of digital logic families.
2.2 Explain the characteristics of digital ICs such as logic levels, propagation delay, Noise
margin, Fan-in, Fan-out, and Power dissipation.
2.3 Draw and explain TTL NAND gate with open collector.
2.4 Draw and explain TTL NAND gate with Totem pole output.
2.5 Draw CMOS NAND gate circuit and explain its operation.
2.6 Compare the TTL, CMOS and ECL logic families.
2.7 Give IC numbers of two input Digital IC Logic gates.
3.0 Understand the working of combinational logic circuits
3.1 Give the concept of combinational logic circuits.
3.2 Draw the Half adder circuit and verify its functionality using truth table.
3.3 Realize a Half-adder using NAND gates only and NOR gates only.
3.4 Draw the full adder circuit and explain its operation with truth table.
3.5 Realize full-adder using two Half-adders and an OR – gate and write truth table
3.6 Draw and explain a 4 Bit parallel adder using full – adders.
3.7 Draw and Explain β’s compliment parallel adder/ subtractor circuit.
3.8 Explain the working of a serial adder with a Block diagram.
3.9 Compare the performance of serial and parallel adder.
3.10 Draw and explain the operation of 4 X 1 Multiplexers
3.11 Draw and explain the operation of 1 to 4 demultiplexer.
3.12 Draw and explain 3 X 8 decoder.
3.13 Draw and explain BCD to decimal decoder.
3.14 List any three applications of multiplexers and decoders.
3.15 Draw and explain Decimal to BCD encoder.
3.16 State the need for a tri-state buffer and list the four t types of tri-state buffers.
3.17 Draw and explain One bit digital comparator.
4.0 Understand the working of Sequential logic circuits
4.1 Give the idea of Sequential logic circuits.
4.2 Explain NAND and NOR latches with truth tables
4.3 State the necessity of clock and give the concept of level clocking and edge triggering,
4.4 Draw and explain clocked SR flip flop using NAND gates.
4.5 Explain the need for preset and clear inputs .
4.6 Construct level clocked JK flip flop using S-R flip-flop and explain with truth table
4.7 Analyze the race around condition.
4.8 Draw and explain master slave JK flip flop.
4.9 Explain the level clocked D and T flip flops with the help of truth table and circuit diagram.
4.10 Give the truth tables of edge triggered D and T flip flops and draw their symbols.
4.11 List any four applications of flip flops.
4.12 Define modulus of a counter
I -114
4.13
4.14
4.15
4.16
4.17
4.18
Draw and explain 4-bit asynchronous counter and also draw its timing diagram.
Draw and explain asynchronous decade counter.
Draw and explain 4-bit synchronous counter.
Distinguish between synchronous and asynchronous counters.
Draw and explain asynchronous 3 bit up-down counter.
List any 2 commonly used IC numbers of flip flops, registers and counters for each.
5.0 Understand working of Registers and memories
5.1 State the need for a Register and list the four types of registers.
5.2 Draw and explain the working of 4 bit shift left and shift right registers
5.3 Draw and explain the working of 4-bit bi-directional shift register.
5.4 Draw and explain parallel in parallel out shift register
5.5 Explain the working of Universal shift register (74194 )
5.6 Explain the working of ring counter and list its applications
5.7 List the four common applications of shift registers.
5.8 State memory read operation, writes operation, access time, memory capacity, address
lines and word length.
5.9 Classify various types of memories based on principle of operation, physical
characteristics, accessing modes and fabrication technology..
5.10 Differentiate between ROM and RAM
5.11 Explain basic principle of working of diode ROM
5.12 Distinguish between EEPROM and UVPROM.
5.13 Explain the working of basic dynamic MOS RAM cell.
5.14 Compare static RAM and dynamic RAM
5.15 Explain the working principle of NVRAM
5.16 State the difference between Flash ROM and NV RAM
COURSE CONTENT
1 Basics of Digital Electronics
Binary, Octal. Hexadecimal number systems. Conversion from one number system to another
number system. Binary codes, excess-3 and gray codes. Logic gates :AND, OR, NOT, NAND,
NOR, Exclusive-OR. Logic symbols. Boolean algebra, Boolean expressions. Demorgan’s
Theorems. Implementation of logic expressions, SOP and POS forms, Karnaugh map
application.
5. Logic families
Characteristics of digital circuits: logic levels, propagation delay, Noise margin, Fan-in, Fan-Out,
power dissipation, TTL NAND gate: open collector, totem pole output, CMOS NAND gate, ECL
OR/NOR gate , comparison of TTL,CMOS and ECL logic families.
2 Combinational logic circuits
Implementation of arithmetic circuits, Half adder, Full adder, Serial and parallel Binary adder.
Parallel adder/subtractor, Multiplexer, demultiplexer, decoder, encoder, tri-state buffer, 2-bit
Digital comparator.
3 Sequential logic circuits
Principle of flip-flops operation, Concept of edge triggering, level triggering, RS, D, JK, T, JK
Master Slave flip-flops., synchronous and asynchronous inputs and their use. Applications of flip
flops,. Binary counter- ripple counter, synchronous counter, up-down counter.
I -115
4. Registers and Memories
Shift Registers- Types, shift left ,shift right, bidirectional, Parallel in parallel out ,universal shift
registers, ring counter and its applications, Memories-terminology related to memories, RAM,
ROM, EEPROM, UVEPROM, static RAM, dynamic RAM, Flash ROM, NVRAM,
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Digital Computer Electronics by Malvino and leach., TMH
2. Modern Digital Electronics By RP JAIN TMH
3. Digital Electronics Tokhem TMH
4. Digital Electronics Puri TMH
5. Digital Computer Fundamentals by Thomas Bartee.
6. Digital Electronics by GK Kharate, Oxford University Press.
I -116
ELECTRICAL TECHNOLOGY
Subject Title
Subject Code
Periods/Week
Periods/Semester
:
:
:
:
ELECTRICAL TECHNOLOGY
EC-306
05
60
Rationale: Electrical Machines subject is reintroduced in the iii semester as the Knowledge of
electrical machines is essential for the student to survive in the industry and also understand
subjects like Industrial electronics as per the suggestions of industrial experts. Emphasis is laid
on Fundamental concepts.
TIME SCHEDULE
Sl
Major topics
No of
periods
1
2
3
4
AC Circuits
DC machines
Polyphase Circuits
Transformers
22
15
6
8
26
26
13
16
Short
Answer
Questions
2
2
1
2
5
AC machines
9
16
2
1
60
110
10
8
Total
Weightage
of marks
Essay
Questions
2
2
1
1
After completing this unit the learner will be able to
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
Working Of AC Circuits
Recap RL and RC series circuits
Explain mathematical representation of vectors in a) Symbolic notation ,b) trigonometric c)
exponential and polar forms
Solve simple problems using J notation
Explain series RLC circuits
Solve problems on Series RLC circuits
Explain resonance in RLC series circuit
Derive the formula for series resonance
State the conditions for series resonance
Draw the characteristic curves for series resonance.
Define bandwidth of a resonant circuit
Define lower cut off and upper cut off frequencies
Give formula for lower cut off and upper cut off frequencies
I -117
1.13
1.14
1.15
1.16
1.17
1.18
1.19
1.20
1.21
1.22
1.23
Solve simple problems on series Resonance.
Explain Parallel AC circuit containing RLC
List the 3 methods a) Vector or phasor method b) Admittance method c) Vector algebra
method. for solving AC parallel circuits.
Solve problems using above 3 methods
Explain Resonance in parallel circuits
State the conditions required for parallel resonance
Derive Equation for resonant frequency.
Give graphical representation of parallel resonance.
Compare Series and parallel resonance
Solve problems on Resonance
Explain effect of Resistance on Bandwidth.
2.0
Understand the working of DC Machines
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.
State Faraday’s laws of electro - magnetic induction
Explain dynamically and statically induced E.M.F
State Lenz’s law
State and Explain Fleming’s right hand rule
State and explain the Fleming’s left hand rule
2.6.
2.7.
2.8.
2.9.
2.10.
Explain the principle of DC Generators.
Explain the constructional features of DC generator with a sketch.
Explain the function of commutator and brushes
List the two types of windings used in DC generators and state their use.
Classify DC generators based on the type of excitation and field winding
connections
Write the emf equation of DC generator.
Explain the characteristics of DC shunt Generator
Explain the principle of DC Motor.
Explain the significance of back EMF
Derive voltage equation of DC motor and condition for maximum power.
Derive equation for armature torque of dc motor
Derive equation for speed of a) DC series motor b) DC shunt motor
Define speed regulation of DC motor
Explain torque-speed behaviour of DC motor
Explain DC motor characteristics a) DC series motor b)DC shunt motor
Compare DC series motor and DC shunt motor
Explain power stages in DC motor
Mention the Losses in a DC Motor
Explain speed control of DC motors and factors affecting the speed.
Explain speed control of DC shunt motor by armature, field control and armature
resistance control
Solve simple problems related to DC motors
Explain the need for starter.
Explain with a circuit the working of a 3 point starter
2.11.
2.12.
2.13.
2.14.
2.15.
2.16.
2.17.
2.18.
2.19.
2.20.
2.21.
2.22.
2.23.
2.24.
2.25.
2.26.
2.27.
2.28.
I -118
2.29.
2.30.
Give 4 important specifications of a motor
Explain the choice of particular motor for a given application.
3.0
Comprehend the POLYPHASE CIRCUITS
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
Define a power plant
List the 4 types of power plants (Hydel , Thermal, Nuclear and Solar)
Explain the basic principle of operation of above power plants
Explain With a line sketch how power from a power plant reaches the consumer
Explain generation of 3 phase voltages.
List the merits of 3 phase system over single phase.
Write the emf equations for R, Y, B phases and draw the vector diagram.
Explain the concept of phase sequence.
Explain star Delta configurations with diagrams.
Give the relation between Line Voltages, Phase voltages and Line currents &Phase
currents in Star configuration
Explain the formation of Neutral at the junction in Star connections
Give the relation between Line Voltages, Phase voltages and Line currents &Phase
currents in Delta configuration
Solve simple problems in 3 phase circuits
3.11
3.12
3.13
4.0
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.13
4.14
4.15
4.16
4.17
4.18
4.19
Understand the working of Transformers
Explain the concept of self and mutual inductance
Derive the expressions for self and mutual inductances
Define co-efficient of coupling
Explain the total inductance with series connections with reference to direction of
flux.
Explain the working principle of transformer
Give constructional details of a) Core type transformer b) Shell type transformer
Give reasons for using laminations in transformer core
Derive the emf equation of a transformer
Explain voltage transformation ratio
Explain the operation of transformer on NO load and write the equation for no load
current
Explain the operation of transformer on LOAD with the help of vector diagram under
leading lagging and unity power factor
Solve problems on the above
Explain the losses in a transformer
Explain open circuit and short circuit tests and their purpose.
Define efficiency and regulation of transformer
Solve problems on the above
Classify transformer based on power rating, construction and applications
Explain the construction and working of an auto transformer
Explain the three phase connections of transformer, star-star, star-delta, delta-delta,
delta star
I -119
4.20
4.21
Explain the applications of a transformer a)potential transformer b) current transformer c)
impedance matching transformer d) isolation transformer
List the important specifications of a transformer and explain
5.0
Understand the working of AC Machines
5.1
Classify ac motors based on the principle of operation type of current and structural
features
Explain the principle of induction motors
Explain the production of rotating magnetic field
Explain the constructional features of squirrel cage motor
Define slip, synchronous speed of an induction motor and give the relation
Write the equation for the frequency of rotor current
Draw the torque speed characteristics and explain
Explain the principle of Alternator
Mention various parts of an alternator and explain
Give equation for induced emf in an alternator
Explain the principle of synchronous motor
Explain the effect of excitation
Give applications of synchronous motors
List important specifications of an ac motor and explain
List the various applications and choice of particular ac motor for a given application
Explain the working principle capacitor start single phase induction motor.
Explain the principle of universal motor
Explain the working principle and constructional features of Servo motors
Explain the choice of selecting a motor for a particular application
List 3 applications for each of above.
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
5.13
5.14
5.15
5.16
5.17
5.18
5.19
5.20
COURSE CONTENT
1.0 AC CIRCUITS
Representation of AC Series – parallel AC circuits - Problems - Resonance in A.C. Circuits
& Coupled circuits - Series and parallel resonance. Condition for resonance, resonance
curves, effect of resistance on Q factor selectivity and bandwidth,
.
2.0 DC MACHINES
Construction of D.C generators, simple lap and wave winding E.M.F., equation,
classification of D.C machines on the basis of excitation, write voltage equations,
elementary study characteristics of series shunt and compound generators. Losses and
efficiency, principles of D.C. motors back E.M.F., speed torque equations, characteristics of
series,, shunt and compound motors, motor starters, speed control
3.0 POLYPHASE CIRCUITS
Generation of polyphase voltages and currents. Advantages of 3-phase system, 1–phase
system, 3– phase star and 3–phase delta circuits-solving simple problems
I -120
4.0 TRANSFORMERS
Principle of transformer- Core type transformer-Shell type transformer-Laminationstransformation ratio- transformer on NO load- vector diagram-unity power factor-losses in a
transformer-open circuit and short circuit tests-efficiency and regulation of transformer auto transformer- three phase connections of transformer, star-star, star-delta, delta-delta,
delta star- applications of a transformers
5.0 AC MACHINES
Principle and construction of alternator, types of alternator, e.m.f. equation and frequency,
Production of rotating magnetic fields, principle and construction of 3 – phase induction
motors, slip ring and squirrel cage, DOL, Star / delta starters, applications, Single phase
induction motors, split phase, Capacitor start single phase induction motor - universal motorServo motors - choice of selecting a motor-applications for each of above
REFERENCE
1. Electrical Technology by B L Theraja,
I -121
Electronic Devices and Circuits Lab Practice
Subject title
Subject code
Periods per week
Periods / Semester
:
:
:
:
Electronic Devices and Circuits Lab Practice
EC-307
6
90
Rationale: Electronic Devices &Circuits lab is a core lab as the student is expected to
understand and demonstrate practical skills in handling, identify and using different instruments
and various Electronic components with ease .Emphasis is laid on imparting essential skills that
are required for subsequent learning.
S.No
Major Topics
No. of
Periods
I.
Semiconductor Diodes and Rectifiers
18
II.
Transistors & Field Effect transistors
12
III.
Transistor Amplifiers and Oscillators
18
IV.
Special Devices
12
V
Circuit simulation using Pspice or equivalent
30
Total
90
List of Experiments:
Semiconductor Diodes and Rectifiers
1.To draw the forward & reverse characteristics of Silicon diode and a)determine Knee voltage,
b)identify Cutoff, and Linear regions
a) To test the diode with DMM & Analog multimeter and identify the Terminals
b) To Connect a 6V lamp in series with diode and observe the behaviour i) under forward and
reverse biased conditions. ii) On low voltage AC supply
c) To observe the effect of temperature on diode reverse current by heating the diode with a
soldering Iron
2. To draw the forward & reverse characteristics of Zener diode and determine Breakdown
Voltage
a) To test the Zener diode with DMM & Analog multimeter and identify the Terminals
I -122
b) To produce different reference voltages by using a 12V Zener diode and Resistance
ladder network
c) To produce higher reference voltage by connecting two Zener diodes in series
3. To implement Rectifier circuits using Diodes and observe the effect of Filtering
a) To Implement Half wave rectifier with and without filter
b) To Implement Full wave rectifier with and without filter
4. To Implement Bridge rectifier with and without filter
a) To Implement Voltage Doubler circuit
b) To Connect a diode IN4007 in series with a 60W 230V Lamp and test it.(Record your
observations)
5. To build a Regulated power supply and draw the regulation characteristics
a. i) using Zener diode ii) using 3 Terminal +ve Regulator
b. i) implement a –ve 3 Terminal Regulator ii) Implement a Dual regulated power supply
using both +ve ad –ve 3 terminal regulators
6. To build an adjustable +ve Regulated power supply using LM 317 and Test
II. Transistors & Field Effect transistors
7. To draw Input and output characteristics of NPN Transistor and determine Beta of the
transistor
a) To plot Input & Output characteristics for CB configuration
b) To plot Input & Output characteristics for CB configuration CE configuration
b) To test the Transistor with DMM & Analog multimeter and identify the Terminals and
Type of transistor and find the
8.To use Transistor as a Switch
a) To Turn on and turn off a relay using Transistor ( BC148 as a switch.)
b) To Connect a 6v lamp in series with BD139 and observe the effect of base current
variation on lamp brightness .
9. To determine the effective current gain of a Darlington Pair
a) To Connect two BC148 transistors in a Darlington pair and calculate the effective Beta
b) To find out the device specifications of TIP 120 from the data sheets and compare the hfe
with that of BD 139.
c) To Connect a 6V lamp in the collector circuit of TIP120 transistor and apply few micro
amperes current at the base and observe the effect.
10. To Draw the input and output characteristics of JFET and determine pinchoff voltage and
transconductance.
a) To test the JFET with DMM &Analog multimeter and identify the Terminals
11. To use JFET as a current source
a) To Implement a constant current source with a FET by applying appropriate gate bias
b) To practically Verify High input impedance characteristic of the gate circuit.
12. To Plot the frequency response characteristics of a RC coupled Amplifier.
a) To observe the effect of connecting and disconnecting the emitter bypass capacitor on
gain, and distortion.
I -123
b) To observe the effect of emitter bypass capacitor Ce on voltage across Emitter
Resistance using CRO.
c) To Measure the output power using ac power meter
1γ. To implement a) Colpitt’s oscillator b) Hartley oscillator and verify the effect of Vary the tank
circuit component values and observe output waveforms on CRO.
14. To implement transistor Astable multivibrator circuit and observe the waveforms on CRO.
IV. Special Semiconductor Devices
15. To plot the characteristics of a) Photodiode b) photo transistor
16. To Implement a Twilight switch using a Phototransistor and a Relay
a) Replace Phototransistor with LDR and Test
17. To Plot the VI characteristics of different color LEDs & determine the Vf (forward voltage
drop)
a)To test the above devices with DMM & Analog multimeter and identify the Terminals
18. To plot the characteristics of a) LDR b) Thermistor c) VDR
a) To test the above devices with DMM & Analog multimeter
b) To implement a simple Temperature controller using Thermistor and a Relay
c) To use a VDR /Trigistor for protection against high voltage surges and verify
19. To plot the characteristics of optocoupler MCT2E
a) To test the given optocoupler and identify its terminals
b) To use MCT 2E to switch on a 6V lamp connected to RPS by applying a Low voltage 1.5 V
signal from a cell at input
β0. To implement a simple timer using 1 M Ω Resistor , 1000 mfd capacitor ,Transistor BC148
and a Relay
Part 2: Circuit Simulation using pspice
1) Familiarize with the PSPICE modelling using eCAD software
 Representation of passive elements
 Representation of active elements
 Representation of time Vary signals
 Representation of nodes
2) To simulate half wave and full wave rectifier circuits with filters and assess the performance
3) To simulate 12v Zener regulator circuit and assess the performance for various loads
4) To Simulate of CE amplifier and observe the effect of disconnecting bypass capacitor.
5) To simulate Single stage RC coupled Amplifier circuit and observe the effect of change in
component values on output waveform
6) To simulate JFET Common Source Amplifier circuit & observe the effect of change in gate
bias.
7) To simulate Colpitts oscillator circuit and observe the effect of change in component values.
8) To simulate Hartley oscillator circuit and observe the effect of change in component values.
9) To simulate transistor Astable multivibrator circuit and observe the effect of change in
component values.
10) Design a PCB for the RC coupled amplifier circuit with built in power supply.
I -124
Competencies and Key Competencies to be achieved
Exp
Name of the Experiment
No.
(No of Periods)
1
To draw the forward & reverse
characteristics of Silicon diode and
i) Determine Knee voltage, (3)
ii) Identify Cutoff, and Linear regions
a) To test the diode with DMM &
Analog multimeter and identify the
Terminals
b) To Connect a 6V lamp in series
with diode and test it on DC power
supply
c) To Heat the diode with a soldering
Iron and observe the effect on
reverse current
2
3.
To draw the forward & reverse
characteristics of Zener diode and
determine Breakdown Voltage (3)
a) To test the Zener diode with DMM
& Analog multimeter and identify
the Terminals
b) To produce different reference
voltages by using a 12V Zener
diode and Resistance ladder
network
c) To produce higher reference
voltage by connecting two Zener
diodes in series
To implement Half wave rectifier with
& without filter circuits and observe
the ripple on CRO
(3)
b) To implement Full wave rectifier
with and without filter and observe
the ripple on CRO
Competencies
Key Competencies
Identify meters and
Assemble the circuit
equipment
as per the circuit
Use DRB, DIB, DCB and
diagram
measure Voltage and
Identify Diode
current
terminals by
Interpret diode
observation and also
datasheets and find the
with DMM & Analog
specifications of
Multimeter
components used in the
experiment
Test the Zener diode
using DMM
identify Zener Diode
terminals by observation
and with DMM
Prepare Resistor ladder
network.
Connect Zener diodes in
series
Rig up the circuit
Find the specifications of
Zener diode from
datasheets
Draw the symbols of
Transformer , Diode ,
Inductor and Capacitor
2.Read the circuit
Diagram
Identify Diode terminals
select meters and
equipment
Observe the polarity of
capacitors.
6. Interpret diode
datasheets
I -125
Assemble the circuit
as per the circuit
diagram
identify Zener Diode
terminals by
bservation and with
DMM & Analog
Multimeter

Assemble the circuit
as per the circuit
diagram
Use the CRO to
observe the
waveforms
Assess the Power
supply performance in
terms of ripple and %
Regulation
4
To Implement Bridge rectifier with
and without filter (3)
a) To Implement Voltage Doubler
circuit
b) To Connect a diode IN4007 in
series with a 60W 230V Lamp
and test it
5
To build a Regulated power supply
and draw the regulation
characteristics (3)
A. i) Using Zener diode ii) using 3
Terminal +ve Regulator
B. i) Implement a –ve 3 Terminal
Regulator ii) Implement a Dual
regulated power supply using both
+ve ad –ve 3 terminal regulators
C) i) Obtain a voltage above 30V
using Dual RPS in the laboratory and
measure
6
To build an adjustable +ve Regulated
power supply using LM 317 and Test
(3)
7
To draw Input and output
characteristics of NPN Transistor and
determine Beta of the transistor (3)
a) To plot Input & Output
characteristics for CB
configuration
b) To plot Input & Output
characteristics for CB
configuration CE configuration
b) To test the Transistor with DMM
& Analog multimeter and
identify the Terminals and
Read the circuit Diagram
Identify Diode terminals
Select meters and
equipment
Rig up the circuit
. Observe the polarity of
capacitors.
Measure & Observe the
ripple on CRO
Identify Regulator
terminals
Find the output voltage
and type from the IC
Regulator number
select meters and
equipment
Measure Voltage and
current.
Observe the polarity of
capacitors.
Use the CRO to observe
the waveforms
Interpret IC Regulator
datasheets
Identify Regulator
terminals
Select meters and
equipment
Rig up the circuit
Measure Voltage and
current.
Observe the polarity of
capacitors.
Use the CRO to observe
the waveforms
Interpret IC Regulator
datasheets
Identify Transistor type &
terminals with DMM
Select meters and
equipment
Rig up the circuit
Measure Voltage and
current.
Note the package
&differences between
BC148A, 148B, 148C
and BF194 from the data
sheets.
I -126
Select meters and
equipment
Rig up the circuit
Observe the polarity
of capacitors.
Measure & Observe
the ripple on CRO
Identify 3 terminal
Regulator and its
package &pin
Configuration
Find the output
voltage and type from
the IC Regulator
number
4. Use the CRO to
observe the
waveforms
5. Assess the Power
supply performance in
terms of ripple and
%Regulation
select meters and
equipment
Measure Voltage and
current.
Observe the polarity
of capacitors.
Use the CRO to
observe the
waveforms

Identify Transistor
type& terminals with
DMM
Select meters and
equipment
Rig up the circuit
Measure Voltage and
current.
Type of transistor and find the
8
9
Identify Transistor type &
terminals with DMM
Rig up the circuit
Measure Voltage and
current.
Test the circuit
Note the package of
BD139 & specifications
from datasheets
To determine the effective current
Identify Transistor type &
gain of a Darlington Pair (3)
terminals with DMM
a) To Connect two BC148
Rig up the circuit
transistors in a Darlington pair
Measure Voltage and
and calculate the effective Beta
current.
b) To find out the device
Test the circuit
specifications of TIP 120 from
 Note the package of
the data sheets and compare
BD139 & TIP120
the hfe with that of BD 139.
specifications from
c) To Connect a 6V lamp in the
datasheets
collector circuit of TIP120
transistor and apply few micro
amperes current at the base
and observe the effect.
To use Transistor as a Switch &Test
a) To Turn on and turn off a relay
using Transistor ( BC148 as a
switch.)
(3)
b) To Connect a 6v lamp in series
with BD139 and observe the effect of
base current variation on lamp
brightness .
Rig up the circuit
Measure Voltage and
current.
Test the circuit
Identify Transistor
type & terminals with
DMM
Rig up the circuit
Measure Voltage and
current.
Test the circuit
10
To Draw the input and output
characteristics of JFET and
determine pinchoff voltage and
transconductance. (3)
a) To test the JFET with DMM
&Analog multimeter and
identify the Terminals
Draw the symbols of
FET,
Identify the JFET
terminals using DMM
and multimeter
Rig up the circuit
Interpret the JFET
characteristics and
determine the pinch off
voltage
Interpret JFET
datasheets and finding
the specifications.
1.Determine the pinch
off voltage
Identify the ground,
drain, gate and source
terminals using
multimeter (DMM and
Analogue) also by
physical observation
11
To use JFET as a current source
a) To Implement a constant
current source with a FET by
applying appropriate gate bias (3)
b) To practically Verify High input
impedance characteristic of the
gate circuit.
Identify the JFET
terminals using DMM
and multimeter
Rig up the circuit
Measure voltage &
current
finding JFET current
Rig up the circuit
&Test
Measure voltage &
current
I -127
rating from data sheets
1.Identify the coupling
Assemble the circuit
and bypass capacitors
as per the circuit
and noting their values
diagram
2.Measure the amplitude Identify the coupling
and frequency on CRO
and bypass
3.Observe the 3db
capacitors(types,
points
values)
4.Apply correct level of
3 Observe the
input signal to produce
distortion(clipping ) of
the distortion less output
signal on CRO and
adjusting the input for
distortion less output

12
To Plot the frequency response
characteristics of a RC coupled
Amplifier.
(3)
a) To observe the effect of
connecting and disconnecting
the emitter bypass capacitor on
gain, and distortion.
b) To observe the effect of emitter
bypass capacitor Ce on
voltage across Emitter
Resistance using CRO.
c) To Measure the output power
using ac power meter
13
To implement a) Colpitt’s oscillator b) 1.Identify Tuned circuit
1.Identify different
Hartley oscillator and verify the
2.Identify the active
sections in the
effect of Vary the tank circuit
component and amplifier
Oscillator circuit
component values and observe
circuit .
2.Identify the Type of
output waveforms on CRO. (3)
3.Identify feed back
oscillator
circuit 4.Observe the
3.Measure amplitude
waveforms on CRO. V.
and frequency of
Vary the core of inductor
waveforms on CRO
& observe the effect on
o/p frequency Identify
the crystal in the circuit &
note the component
number
14
To implement transistor Astable
multivibrator circuit and observe
the waveforms on CRO. (3)
15
Identify transistor type &
Terminals with DMM
Select correct values for
components
Rig up the circuit
Change R & C values &
observe the effect on
output frequency on
CRO
To plot the characteristics of
1.Identify the devices
a) Photodiode b) photo transistor (3) 2 Draw the symbols
3.Note down the
component values
4.Identify photo diode
terminals with
DMM/multimeter
I -128
Select correct values
for components
Rig up the circuit
Change R & C values
& observe the effect
on output frequency
on CRO
Plotting the
characteristics of the
Photo diode, Photo
transistor and LED
Identify the device
from the
characteristics.
Test the devices with
5.Assemble the circuit
6.Measure Voltage
&Current
DMM/multimeter
Assemble the circuit
Measure Voltage
&Current
7.Note the specifications
16
To Implement a Twilight switch using
a Phototransistor , BC 148 ,12V
Relay & Test
a) Replace Phototransistor with LDR
and Test (3)
Select the devices
Identify the Photo diode
and Relay terminals
with DMM/multimeter
Assemble the circuit
Test the circuit
Identify the Photo
diode and Relay
terminals with
DMM/multimeter
Assemble the circuit
Test the circuit
17
a) To Plot the VI characteristics of
different color LEDs & determine
the Vf (forward voltage drop)
b)To test the above devices with
DMM & Analog multimeter and
identify the Terminals (3)
1.Identify LED
terminals with
DMM/multimeter
Determination of
series Resistance
3.Assemble the circuit
Measure voltage
&Current
18
To plot the characteristics of a) LDR
b) Thermistor c) VDR
a) To test the above devices with
DMM & Analog multimeter
b) To use a VDR /Trigistor for
protection against high voltage
surges and verify (3)
19
To plot the characteristics of
optocoupler MCT2E (3)
a) To use MCT 2E to switch on a
6V lamp connected to RPS by
applying a Low voltage 1.5 V
signal from a cell at input
.Identify the devices
2 Draw the symbols
3.Identify LED terminals
with DMM/multimeter
4. Determination of
series Resistance
5.Assemble the circuit
Measure voltage
&Current
7.Note the specifications
from the datasheets
Identify LDR , Thermistor
& VDR
Test the devices with
DMM(Resistance Test)
Rig up the circuit
Measure Voltage &
Current
Note the device
specifications from data
sheets
Identify the terminals of
Optocoupler MCT2E
with DMM
Rig up the circuit &Test
Measure the voltage and
Current
20
To implement a simple timer using 1
M Ω Resistor ,Transistor and a
Relay
Identify the components
Observe polarity
Rig up the circuit
Test the circuit
PARTB
I -129
Test the devices with
DMM(Resistance
Test)
Rig up the circuit
Measure Voltage &
Current
Identify the terminals
of Optocoupler
MCT2E with DMM
Rig up the circuit
&Test
Measure the voltage
and Current
Identify the
components
Observe polarity
Rig up the circuit
Test the circuit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Familiarize with the PSPICE
modelling using eCAD software
A. Representation of passive
elements
B. Representation of active elements
C. Representation of time Vary
signals
D. Representation of nodes
To simulate half wave and full wave
rectifier circuits with filters and
assess the performance
Use pspice interface
1.Use
Pspice/or
Define circuit parameters
eCAD
for
circuit
Model the circuit
simulation
and
Simulate the circuit
debugging
Observe and interpret
2.Set
circuit
results
parameters
Saving the files
Define circuit parameters
Model the circuit
Simulate the circuit
Observe and interpret
results
Save the files
To simulate 12v Zener regulator
Define circuit parameters
circuit and assess the performance
Model the circuit
for various loads.
Simulate the circuit
Observe and interpret
results
Save the files
To Simulate of CE amplifier and
Define circuit parameters
observe the effect of disconnecting
Model the circuit
bypass capacitor.
Simulate the circuit
Observe and interpret
results
Save the files

To simulate Single stage RC coupled Define circuit parameters
Amplifier circuit and observe the
Model the circuit
effect of change in component values Simulate the circuit
on output waveform
Observe and interpret
results
Save the files

To simulate JFET Common source
Define circuit parameters
Amplifier circuit and observe the
Model the circuit
effect of change in gate bias.
Simulate the circuit
Observe and interpret
results
Save the files

To simulate Colpitts oscillator circuit Define circuit parameters
and observe the effect of change in
Model the circuit
component values.
Simulate the circuit
Observe and interpret
results
Save the files

To simulate Hartley oscillator circuit
Define circuit parameters
I -130
1.Use Pspice/or
eCAD for circuit
simulation and
debugging
2.Setcircuit
parameters
1.Use Pspice/or
eCAD for circuit
simulation and
debugging
2.Setcircuit
parameters
1.Use Pspice/or
eCAD for circuit
simulation and
debugging
2.Setcircuit
parameters
Use Pspice/or eCAD
for circuit simulation
and debugging
Set circuit parameters
Use Pspice/or eCAD for
circuit simulation and
debugging
Setcircuit parameters
1.Use Pspice/or eCAD
for circuit simulation
and debugging
2.Setcircuit parameters
1.Use Pspice/or eCAD
and observe the effect of change in
component values.
9
To simulate transistor Astable
multivibrator circuit and observe the
effect of change in component
values.
10
Design a PCB for the RC coupled
amplifier circuit with built in power
supply
Model the circuit
Simulate the circuit
Observe and interpret
results
Save the files

Define circuit parameters
Model the circuit
Simulate the circuit
Observe and interpret
results
Save the files

Define circuit parameters
Model the circuit
Simulate the circuit
Observe and interpret
results
Save the files

I -131
for circuit simulation
and debugging
2.Setcircuit parameters
1.Use Pspice/or eCAD
for circuit simulation
and debugging
2.Setcircuit parameters
1.Use Pspice/or eCAD
for circuit simulation
and debugging
2.Setcircuit parameters
ANALOG COMMUNICATION LAB PRACTICE
Subject Title
Subject Code
Periods/Week
Periods/Semester
:
:
:
:
Analog Communication Lab Practice
EC-308
03
45
Rationale:
Analog communication lab is included to comprehend the concepts of analog communications
, Network theorems and also to impart skills of using software tools
S. No.
Major Topics
No. of
Periods
I.
Verification of Network theorems
6
II.
Electronic measuring equipment
3
III.
Measurements using CRO
12
IV.
Modulation , Demodulation Techniques &Antennas
6
V.
Pulse and wave shaping circuits
9
VI
Resonance & Filters
6
Total
45
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
I. Verification of Network theorems
1. a) To Verify Thevenin’s theorem.
b) To Determine the Thevenin’s Resistance of a Potential divider network
c) To Verify Norton’s theorem
2. a) To Verify Super position theorem.
b) To Verify Maximum power transfer theorem.
c) To Connect Four 4 ohms speakers to obtain 4 Ohms Impedance and test for maximum
power output by Audio amplifier at 4 ohms output terminals
I -132
II. Electronic measuring equipment
3. To measure the component values using special equipment
a) Use DMM/ Multimeter to measure DC current , AC Current ,Beta of transistor
b) To Use the AC bridge/Digital LCR meter to measure Resistance , Inductance ,
Capacitance and Q
c) To measure the Distortion factor using Distortion Factor Meter.
III. Measurements using CRO
4. To familiarize with CRO front panel controls and observe the effect of different settings
a) To set intensity , Astigmatism and Focus controls to display i) Medium frequency
ii) Low frequency iii) High frequency.
b) To apply different waveforms using function generator and produce flicker free
waveforms
c) To set the output of function generator to desired amplitude and frequency (say 20 milli
volts and 1.5 KHz) by observing on CRO.
5. To determine Vertical and Horizontal deflection sensitivity of CRO by applying standard
signal provided on CRO
a) To observe the effect of Trigger control on the waveform and display the waveform from
the set point
b) To measure signal amplitude using x10 CRO probe.
6. To use dual mode for simultaneous observation of two signals .
a) To use ADD mode observe the resultant wave form
b)To measure the Time period and frequency of a signal in Time base multiplier mode
7. a) To work with various controls on Digital CRO
b) To practice with i) Manual measurements ii) Cursor measurements iii)
measurements By repeating sub experiments in experiment number 4& 5
Automatic
.
c) To observe charging and discharging curves of a capacitor using digital CRO and
determine time constant of given RC circuit
IV. Modulation & Demodulation Techniques &Antennas
8. a)To implement and observe AM signal and determine Modulation index using CRO
i) Using Envelop method
ii) Trapezoidal Pattern method
I -133
iii) To observe the effect of Over modulation and under modulation
b) To implement diode demodulator circuit and observe the detected waveform
9. Identify different sections in AM/FM radio receiver
b) Observe the different types of inductors used in the radio tuned circuits.(Local oscillator
coils, IFT coils, Ferrite cored)
10. To generate FM signal and determine Modulation index
a)To Demodulate F.M signal and compare the output signal with original modulating
signal .
.
IV. Pulse and wave shaping circuits
11. a)To Measure the Rise time, Fall time , duty cycle, Pulse width, Pulse amplitude ,
Overshoot of Pulse on CRO
b)To observe the effect of Offset control on function generator on output waveform
12. a) To Design and implement RC integrator circuit
b) To apply a square wave and observe the output waveform on CRO.
c) To use a differentiator circuit to convert a long Push button trigger signal into a pulse for
use in Timer circuits
d) To Use integrator circuit for producing triangular wave / Ramp
e) To Design a Low pass filter Using Integrator circuit for a given cut off frequency
f) To Design a High pass filter Using Differentiator circuit for a given cut off frequency
13. To Realize Clipper and Clamper circuits and observe the waveforms on CRO
a) To Realize Series and Parallel clippers
b) To Assemble Positive and negative clipper circuits with and without bias
c) To Connect a Zener diode in place of diode and measure the output voltage with DMM
and also observe waveform on CRO
d) To Realize a Clamper circuit and observe the input and output waveforms on CRO
I -134
V.
Resonance &Filters
14. To plot resonant curves of a tuned circuit
a)Series Resonance., b)Parallel Resonance. c) Wind a small coil
inductance
and determine
its
15. Design and construct constant K filters of 1st order
a) Design and implement a Low pass filter with a cut off frequency of 10 KHz(or any other
frequency) and evaluate the performance
b) Design and implement a High pass filter with a cut off frequency of 10 KHz(or any other
frequency) and evaluate the performance
Objectives & Key Competencies
Exp
No
Name of the Experiment
1
a) To Verify Thevenin’s
theorem. (3)
Competencies
Key competencies
1.Assemble the circuit
1. Select meters and
components
(No of Periods)
b) To Determine the Thevenin’s
Resistance of a Potential divider
network
c) To Verify Norton’s theorem
2.Observe the polarity of
sources and meters
Open and short the
3.Use voltmeter and
ammeter correctly
Circuit terminals with
care
4.Choose correct Ranges
2.Use voltmeter and
ammeter correctly
5.Follow the sequence of
procedure
6.Verify theoretical &
Practical results
7.Troubleshoot any faults
I -135
2
a) To Verify Super position
theorem.(3)
b) To Verify Maximum power
transfer theorem.
1.Assemble the circuit
2.Observe the polarity of
sources and meters
3.Use voltmeter and
ammeter correctly
c) To Connect Four 4 ohms
speakers to obtain 4 Ohms
4.Choose correct Ranges
Impedance and test for
maximum power output by Audio 5.Troubleshoot any faults
amplifier at 4 ohms output
terminals
3
To measure the
values
using
equipment(3)
component 1.Identify the RLC
special bridge/Digital RLC meter
and note the front panel
controls.
a) Use DMM/ Multimeter to
measure DC current , AC 2.Measure component
Current ,Beta of transistor
values by selecting the
proper mode and range
b) To Use the AC bridge /Digital
LCR meter to measure
3.Use distortion factor meter
Resistance , Inductance ,
for measure percentage of
Capacitance and Q
distortion
1.Use voltmeter and
ammeter correctly
2. Observe Polarity
3.Find out correct series
parallel combination to
obtain desired
impedance
1.Identify RLC meters
2 Use the RLC meter
and Distortion factor
meter
3.Use AF power meter
4.Use AC voltmeter in
dB scale
c) To measure the Distortion 4.Use AF power meter
factor using Distortion Factor
5.Use function Generator
Meter.
6.Use AC voltmeter in dB
scale
4
To familiarize with CRO front 1.Use Function Generator
panel controls and observe the
2.Use various controls and
effect of different settings(3)
select appropriate ranges on
a)To set intensity , Astigmatism analog CRO
and Focus controls to display i)
3.Connect BNC Probe
Medium frequency
ii) Low
4.Test the BNC Cable
frequency iii) High frequency.
before applying the signal
b) To apply different waveforms
using function generator and 5.Observe Positive and
produce flicker free waveforms Negative peaks of a wave
form.
c) To set the output of function
generator to desired amplitude
and frequency (say 20 milli
volts and 1.5 KHz) by observing
I -136
1.Use Function
generator
2.Use CRO controls
and selecting Correct
Ranges
3.Produce flicker free
waveform and measure
the amplitude , Time
period and frequency of
signal
on CRO.
5
To determine Vertical and
Horizontal deflection sensitivity
of CRO by applying standard
signal provided on CRO (3)
a) To observe the effect of
Trigger control on the waveform
and display the waveform from
the set point
b) To measure signal amplitude
using x10 CRO probe.
6
1. Apply standard signal &
calibrate
2. Display the waveform
from set point using Trigger
control
3. Determine Vertical and
Horizontal deflection
sensitivities and carryout
accurate measurements
4.Measure the amplitude
and frequencies of small
and high level signals using
CRO Probes
To use dual mode for
1.Select XY mode in CRO
simultaneous observation of two
2. Apply signals to correct
signals (3)
channels
a) To use ADD &INVERT
modes observe the resultant
3..Measure phase angle by
wave form
lissajous pattern method
b) To use XY mode to measure
and interpret them
phase angle and compare
frequencies using Lissajous
patterns method
4.Compare frequencies by
1. Apply standard
signal & calibrate
2. Display the
waveform from set
point using Trigger
control
3. Determine Vertical
and Horizontal
deflection sensitivities
and carryout accurate
measurements
1.Select XY Mode in
CRO
2.Measure phase
angles by Lissajous
pattern method
3.Compare frequencies
by interpret Lissajous
pattern
lissajous pattern method
7
a) To work with various controls
on Digital CRO (3)
1.Use Controls on Digital
CRO
1.Use Controls on
Digital CRO
b) To practice with i) Manual
measurements ii) Cursor
measurements iii) Automatic
measurements by repeating
sub experiments in experiment
number4& 5.
2.Use different modes of
measurement
2.Use different modes
of measurement
3.Use storage function of
Digital CRO to capture
transient characteristics
3.Use storage function
of Digital CRO to
capture transient
characteristics
c) To observe charging and
discharging curves of a capacitor
using digital CRO and
determine time constant of given
I -137
RC circuit
8
To implement and observe AM
signal and determine Modulation
index using CRO(3)
i) Using Envelop method
ii) Trapezoidal Pattern method
iii) To observe the effect of Over
modulation and under
modulation
b) To implement diode
demodulator circuit and observe
the detected waveform
9
Identify different sections in
AM/FM radio receiver
a) identify the different types of
inductors used in the radio tuned
circuits.(Local oscillator coils,
IFT coils, Ferrite core(3)
1.implement AM Circuit and
Test
2.Identify maxima and
minima on the displayed
waveform
3.Overmodulate and under
modulate the AM signal
4.Use CRO in XY mode to
determine modulation index
5.Identify diode
demodulator circuit
components
1.Note down the Radio
frequency Bands by
observe the Dial.
1.perform the
Experiment as per
procedure and
calculate modulation
index.
2.Identify maxima and
minima on the
displayed waveform
3.Use CRO in XY
mode to determine
modulation index
1.Identify different
sections n Radio
receiver and measure
the signal at test points
2.Identify the tuned circuits
corresponding to different
bands
3.Observe Band selection
switch connections in AM
receiver
4.Identify different sections
in Radio receiver .
5.Measure the Voltages at
Test points with multimeter
10
a)To generate FM signal and
determine Modulation index
1.Observe the FM signal on
CRO
1.Identify FM signal, on
CRO
b)To Demodulate F.M signal
and compare the output signal
with original modulating signal
(3)
2.Measure the amplitude
and frequencies of carrier
and Modulating Signal
2. Measure the
amplitude &Frequency
of baseband & Carrier
on CRO
3. Measure frequency
deviation
3.Measure the Frequency
Deviation
4.Identify FM Detector
circuit and note down the
I -138
IC numbers
5.Identify the amplitude
limiter section on FM
detector
11
To Measure the Rise time, Fall
time , duty cycle, Pulse width,
Pulse amplitude , Overshoot of
Pulse on CRO(3)
b)To observe the effect of Offset
control on function generator on
output waveform
12
1.Identify the Pulse
waveform
1.Identify the Pulse
waveform
2.Measure pulse parameters
using CRO by selecting
correct Timebase and
Volts/Div
2.Measure pulse
parameters using CRO
by selecting correct
Timebase and Volts/Div
To Design and implement RC
1. Identify Passive
1. Choose correct
values for
integrator/Differentiator circuit (3) Differentiator and integrator
circuits.
components
a) To apply a square wave and
2. Choose correct values for 2. Rig up the circuit
observe the output waveform on components
3. Observe input
3. Vary the Time constant
/Output waveforms on
CRO.
4. Use the Differentiator and
CRO
b) To use a differentiator circuit
integrator circuits for wave
to convert a long Push button
shaping applications
trigger signal into a pulse for
use in Timer circuits
c) To Use integrator circuit for
producing triangular wave /
Ramp
d) To Design a Low pass RC
filter Using Integrator circuit for
a given cut off frequency
e) To Design a High pass RC
filter Using Differentiator circuit
for a given cut off frequency
13
To Realize Clipper and Clamper
circuits
and
observe
the
waveforms on CRO(3)
a)To Realize Series and Parallel
clippers
b) To Assemble Positive and
negative clipper circuits with
and without bias
1. Choose correct values
for components
2. Rig up the circuit
3. Observe & Measure
Input/Output waveforms
4. Vary the Time constant
5. Use clipper and Power
clamper circuits for
protection
c) To Connect a Zener diode in
I -139
1. Rig up the circuit
2. Observe & Measure
Input/Output
waveforms
3. Vary the Time
constant
place of diode and measure the
output voltage with DMM and
also observe waveform on CRO
d) To Realize a Clamper circuit
and observe the input and
output waveforms on CRO
14
To plot resonant curves of a
tuned circuit (3)
1) To identify the TUNED
circuit components
1. Identify tank circuit
components
a)Series Resonance.,
2) connect L and C to form
a series and parallel
resonant circuit
2.Identify the resonant
frequency by observing
waveform peak on
CRO
b)Parallel Resonance.
c) To observe the effect of
change in RLC Values
3)Identify the resonant
frequency by observing
waveform peak on CRO
4) Determine theoretical
Resonant frequency
15
Design and construct constant
K filters of 1st order (3)
1.Identify the Filter circuit
components
A) Design and implement a Low
pass filter with a cut off
frequency of 10 KHz(or any
other frequency) and evaluate
the performance
2.Design the Low pass &
high pass Filter for a given
cut off frequency
B) Design and implement a High
pass filter with a cut off
frequency of 10 KHz(or any
other frequency) and evaluate
the performance
3.Observe and locate 3db
points on the response
curve
I -140
1.Design the Low pass
& high pass Filter for a
given cut off frequency
DIGITAL ELECTRONICS LAB PRACTICE& ECAD TOOLS LAB PRACTICE
Subject Title
Subject Code
Periods/Week
Periods/Semester
:
:
:
:
Digital Electronics & eCAD Tools Lab Practice
EC-309
06
90
Rationale: This is a core lab . student is expected to understand and demonstrate practical skills
in handling , identify and using different instruments and various Digital ICs with ease
.Emphasis is laid on imparting practical skills useful in the industry. CAD tools part is also
included to enable the students learn latest software tools used in the industry .
S. No.
I.
II.
III.
IV.
V.
VI
Major Topics
Basic Gates and Logic Families
Realization of Boolean Functions using Gates
Realization of Boolean Functions using Multiplexers and
DeMultiplexers
Flip Flops & Timing Circuits
Counters & Shift Registers
Digital Circuit simulation using Pspice
No. of
Periods
12
12
12
12
12
30
90
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
I. Basic Gates and Logic Families
1. To Identify Digital ICs and noting down pin details from data sheets
a) Identify the given digital ICs and draw the pin diagrams. ( use TTL and CMOS ICs of
AND, OR,NOT, NAND, NOR and XOR gates with two and three inputs)
b) Realize basic gate functions using toggle switches and a bulb
I -141
2. To Verify the truth tables of AND, OR,NOT, NAND, NOR Gates
a) To Measure threshold voltages resulting in change of a state of a NAND gate
c) To Verify the truth table of 7403 IC (open collector quad 2input NAND gate).
d) To Verify the Truth table of 4073 IC
3. Realize AND, OR, NOT, functions using 2 input NAND and NOR TTL Gates
a) Implement Wire AND & Wire OR circuit and verify the truth table
b) From the data sheets find out CMOS Equivalent of above ICs
II. Realizing Boolean Functions
4. Implement XOR Logic using 2 input Nand Gates and NOR Gates and verify the truth
table
b) Implement a 4bit complement generator using 7486 quad XOR IC
c) Realize a simple comparator using XOR Gate
d) Realize a NOT gate using XOR gate
5. a) Implement the given logic function with 3 variables using 2 input CMOS NAND Gates only
b)Implement given logic function with 3 variables using 2 Input CMOS NOR Gates only.
6. Implement Half adder and full adder circuits using TTL/CMOS gates and verify the
truth tables.
b) Verify the truth table of BCD to 7 segment Decoder 7448 IC
7. a)To Verify the Truth table of Decoder and Explore the Features of 74138 Decoder IC
b) Combine two 3 to 8 decoder to realize a 4 to 16 Decoder
8 . To verify the Truth table of 74148 Encoder IC
a) Verify the function of 74148 Encoder and write the truth table
b) Combine two 74148 Encoder and Verify the truth table
III. Realization of Boolean Functions using Multiplexers and Demultiplexers
9. To Verify the Truth table and Function of Multiplexer IC 74153
a) Verify the truth table of IC 74153
b) Combine two 74153 Multiplexers ICs to realize 8:1 multiplexer
c) Implement the given function using IC 74150 16:1 line multiplexer
10.To Verify the Truth table and Functions of De multiplexers (Using IC 74154)
11.
To Verify the function of 4-bit magnitude comparator 7485IC.
a) Verify the effect of giving different logic inputs to pins 2,3,4 of IC
b) Realize a simple 2bit comparator using XOR Gate
I -142
IV. Flip Flops & Timing Circuits
12. To Construct and verify the truth tables of NAND & NOR latches
a) Realize a Bistable element with two NOT gates and a Feedback Resistor
b) Implement a bounce Elimination switch using the above Gates
c) Realize a clock circuit using 4093 CMOS Nand Gate , Resistor and capacitor and
observe the waveform on CRO
13. To Construct clocked RS FF using NAND gates and Verify its truth table.
a)Verify the truth table of CD 4013 Dual D flip Flop
b)Verify the functionality and truth table of 74L71 RS flip flop with Preset and Clear
c) Verify the Truth table of JK FF using 7476 IC.
d) Construct D and T flip flops using 7476 and verify the truth tables.
V . Counters and Shift Registers
14.To Construct and verify the function of decade counter using 7490 ICs.
a) change the modulus of the counter
b)Cascade two 7490 decade counter ICs to count up to 99 or any other modulus
c) Display decimal number using 7447
d) Cascade two 7447 ICs to count up to 99
15. To Verify the function of up/down counter using 74190, 74193
a) change the modulus of the counter and verify
b) Verify the Functionality of CD4029 up/down counter
c) Load the Preset inputs of CD4029 Counter with a binary number
16. To Verify the function of shift register (ICs like 7495, 74194 etc.)
17.To Verify the function of Johnson counter using CD 4017 IC
a) Change the modulus of the counter
b) Design a Frequency divider circuit using 4017 IC
c) Implement running LED circuit with 4017 IC
18.To Identify Various Memory ICs and Note their pin Configuration from the datasheets
a) RAM b) ROM c) EPROM d) EEPROM
Part 2:eCAD TOOLS LAB PRACTICE ( 30 Periods)
1. Familiarization of usage of ORCAD suite of tools for the design and layout of printed
circuit boards (PCBs).
2. Simulate a 4 bit full adder /subtractor and test.
3. Design and simulate code converters using logic gates
I -143
(i) BCD to excess-3 code and vice versa
(ii) Binary to gray and vice-versa
5. Design and simulate 16 bit odd/even parity checker /generator using IC74180
6. Design and Simulate 4 bit ripple counter with Mod-10 and Mod- 12
7. Produce PCB layouts for above circuits
I -144
Competencies and Key competencies to be achieved
Exp
No
Name of the Experiment
1
To Identify Digital ICs and noting
down pin details from data
sheets(3)
a) Identify the given digital
ICs and draw the pin diagrams.
( use TTL and CMOS ICs of
AND, OR,NOT, NAND,
NOR and XOR gates with two
and three inputs)
b) Realize basic gate
functions using toggle switches
and a bulb
1.Identify digital IC from the
number printed
1.Identify digital IC from
the number printed
2.Give Pin out diagram
2.Identify +ve and -ve
Power supply pins
To Verify the truth tables of
AND, OR,NOT, NAND, NOR
Gates(3)
a) Verify the
Functionality of Different logic
gates and Write the
corresponding truth table
b) Measure threshold
voltages resulting in change of a
state of a NAND gate
c) Verify the truth table of
7403 IC and give your
observations
d) Verify the Truth table
of 4073 IC
Realize AND , OR , NOT ,
functions using 2 input NAND
and NOR TTL Gates(3)
1.Write the truth table for any
Logic gate
1.Apply correct Logic
level Voltages
2.Apply correct Logic level
Voltages
2.Test the IC for its
correct functionality by
verifying the truth table
2
3
4
a) Implement Wire AND & Wire
OR circuit and verify the truth
table
a) From the data sheets
find out CMOS Equivalent of
above ICs
Implement XOR Logic using 2
input Nand Gates and NOR
Gates and verify the truth
table(3)
b) Implement a 4bit
complement generator using
Competencies
3.Identify +ve and -ve Power
supply pins
4.Insert and remove the iC
into and from the socket by
observing starting (1) pin
Key competencies
3.Insert and remove
the iC into and from the
socket by observing
starting (1) pin
5.Make switch connections
3.Find out IC details from the
datasheets
3.Test the IC by feeling
the heat by touching
4.Test the IC for its correct
functionality by verifying the
truth table
5.Test the IC by feeling the
heat by touching
1.Substitute 2 input NAND or
NOR gates to obtain the
functionality of any logic gate
with any number of inputs
2.Use open collector logic
gates with pull up resistor
Read the data sheets
1.Substitute 2 input
NAND or NOR gates to
obtain the functionality
of any logic gate with
any number of inputs
2.Use open collector
logic gates with pull up
resistor
1.Realize simple Boolean
functions using NAND &NOR
gates
1.Verify truth table by
observing inputs and
outputs
2.Verify truth table by
observing inputs and outputs
2.Use XOR gate in
simple logic circuits
I -145
5
7486 quad XOR IC
c) Realize a simple
comparator using XOR Gate
d) Realize a NOT gate
using XOR gate
a) Implement the given logic
function with 3 variables using 2
input CMOS NAND Gates
only(3)
b)Implement given logic
function with 3 variables using 2
Input CMOS NOR Gates only.
3.Use XOR gate in simple
logic circuits
1.Realize simple Boolean
functions using karanaugh
maps method
2.Applying correct logic
voltages to CMOS ICs
3.Follow precautions
4.Read data sheets to check
Fan-in and Fan-out capacity
6
7
8
9
10
1.Realize simple
Boolean functions
using karanaugh maps
method
2.Applying correct logic
voltages to CMOS ICs
3.Follow precautions
Implement Half adder and full
adder circuits using TTL/CMOS
gates and verify the truth
tables.(3)
b) Verify the truth table of
BCD to 7 segment Decoder
7448 IC
1.Realize simple Boolean
functions using karanaugh
maps method
To Verify the Truth table of
74138 Decoder IC(3)
a) Verify the function of
74138 decoder IC.
b) Combine two 3 to 8
decoder to realize a 4 to 16
Decoder
To Explore the Features of
74148 Encoder IC(3)
a) Verify the function of
74148 Encoder
b) Combine two 74148
Encoder
To Verify the Function of
Multiplexer IC 74153(3)
a) Verify the truth table of
IC 74153
b) Combine two sections
of 74153 Multiplexers ICs to
realize 8:1 multiplexer
c) Implement the given function
using IC 74150 16:1 line
multiplexer
To Verify the Truth table and
Functions of De multiplexers (
1.Develop logic for Decoder
Circuit
2.Use 74138 in digital circuits
3.Combine Decoder ICs to
handle more bits
1.Use 74138 in digital
circuits
1.Develop logic for Encoder
Circuit
2.Use 74148 in digital circuits
3.Combine Decoder ICs to
handle more bits
1.Use 74148 in digital
circuits
1.Develop logic for
Multiplexer
2.Use 74153 in digital circuits
Combine Multiplexer r ICs to
handle more bits
3.Use Multiplxer ICs to realize
given function
1.Combine Multiplexer
r ICs to handle more
bits
1.Develop logic for
DeMultiplexer
1.Combine
DeMultiplexer ICs Use
2.Design Half adder/Full
adder circuit
1.Design Half
adder/Full adder circuit
2.Use 7448 IC in the
circuits
3.Use 7448 IC in the circuits
I -146
2.Combine Decoder
ICs to handle more bits
2.Combine Encoder
ICs to handle more bits
2.Use Multiplxer ICs to
realize given function
11.
12
13
a) Verify the truth table of IC
74154(3)
b) Combine two sections
of 74155 DeMultiplexers ICs to
realize 1:8 Demultiplexer
c) Implement the given function
using IC 74154 16:1 line
multiplexer
To Verify the function of 4bit magnitude comparator
7485IC.(3)
a) Verify the effect of
giving different logic inputs to
pins 2,3,4 of IC
b) Realize a simple 2bit
comparator using XOR Gate
2.Use 74154 in digital circuits DeMultiplxer ICs to
Combine DeMultiplexer ICs
realize given function
3.Use DeMultiplxer ICs to
realize given function
To Construct and verify the
truth tables of NAND & NOR
latches(3)
a) Implement Latch circuits with
7400 and 7402 Ics
b) Realize a Bistable
element with two NOT gates and
a Feedback Resistor
c) Implement a bounce
Elimination switch using the
above Gates
c) Realize a clock circuit
using 4093 CMOS Nand
Gate , Resistor and
capacitor and observe
the waveform on CRO
b) Interpret the
specifications of 4093 IC from
data sheets
To Construct clocked RS FF
using NAND gates and Verify its
truth table.(3)
a)Verify the truth table of
CD 4013 Dual D flip Flop
b)Verify the functionality
and truth table of 74L71 RS flip
flop with Preset and Clear
c) Verify the Truth table
of JK FF using 7476 IC.
d) Construct D and T flip
flops using 7476 and verify the
truth tables.
e) Verify the function of
1.Develop logic for Latch
circuits
1.Develop logic for magnitude 1.Verify the function of
comparator
Magnitude comparator
2.Verify the function of
Magnitude comparator
2.Use 7485IC in digital
circuits
3.Use 7485IC in digital
circuits
2.Use Not gates for Latch
circuit applications
3.Use latch circuits for de
bouncing application
4.Use Schmitt trigger NAND
gate for clock circuits
1.Use Not gates for
Latch circuit
applications
2.Use latch circuits for
de bouncing application
3.Use Schmitt trigger
NAND gate for clock
circuits
1.Develop logic circuit for
Clocked RS flip Flop using
7400 IC
1.Verify the truth tables
of CD4013 and 74L71
IC
2.Verify the truth tables of
CD4013 and 74L71 IC
2.Use Preset and Clear
Inputs
3.Use Preset and Clear
Inputs
3.Verify the Truth table
of 7476 IC
4.Verify the Truth table of
7476 IC
4.Modify 7476 to
function as D flip Flop
and T Flip Flop
5.Modify 7476 to function as
5.Use octal latch
I -147
octal latch 74LS373
D flip Flop and T Flip Flop
74LS373
6.Use octal latch 74LS373
14.
15
16
To Construct and verify the
function of decade counter using
7490 ICs.(3)
a) change the modulus
of the counter
b)Cascade two 7490
decade counter ICs to count up
to 99 or any other modulus
b) display decimal
number using 7447
c) cascade two 7447 ICs
to count up to 99
1.Develop logic for
implementing Up/down
counter
To Verify the function of
up/down counter (3)
a) Verify the truth table of 74190
a) change the modulus
of the counter and verify
b) Verify the
Functionality of CD4029
up/down counter
c) Load the Preset
inputs of CD4029 Counter with
a binary number
To Verify the function of shift
register (3)
a) Verify the truth table of 7495
b)Verify the truth table of 74194
Universal shift register in all
modes
1.Develop logic for
implementing Up/down
counter
1. change the modulus
of the counter
2. change the modulus of the
counter
2.Connect Counter IC
7447 IC to display the
count
3.Connect Counter IC 7447
IC to display the count
3.Cascade Counter
ICs
4. Cascade Counter ICs
2.change the modulus of the
counter
1.Change the modulus
of the counter
2.Load the Preset
inputs of CD4029
3.Load the Preset inputs of
CD4029
1.Develop logic for
implementing shift Registers
1.Verify the truth table
of 7495Ic in all modes
2.Verify the truth table of
7495Ic in all modes
2.Verify the truth table
of 74194 Universal
shift register in all
modes
3.Verify the truth table of
74194 Universal shift register
in all modes
1.Develop logic for
1.Set the modulus of
implementing
counter to required
value
2.Verify the truth table of
Johnson counter
2.Use 4017 in
frequency divider
3.Set the modulus of counter
circuits and other digital
to required value
circuits
4.Use 4017 in frequency
divider circuits and other
digital circuits
17.
To Verify the function of
Johnson counter using CD
4017 IC(3)
a) Change the modulus
of the counter
b) Design a Frequency
divider circuit using 4017 IC
c) Implement running
LED circuit with 4017 IC
18.
To Identify Various Memory ICs 1.Distinguish memory chips
and Note their pin Configuration
I -148
1.Find out the memory
from the datasheets(3)
a) RAM b) ROM c)
EPROM d)EEPROM
from other Integrated circuits
by observation and IC
number
2.Find out the memory
capacity from the IC number
capacity from the IC
number
2.Identify different
memory chips
3.Identify different memory
chips
18
19
20
21
22
23
1.Use ORCAD suite and its
features
Select Components ,
2.Draw the circuit &simulate
3.Debug the errors
1.Select Components ,
1.Develop logic for
implementing 4 bit full adder
/subtractor
2.Select Components ,
3.Draw the circuit & simulate
4.Debug the errors
Design and simulate code
1.Develop logic for
converters using logic gates (3) implementing 4 bit full adder
(i) BCD to excess-3 code and
/subtractor
vice versa
2.Select Components ,
(ii) Binary to gray and vice-versa 3.Draw the circuit & simulate
4.Debug the errors
1.Develop logic for
Design and simulate 16 bit
implementing 4 bit full adder
odd/even parity checker
/generator using IC74180 (3) /subtractor
2.Select Components ,
3.Draw the circuit & simulate
4.Debug the errors
1.Develop logic for
Design and Simulate 4 bit
implementing 4 bit full adder
ripple counter with Mod-10
/subtractor
and Mod- 12 (3)
2.Select Components ,
3.Draw the circuit & simulate
4.Debug the errors
Produce PCB layouts for above 1.Develop logic for
circuits(3)
implementing 4 bit full adder
/subtractor
2.Select Components ,
3.Draw the circuit & simulate
4.Debug the errors
1.Select Components ,
Familiarization of usage of
ORCAD suite of tools for the
design and layout of printed
circuit boards (PCBs).(3)
Simulate a 4 bit full adder
/subtractor and test.(3)
I -149
2.Draw the circuit &
simulate
3.Debug the errors
2.Draw the circuit &
simulate
3.Debug the errors
1.Select Components ,
2.Draw the circuit &
simulate
3.Debug the errors
1.Select Components ,
2.Draw the circuit &
simulate
3.Debug the errors
1.Select Components ,
2.Draw the circuit &
simulate
3.Debug the errors
1.Select Components ,
2.Draw the circuit &
simulate
3.Debug the errors
24
25
Design a PCB for the DAC80
circuit(3)
Design a PCB for the ADC80
A/D Converter circuit (3)
1.Develop logic for
implementing 4 bit full adder
/subtractor
2.Select Components ,
3.Draw the circuit & simulate
4.Debug the errors
1.Develop logic for
implementing 4 bit full adder
/subtractor
2.Select Components ,
3.Draw the circuit & simulate
4.Debug the errors
I -150
1.Select Components ,
2.Draw the circuit &
simulate
3.Debug the errors
1.Select Components ,
2.Draw the circuit &
simulate
3.Debug the errors
ELECTRICAL TECHNOLOGY LAB PRACTICE
Subject Title
Subject Code
Periods/Week
Periods/Semester
:
:
:
:
Electrical technology Lab Practice
EC-310
03
45
Rationale: Electrical Technology lab is included to enable the student to supervise and handle
electronically controlled electrical equipment with confidence when they join the industry. Sound
knowledge in electrical engineering greatly helps the students in understanding the concepts in
subjects like Industrial electronics. Emphasis is laid on basic electrical engineering skills.
S. No.
Major Topics
No. of
Periods
I.
Basic electrical equipment and Instruments
21
II.
DC Machines
12
III.
Transformers
6
IV.
AC Motors
6
Total
45
List Of Experiments
I. Basic electrical equipment and Instruments
1. To Identify Electrical Machines and Equipment, wires cables etc
2. To Identify & test Single phase Transformer b) Auto transformer c) single phase
Induction motor d) 3 Phase induction motor e) DOL Starter f) Star Delta starter g) Loading
Resistance h) Electric Lamp Load i) Water load Identify and test Electrical Instruments.
3. To Identify A)Moving coil Volt meters B) Moving coil Ammeters c) Moving Iron Voltmeters d)
Moving Iron Ammeters e) Dynamo meter type watt meter .
4. To Convert and extend range of PMMC meters
a) To extend the range of voltmeter using multiplier
b) To observe the Loading effect of volt meter on high impedance circuit
I -151
c)To Open and identify the following parts a) Permanent magnet b) Coil c) Former d)
Phosphor bronze springs e) Pointer, Multiplier/Shunt etc a) To convert an ammeter into
Voltmeter
5. To extend the range of ammeter using a shunt Resistance
a) To Measure current using voltmeter and standard Resistance.
6. To Measure the power consumed by a 100 watts incandescent lamp using Voltmeter and
ammeter method a) On AC 230V b) DC 220V
7. To apply a Low voltage to an Incandescent lamp using auto Transformer and observe the
effect of voltage on Light output (Measure the Voltage and current)
8. To Measure the power consumed by an Electric motor (Fan) and Lamp load separately
using wattmeter , Voltmeter and Ammeter and Determine power factor
9. To Connect a 2500 ohm 1A Rheostat in series with a 100 W Lamp and observe the effect
of Variation of Resistance on the input current and Light output
10. To Draw the OCC Characteristics of Shunt generator
11. To Control the speed of a DC shunt motor using a) Armature control method b) Field control
method
b) To reverse the direction of a DC shunt motor
12. To Plot the Load characteristics of DC shunt motor
13. To Start a DC Series motor Using a 2 point/4 point starter
14. To Determine the transformation ratio of a 1 phase transformer
a) Apply rated Voltage to the secondary terminals of transformer using auto transformer and
measure the Voltage across primary winding
15. To Perform OC and SC tests on transformer to determine Efficiency and Regulation at any
given
16. To start a single phase AC motor with DOL Starter
17. To start a 3 phase AC motor with star delta starter and also reverse the direction of rotation
18. To Run the AC 1 Ø Servo motor in forward and reverse directions using SPDT Switch
I -152
Competencies and Key Competencies
Exp
No
Experiment name
(No Of periods)
Competencies
Key Competencies
1
Identify Electrical Machines
and Equipment, wires cables
etc. (1)
a) Identify a) Electrical
Control Panel a) SCR
Power Rectifier unit b) DC
shunt Generator , c) DC
Shunt Motor d) DC Series
Motor e) 3 point starter f) 4
point starter e) DC Motor
Generator Sets
1)Identify the Control Panel
and Correct Mains switch
2)Identify DC power Source
3) Identify DC machines by
Their Size Shape and Name
plate details d) Identify the
DC Motor Starters by their
construction.
1) switch on/Switch Off
the correct mains switch
in the panel
corresponding to the
experiment location.
2) Identify the correct
Machine in the
laboratory by Name
3) Identify the
appropriate starter for
the DC motor
2
Identify Single phase
Transformer b) Auto
transformer c) single phase
Induction motor d) 3 Phase
induction motor e) DOL
Starter f) Star Delta starter
g) Loading Resistance h)
Electric Lamp Load i) Water
load(1)
1)Identify the 1 phase
transformer & Auto
Transformer
1) Guess the
transformer/Auto
transformer capacity by
size and weight
2) Interpret Name plate
details and Estimate the
fuse wire rating
.
3
1. Identify Electrical
Instruments. (1)
4
To work with PMMC meters
(3)
a) To convert an ammeter
into Voltmeter
b) To Extend the range of
voltmeter using multiplier
c) To extend the range of
ammeter using a shunt
Resistance
e) To observe the Loading
effect of volt meter on high
impedance circuit
1)Identify MC and MI
Ammeters by observing the
dial , Symbol , Polarity
Marking
2) Identify the Range
3) Identify Wattmeter
1) identify the PMMC meters
by observing the linear
scale.
2) Measure meter Resistance
3) Calculate Multiplier and
shunt Resistor values
4) Measure current using
voltmeter.
2.Interpret the name plate
details b)Identify AC motors
and Interpret name plate
details c) Identify AC motor
starters d) Identify Different
electrical loads and operate
them
I -153
1)Identify different types
of meters and Use
2. Identify the Range
2) Select Correct meter
with correct Range.
1) Identify PMMC
meters
2) Extend the range of
meters.
3)Identify the parts of
PMMC meter
5
6
7
f) To open and identify the
following parts a) Permanent
magnet b) Coil c) Former d)
Phosphor bronze springs e)
Pointer , Multiplier / Shunt
etc
To Measure the power
consumed by a 100 watts
incandescent lamp using
Voltmeter and ammeter
method a) On AC 230V b)
DC 220V(3)
To Apply a Low voltage to an
Incandescent lamp using
auto Transformer and
observe the effect of voltage
on Light output (Measure the
Voltage and current) (3)
To Measure the power
consumed by an Electric
motor (Fan) and Lamp load
separately using wattmeter ,
Voltmeter and Ammeter and
Determine power factor (3)
8
To Connect a 2500 ohm 1A
Rheostat in series with a 100
W Lamp and observe the
effect of Variation of
Resistance on the input
current and Light output (3)
9
To Connect the Rheostat as
a potential divider and
produce a variable voltage
( 3)
10
To Draw the OCC
Characteristics of Shunt
generator (3)
1) Select Correct meters and
Ranges (Both AC and DC)
for measure Voltage and
Current
2) Substitute Lamp load for
Resistive load
3) Verify power consumption
for both AC and DC
4) reading the meter scale
without parallax error
1) Identify autotransformer
terminals & Make
connections
2.djust the Auto transformer
to required Voltage
1) connect Voltmeter
and ammeter in the
circuit
2) Choose Correct
meters and select
correct Ranges
1) Connect Wattmeter for
power measurement b)
choose correct ranges , Type
for wattmeter , Voltmeter and
Ammeter
2) Verify the effect of
Powerfactor
1).Familarize with the
construction and operation of
Rheostat ,
b) Set rheostat to minimum
and Maximum positions
c) Use the rheostat as a
variable Resistance
1)Familarize with the
construction and operation of
Rheostat ,
2) Setting rheostat to
minimum and Maximum
positions
3) Using the rheostat as a
Potentiometer d) understand
the heating effect of Electric
current
1)Interpret name plate details
2) Identify the Terminals on
shunt generator with
1.Use the Wattmeter to
measure the power
I -154
1) Use the Auto
transformer and adjust
to produce required
Low/ High Voltage
1)Use the rheostat as
variable Resistance
2) Setting rheostat to
minimum , Maximum
and to desired values of
Resistance
1)Use the rheostat as
variable Resistance
2)Use the rheostat as
potential divider
1)Identify field and
armature winding
terminals.
11
To Control the speed of a DC
shunt motor using
i) Armature control method
ii) Field control method
b) To reverse the direction of
a DC shunt motor (3)
multimeter
3) Set the Rheostat to
minimum and maximum
Resistance positions
4) Identify the following parts
1)Yoke 2)Pole shoes 3.
Field winding 4)Armature 5)
Commutator 6)Brushes 7)
Coupling 8) Bearin
1) Interpret name plate
details
2) Identify 3 Point starter
3) Set the Rheostat to
minimum and maximum
Resistance positions
4) Make connections as per
circuit diagram
5)Measure the speed with
tachometer
6) Interchange armature/ field
connections
1) Change the load on with
Brake arrangements.
2) Choose appropriate wires
(Gauge and Colours) and
Correct meters.
3) Measure the speed with
tachometer
4) Follow the precautions
12
To Plot the Load
characteristics of DC shunt
motor (3)
13
To Start a DC Series motor
1) Identify 2/4 point starter
Using a 2 point/4 point starter 2) Make connections as
(3)
14
To Determine the
transformation ratio of a 1
phase transformer
b) Apply rated Voltage to the
secondary terminals of
transformer using auto
transformer and measure the
Voltage across primary
winding (3)
per circuit diagram
3) Reverse the motor
direction
4) Follow precautions
1) Interpret name plate
details
2) Identify Primary and
secondary windings i) by
observation ii) by test with
DMM
3) Making connections as per
circuit diagram
4)Measure AC current and
voltages
5) Performing experiment as
per procedure
6) Interpret the results f)
I -155
2)Make connections
1)Make connections as
per circuit diagram
2)Vary the speed with
field Rheostat and
armature Rheostat
3)Measure the speed
with tachometer
4)Reverse the direction
of motor
1)Change the load on
with Brake
arrangements.
2).Measure the speed
with tachometer
3).Follow the
precautions
1)Make connections as
per circuit diagram
2)Reverse the motor
direction
3)Follow precautions
1)Identify the
transformer windings
2) Interpret name plate
details and know the
transformer rating
3) use transformer for
Step down and Step up
applications
4) Determine
transformation Ratio
15
To Perform OC and SC tests
on transformer to determine
Efficiency and Regulation at
any given load and Power
factor (3)
16
To start a single phase AC
motor with DOL Starter (3)
17
To start a 3 phase AC motor
with star delta starter and
also reverse the direction of
rotation (3)
To Run the AC 1 Ø Servo
motor in forward and reverse
directions using SPDT
Switch (3)
18
Determine transformation
Ratio
7) understand the step up
and step down functions of
transformer.
1) Interpret name plate
details
2) Identify Primary and
secondary windings
3). Using Autotransformer to
apply desired voltage
4) Short circuit the secondary
winding
5) Connecting Wattmeter,
choosing correct range and
finding Multiplication factor
6) Interpret the results and
determining the copper loss
7)Calculate % Regulation ,
total losses , Efficiency at
any given load
1)Make wattmeter
connections
2)Determine
transformer losses
Practically
1)Make connections to starter
and start /Stop the Motor
2)Follow precautions
1)Make connections to starter
and start /Stop the Motor
2)Follow precautions
1)Make connections to
starter and start /Stop
the Motor
1)Make connections to
starter and start /Stop
the Motor
1) Identify AC servomotor
2)To familiarize with the
operation of AC servomotor
3) Interpret name plate
details
4)Using SPDT switch for
reversing the AC servomotor
direction
1) Identify AC
servomotor
2) Reversing the
direction of rotation.
I -156
DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATIONS
IV Semester
Instruction
Subject
Code
period / week
Name of the Subject
Theory
Practical
/Tutorial
Total
Period
/ Sem
Scheme of Examination
Duration
(hours)
Sessional
Marks
End
Exam
Marks
Marks
3
20
80
100
3
20
80
100
3
20
80
100
3
20
80
100
3
20
80
100
3
20
80
100
Total
THEORY:
Mathematics - III
4
60
EC - 402
Linear Integrated
Circuits
5
75
EC - 403
Network Analysis
5
75
EC - 404
Digital
Communications
4
60
EC - 405
Microprocessor &
Microcontroller
Programming
4
60
4
60
EC - 401
Programming in C
EC - 406
PRACTICAL:
I -157
3
40
60
100
3
40
60
100
90
3
40
60
100
3
45
3
40
60
100
16
630
280
720
1000
EC - 407
Linear Integrated
Circuits Lab
-
4
60
EC - 408
Communication
Skills
-
3
45
-
6
EC - 409
EC - 410
Digital Communication
Lab
C and Matlab
TOTAL
26
Engineering Mathematics – III
Subject Title
:
Engineering Mathematics – III
Subject code
:
EC-401(Common Subject)
Periods/Week
:
04
Periods/semester
:
60
Blue Print
S.
No
Major Topic
No of
Periods
Weight
age
of
Marks
2
3
Homogenous Linear Differential
equations with constant
coefficients
Non-homogenous Linear
Differential equations with
constant coefficients
Unit - II
Laplace Transforms
Essay Type
5
6
2
0
A
p
p
0
10
23
0
1
0
1
1
0
20
32
1
2
1
1
0
1
Unit -I Differential Equations
1
Short Type
I -158
R
U
R
U
App
0
0
0
Unit - III
4
Fourier Series
13
26
1
1
12
23
1
60
110
5
4
Marks:
15
12
0
0
1
1
1/2
1/2
1
1
2 1/2
2 1/2
3
3
25
25
30
Unit - IV
5
Probability
Total
R: Remembering type 40 marks
U: Understanding type37 marks
33 marks
App: Application type
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – III(Common Subject)
Objectives
Upon completion of the subject the student shall be able to :
Unit-I-Differential Equations
1.0
1.1
1.2
Solve Homogeneous linear differential equations with constant coefficients in
engineering situations
Solve Differential equations of the type (aD2 +bD + c)y = 0 when the roots of the auxiliary
equation are real and different, real and repeated, complex.
Solve the higher order homogeneous differential equations with constant coefficients.
2.0
Solve Non Homogeneous linear differential equations with constant coefficients in
engineering situations
2.1
Explain the concept of complementary function, particular Integral and general solution
of a differential equation.
2.2
Solve nth order differential equation of the type f(D) y = X where f(D) is a polynomial of
nth order and X is a function of the form k, eax , Sinax, Cosax, xn.
I -159
Unit-II- Laplace Transforms
3.0
Use Laplace Transforms to solve differential equation in engineering problems
3.1
Write the definition of Laplace Transform and Laplace transform of standard
functions.
3.2
Explain the sufficient conditions of existence of Laplace Transform.
3.3
Write the properties of Laplace Transform – Linear property, First shifting property,
Change of Scale.
3.4
Solve simple problems using the above properties
3.5
Write formulae for Laplace transform of t n f (t ),
f (t )
, f ( n) (t ),
t
t
 f (u) du
interms of
0
Laplace transform of f (t ) .
3.6
Solve simple problems using the above formulae.
3.7
Define unit step function and write the Laplace Transform of unit step function.
3.8
Write second shifting property.
3.9
Define inverse Laplace Transform and write inverse Laplace Transform of standard
functions.
3.10
Solve simple problems on 3.9
3.11
Write first shifting property of inverse Laplace Transfrom.
3.12
Solve simple problems on 3.11
3.13
Write inverse Laplace Transforms corresponding to Laplace Transform of the
functions mentioned in section 3.5
3.14
Solve simple problems on 3.13.
3.15
Define convolution of two functions and state convolution theorem.
3.16
Solve simple problems on 3.15.
3.17
Use Laplace and inverse Laplace Transforms to solve simple differential equations of
second order.
Unit-III- Fourier Series
I -160
4.0
Know Fourier Series expansion of functions
4.1
Define the orthogonality of functions in an interval.
4.2
Define Fourier series of a function on the interval (c, c  2 ) and write the Euler’s
formulae for determining the Fourier coefficients.
4.3
Write sufficient conditions for the existence of Fourier series for a function.
4.4
Find Fourier series of simple functions in the range (0, 2 ), ( ,  ) .
4.5
Write Fourier series for even and odd functions in the interval ( ,  ) .
4.6
Write Fourier series expansion of a function over the interval (l , l )
4.7
Write half range Fourier sine and cosine series of a function over the interval (0, l )
4.8
Solve simple problems on 4.5, 4.6 and 4.7
Unit-IV- Probability
5.0
Understand the basic concepts of
5.1
Recall sets, operations on sets and Venn-diagrams.
5.2
Explain the terminology – random experiment, outcome, sample space, elementary
event and event.
5.3
Define Probability – Empirical approach and axiomatic approach (Mathematical).
5.4
Prove addition theorem of probability for two mutually exclusive and exhaustive
events.
5.5
State addition theorem of probability for three mutually exclusive and exhaustive
events.
5.6
Solve simple problems on addition theorem.
5.7
Explain dependent, independent events and conditional event.
5.8
State the formula for conditional probability.
5.9
State multiplication theorem of probability.
5.10
State Bayes’ theorem.
5.11
Solve simple problems on conditional probability and Bayes’ theorem.
I -161
Course Content
Differential Equations
1.Homogenous linear differential equations with constant coefficients of order two and higher
with emphasis on second order.
2.Non-homogenous linear differential equations with constant coefficients of the form f(D)y = X
where X is in the form k, eax, sin ax, cos ax, xn, (n= 1,2) – complimentary function, particular
integral and general solution.
Laplace Transforms(LT)
3.Definition, sufficient conditions for existence of LT, LT of elementary functions, linearity
property, scale change property, first shifting property, multiplication by tn, division by t, LT
of derivatives and integrals, unit step function, LT of unit step function, second shifting
theorem, inverse Laplace transforms- shifting theorems and change of scale property,
multiplication by sn and division by s – examples of inverse LT using partial fractions –
convolution theorem (no proof) – applications of LT to solve ordinary differential equations
with initial conditions (2nd order only)
Fourier Series
4. Orthogonality of trigonometric functions, Representation of a function in Fourier series over
the interval  c , c  2  , Euler’s formulae , sufficient conditions for existence of Fourier
series for a function, even, odd functions and their Fourier series over the interval  0, 2  ,
Change of length of interval – Fourier series , half range series.
Probability
5
Review of sets, operations on sets and Venn-diagrams; random experiment, outcome,
sample
space, elementary event and event, equally likely events, Definition of
Probability – Empirical approach and axiomatic approach (Mathematical), addition theorem
of probability for two mutually exclusive and exhaustive events, extension of addition
theorem for three mutually exclusive and exhaustive events, dependent, independent
events and conditional event, probability of a conditional event, multiplication theorem,
Bayes’ theorem.
I -162
Reference Books :
1. Higher Engineering Mathematics, B.V.Ramana, Tata McGraw-Hill
2. Probability, β/e Schaum’s Outlines Series, McGraw-Hill
3. Elementary Probability and Statistics, by S.C.Gupta and V.K.Kapoor
I -163
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
Subject Title
Subject Code
Periods/Week
Periods/Semester
:
:
:
:
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
EC- 402
04
60
Rationale ; Linear integrated circuits is a core subjects which gives a clear insight in to
the Use of operational amplifiers and other integrated circuits in Industrial applications .
Emphasis is laid on fundamental concepts and practical applications
TIME SCHEDULE
Sl
Major Topics
Periods
Weightage of
Marks
1
IC Manufacturing
08
16
Short
Answer
Questions
2
2
Operational
Amplifier
10
16
2
1
3
Op-Amp
Applications
16
16
1
2
4
Non Linear Wave
Shaping Circuits,
Timers and PLL
16
29
3
2
5
Instrumentation
amplifiers, A/D &
D/A Converters
10
26
2
2
60
110
10
8
Essay Type
Questions
1
OBJECTIVE:
The student will be able to
16.0 Explain the IC Manufacturing methods
16.1 List the advantages and disadvantages of Integrated Circuits over discrete
assembly.
16.2 Classify ICs based on manufacturing process (monolithic, thin film, thick film and
hybrid).
16.3 Describe the manufacturing process of monolithic ICs.
16.4 Describe the fabrication of resistor, and capacitor on monolithic IC.
16.5 Describe the fabrication of diode and transistor on monolithic IC.
16.6 List different IC packages.
16.7 Draw the shape of above package types
16.8 Mention the power rating of above packages.
16.9 Explain various levels of integration (SSI, MSI, LSI, VLSI etc.,).
I -164
16.10 Explain the Surface Mount Technology (SMT)
16.11 List 6 merits of SMT Technology..
17.0 Understand the working Differential amplifiers and Operational amplifiers.
17.1 Draw and explain the differential amplifier.
17.2 State the function of an operational amplifier.
17.3 Draw the symbol of an operational amplifier.
17.4 State the important operational characteristics of ideal amplifier.
17.5 Define Input impedance, Open loop gain, Slew rate, CMRR, Input offset voltage,
Input offset Current,
17.6 Draw the block diagram and pin out diagram of IC 741 and explain each block
17.7 Give the Pin configuration of IC 741
17.8 State the function of Each pin.
17.9 Give typical values of Open loop gain, Slew rate, CMRR, Input offset voltage,
Input offset Current,
17.10 Explain the power supply requirements of Operational Amplifier.
17.11 Explain the Inverting amplifier configuration of Op Amp.
17.12 Draw the input and output waveforms
17.13 Explain the concept of virtual ground.
17.14 Derive the equation for voltage gain
17.15 Explain the effect of feedback on input impedance and Bandwidth.for inverting
amplifier configuration
17.16 Explain the Non Inverting amplifier configuration of Op Amp.
17.17 Derive the formula for Voltage gain.
17.18 Explain the effect of feedback on input impedance and Bandwidth.for Non
inverting amplifier configuration.
17.19 Explain the use of operational amplifier as i) inverter , ii) Buffer
iii) Summing
Amplifier iv)Scale changer v) Integrator vi) Differentiator
17.20 Explain single supply operation of Operational Amplifier.
17.21 Give the pin configuration of single supply Op Amps such as CA 3011 ,LM324
17.22 List 6 important features of above ICs
.
18.0 Understand Operational Amplifier applications
18.1 Draw and explain OP-Amp Wein-bridge Oscillator circuit
18.2 State the conditions required for stable operation of above circuit
18.3 Draw and Explain RC Phase shift oscillator circuit using OP Amp
18.4 Explain Gain Bandwidth of OpAmp
18.5 Define Sweep Voltage.
18.6 State the fundamental consideration of sweep waveform.
18.7 Distinguish between voltage and current time-base generation and list their
applications.
18.8 Draw and explain Bootstrap sweep circuit.
18.9 Draw and explain Miller’s sweep circuit using op Amp.
18.10 Classify Multi vibrators.
18.11 Draw and explain the working of OP-Amp Bistable multi vibrator with waveforms.
I -165
18.12 Draw and explain the working of OP-Amp Monostable multivibrator with
waveforms.
18.13 Draw and explain the working of OP-Amp Astable multi vibrator with waveforms.
18.14 List 6 applications of multivibrators
18.15 Draw and explain the working of OP-Amp Schmitt trigger circuit.
18.16 Understand the working principle of different OP-AMP circuits.
18.17 Use of opamp for implementing Active low pass and high pass filters of first
order.
18.18 List the types of IC regulators and give the advantage of IC regulators
18.19 Explain the operation of fixed positive and negative voltage regulators.(using
7800 series and 7900 series)
18.20 Explain the operation of adjustable voltage regulator (LM317).
19.0 Understand Non Linear Wave Shaping Circuits, Timers and PLL
19.1 List the different types of clippers.
19.2 Explain the unbiased and biased clippers with waveforms
19.3 Explain the double ended clipper with waveforms
19.4 Explain the principle of clamper circuit with waveforms
19.5 Mention the applications of clippers and clampers
19.6 Draw the block diagram of 555 IC and explain.
19.7 Explain the working of astable multi using 555 IC.
19.8 Explain the working of Monostable Multivibrator using 555 IC.
19.9 Explain the concept of Phase locked loops
19.10 Draw and explain the block diagram of PLL – LM565.
19.11 Explain the operation VCO (LM566)
19.12 Define lock range of PLL
19.13 Define capture range of PLL.
19.14 Give design rules(Formulas) for implementing PLL circuit
19.15 List the applications of PLL.
19.16 Explain frequency multiplier and FM demodulator using PLL.
20.0 Understand Instrumentation amplifiers, A/D and D/A Converters.
20.1 Draw and explain the instrumentation amplifier using three Op-Amps
20.2 Advantages of instrumentation amplifier.
20.3 Explain the Voltage to current converter circuit.
20.4 List 3 applications of Voltage to current converter.
20.5 Explain the Current to Voltage converter circuit .
20.6 List 3 applications of Current to Voltage converter.
20.7 State the need for A/D and D/A conversion.
20.8 Explain the terms resolution, Accuracy, Monotonicity and settling time of D/A
converter.
20.9 Explain D/A conversion using binary weighted resistors.
20.10 Explain D/A conversion using R-2R ladder network.
20.11 Explain A/D conversion using counter method.
20.12 Explain A/D conversion using successive approximate method
I -166
COURSE CONTENTS:
1. IC Manufacturing Classifications of ICs based on manufacturing process, IC packages ,
IC Regulators Transistor series and shunt regulators.
2. Operational amplifiers Differential amplifiers and Operational amplifiers.
Parameters definitions.
3. Operational Amplifier applications –OP-Amp as summer, integrator,
differentiator, inverter and multiplier.,OP-Amp as Sinr Wave and Square Wave
generator( Wein Bridge Oscillators and Schmitt Trigger circuit).
4
Non Linear Wave Shaping Circuits Like Clippers and Clamper Circuits,555 Timer
block diagram, 555 Timer as Astable and Monostable Multivibrator , voltage Control
Oscillators and PLL.
5
Instrumentation amplifiers (three op-Amps type), A/D and D/A Converters, define the
terms the terms resolution, Accuracy, Monotonicity and settling time of D/A converter.
DAC and ADC using op-Amps.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Electronic Devices and Circuits by Bogart, TMH
2. Integrated Electronics by Milliman and Hallkias, TMH
3. Linear Integrated Circuits by Gaykwad,
4. Linear Integrated Circuits by Roy Chowdary
5. Linear Integrated Circuits by Clayton.
NETWORK ANALYSIS
Subject Title
:
NETWORK ANALYSIS
Subject Code
:
EC- 403
Periods/Week :
Periods/Semester
04
:
60
Rationale ; Network analysis is a core subjects which gives a clear insight in to
the Electronics &communication Engineering . care has been taken to limit the
Mathematical treatment , just appropriate for a diploma holder
I -167
TIME SCHEDULE
Sl
Major topics
No. of
periods
Weight
age of
marks
Short
Answer
Questions
Essay
Questions
1
Basics of electrical circuits
and Kirchoff’s laws
10
16
2
1
2
Network theorems
8
26
2
2
3
Mesh current and Node
voltage analysis
12
26
2
2
4
Transient analysis
12
13
1
1
5
Two port networks
8
13
1
1
6
Filters and Attenuators
10
16
2
1
60
110
10
8
Total
OBJECTIVES
On completion of the study of the subject a student shall be able to:
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
Understand the basics of electrical circuits and Kirchoff’s laws
Define active and passive elements.
Explain resistance, capacitance and inductance parameters.
Define energy source and classify the energy sources.
Explain ideal voltage source and ideal current source
Convert ideal voltage source to ideal current source and vice versa.
Explain the concept of mutual inductance as a circuit parameter
Mention the formula for coupling coefficient
Explain the Dot rule for coupled circuits
State limitations of Ohm’s law.
State Kirchhoff’s current law and Kirchhoff’s voltage law.
Solve problems on KCL,KVL,
Understand the network theorems
State Thevenin’s, and Norton’s theorems
Apply the above theorems to solve networks.
Explain the use of above theorems in electronic circuits
I -168
2.4
State superposition theorem
2.5
Solve simple problems using the above theorem
2.6
State Maximum power transfer theorems.
2.7
Solve simple problems using the above theorem.
2.8
Explain the importance of impedance matching for maximum power transfer.
2.9
State Reciprocity theorem
2.10 Explain the importance of Reciprocity theorem by giving examples like Co axial cable and
flat twin lead cable used in Television systems.
List the advantages and limitations of above theorems.
Explain star and Delta configurations of resistances.
Give transformation formulas from Star to Delta & Delta to Star (no derivation).
Solve simple problems on Star/Delta and Delta/Star transformation.
3.0 Apply Mesh current analysis and Node voltage analysis
3.1
Explain the concept of graph of a network
3.2
Define, branch, nodes, junction and loop in circuits.
3.3
Define tree, co-tree, twigs and links.
3.4
Obtain the tie set tie-set matrix and cut set matrix for a given network graph.
3.5
Identify the mesh currents.
3.6
Determine the number of mesh equations required to solve the given Network
3.7
Write the mesh current equations for a given network and arrange them in matrix form.
3.8
Solve for mesh currents using Crammer’s rule.
3.9
Apply super mesh technique to find the mesh current for the circuits having current
sources.
3.10
Identify the nodes in a network.
3.11
Determine the number of node voltage equations.
3.12
Write the node voltage equation for a given network and arrange them in matrix form.
3.13
Solve node voltages using Crammer’s rule.
3.14
Apply super node technique to find the node voltage for the circuits having voltage
sources.
3.15
Explain duality of a network
3.16
Draw the dual of given network.
4.0 Understand the transient analysis.
4.1
Define the terms initial conditions, steady state and transient.
4.2
Explain the dc response for an RL circuit.
4.3
Derive expression for current for an RL circuit.
4.4
Explain the dc response for an RC circuit.
4.5
Derive expression for current for an RC circuit.
4.6
Explain the dc response for an RLC circuit.
4.7
Solve the simple problems on series RL,RC circuits of DC excitation.
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
5.0 Understand the Two port networks
5.1
Define port.
5.2
Explain the open circuit impedance (Z) parameters with equivalent circuit.
5.3
Explain the short circuit admittance(Y) parameters with equivalent circuit.
5.4
Explain the hybrid (h) parameters with equivalent circuit.
5.5
Explain the Transmission (ABCD) parameters.
I -169
5.6
5.7
Give the conditions for symmetry, reciprocity in terms of Z,Y, h, ABCD
parameters.
Find the Z- parameters for a given T- network and Y parameters for a πnetwork
6.0 Understand the filters and attenuators
6.1
Define neper, decibel, characteristic impedance, propagation constant, Attenuation
6.2
Define filter, LPF, HPF, BPF, BSF.
6.3
Draw the characteristic curves for the above
6.4
Derive the expression for characteristic impedance for T and π network.
6.5
Give the expression for fc for constant k-LPF, HPF.
6.6
Design a simple LPF and HPF for a given cut off frequency and given impedance.
6.7
Design a T-type attenuator for the given attenuation and characteristic impedance.
6.8
Design a π-type attenuator for the given attenuation and characteristic impedance.
6.9
Define the equalizer circuit
6.10 Draw the circuit of equalizer circuit.
6.11 List the applications of equalize circuit.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1.
Circuit analysis by Hayt & Kemerly.
2.
Network analysis by Van Valkenberg.
3.
Circuits and Networks Sudhakar & Shyam Mohan
4.
Network Theroy-Joseph Adminster-Schaum Series
I -170
TMH
DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS
Subject Title
:
Digital Communications
Subject Code
:
EC-404
Periods/Week :
Periods/Semester
04
:
60
Rationale ; Digital communication is a core subject which gives a clear insight in to the
concepts of digital telephony . Emphasis is laid on fundamental concepts and practical
applications .
TIME SCHEDULE
Sl
1
Major Topics
Digital
Communication
Short
Essay Type
Answer
Questions
Questions
Periods
Weightage
of Marks
14
26
2
2
2
Error Detection
and Correction
12
16
2
1
3
Digital Modulation
techniques
12
26
2
2
4
Multiplexing
Techniques
12
26
2
2
5
Telephone system
10
16
2
1
60
110
10
8
Total
OBJECTIVES
On completion of the study of the subject the student shall be able to
1.0
1.1
Understand the principles of Digital Communication
Explain analog and digital signals.
I -171
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.13
1.14
1.15
1.16
1.17
1.18
1.19
1.20
1.21
1.22
1.23
1.24
Compare analog and digital communication techniques.
Define information capacity of a channel.
State sampling theorem and explain its significance.
Classify pulse modulation techniques.
Explain PAM,PWM and PPM with waveforms
State the advantages and disadvantages of PAM
Explain the generation and demodulation of PAM with block diagram.
List the advantages and disadvantages of PAM.
Describe PWM and PPM with waveforms.
List three advantages and disadvantages of PWM
List three advantages and disadvantages of PPM
Compare PAM, PWM and PPM.
Define quantization,
Explain the process of quantization with waveforms.
Explain quantization noise.
Define bit rate, and dynamic range for PCM systems.
Describe the coding and decoding of a PCM signal.
Explain delta modulation with block diagram.
Explain the advantages of delta modulation over PCM.
Describe adaptive delta modulation with block diagram and waveform
Compare PCM, DM and ADM
Explain the operation of Vocoders.
Describe different data compression techniques.
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
2.15
2.16
2.17
2.18
2.19
2.20
Understand the principles of Digital Data Transmission
List four digital signal encoding formats
Explain NRZ line coding techniques.
Explain RZ line coding techniques
Understand the various error detection and correction techniques.
Define the term bit overhead.
Define overhead efficiency.
Explain the conversion between parallel and serial data.
Explain the process of synchronous transmission.
List different types of errors during data transmission.
Mention different error detection techniques.
Explain parity check method of error detection.
Explain VRC method of error detection with an example.
Explain LRC method of error detection with an example.
Explain Checksum method of error detection.
Explain CRC method of error detection with an example.
State the advantages of CRC method of error detection.
List different error correction techniques.
Explain retransmission method of error correction.
Explain symbol substitution method of error correction.
Explain importance of hamming code in error detection and correction.
3.0
Understand various Digital data Modulation Techniques.
3.1 State the need for digital modulation
3.2 Explain the difference between bit rate and baud rat
I -172
3.3 List the three basic types of digital modulation techniques.
3.4 Define ASK,FSK and PSK
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
3.15
3.16
3.17
3.18
3.19
3.20
Explain ASK modulator with block diagram.
Explain ASK coherent demodulator with block diagram
List four advantages of ASK
List two disadvantages of ASK
Explain BFSK modulator with block diagram.
Explain Coherent BFSK demodulator.
Draw and explain FSK demodulator using PLL.
List two advantages and disadvantages of FSK
Draw and explain BPSK modulator.
Draw and explain BPSK demodulator.
List four advantages of BPSK
State the importance of Constellation diagram.
Explain QPSK and 8 PSK with constellation diagrams briefly
Compare ASK, FSK and PSK.
Explain Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM).
State typical application areas of different digital modulation techniques.
4.0
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.13
4.14
Understand the principles of Multiplexing techniques.
State the need for multiplexing
Explain Frequency Division Multiplexing
Explain Time Division Multiplexing.
List four advantages of TDM
List three disadvantages of TDM
Compare TDM and FDM
State the need for a modem in data communication.
Describe the operation of telephone modem.
Explain the difference between fax and data modem.
Explain cable modems.
Explain Digital Subscriber Line (DSL).
Explain Asynchronous Digital Subscriber Line (ADSL) technology
Describe ISDN
State the advantages of ISDN.
5.0
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
5.13
Know Telephone System.
Classify different switched telephone systems.
Describe the topology of the switched telephone network.
Mention the advantages of electronic telephony over manual telephony.
Define local loop in telephone system.
Mention various signals present on a local-loop telephone line.
State the functions of various signals present on a local-loop telephone line.
List the types of dialling.
Explain pulse dialling and DTMF.
State the advantages of DTMF.
Compare in-band and out-of-band signalling systems for telephony.
Explain briefly the use of Signal system Seven(SS7).
Explain the use of FDM in telephony
Explain the use of TDM in telephony.
I -173
5.14 Explain Internet telephony.
5.15 Explain IP telephony (VOIP).
COURSE CONTENT
1. Digital Communication and Digital Modulation.
Introduction to digital communication, Sampling theorem, pulse modulation, pulse code
modulation, delta modulation, vocoders and data compression techniques.
2. Data Transmission
Data coding, asynchronous transmission, synchronous Transmission, error detection and
correction: Parity check, VRC, LRC, Checksum, CRC, hamming code, symbol substitution
method.
3.Digital Modulation Techniques
Digital modulation, Amplitude shift keying(ASK), frequency shift keying (FSK), phase shift
keying (PSK), QPSK,8PSK, Constellation diagrams, quadrature amplitude modulation (QAM).
4. Multiplexing techniques.
Multiplexing techniques: FDM and TDM, Telephone modem, fax modem and data modem,
cable modem, digital subscriber lines, ADSL,ISDN
5. Telephone System.
Public switched telephone network(PSTN), manual and electronic Telephony , the local loop,
signals on local loop, in band and out band signalling, SS-7system,FDM and TDM in telephony,
Internet telephony.
REFERENCES BOOKS
1. Electronic communications systems by Roy Blake, Thomson Delmar
2. Analog & Digital Communication by T L Singal, Tata McGraw Hill.
3. Electronic Communication System by George Kennedy.
4. Electronic Communication Systems A Complete Course –4th Edi by Schweber PHI
5. Communication systems :Analog and Digital by RP Singh, SD Spare, Tata McGraw Hill.
6. Digital communication Theory, Techniques & applications, by R.N Mutagi, Oxford university
press
7. Communication systems by V. Chandrasekhar, Oxford university press.
8. Data Communications and networking by VBehrouz A Forouzan, TMH
I -174
I -175
MICROPROCESSOR & MICROCONTROLLER PROGRAMMING
Subject Title
Subject Code
Periods/Week
Periods/Semester
:
:
:
:
Microprocessor & Microcontroller Programming
EC-405
04
60
Rationale ; Microprocessors &Microcontroller programming is a core subjects which
gives a clear insight in to the Use of Microcontrollers and other integrated circuits in
Industrial applications . Emphasis is laid on fundamental concepts and practical
applications to enable the student Industry ready .
TIME SCHEDULE
Major Topics
Sl.
1
Introduction to 8085
architecture, timing
diagrams
2
Architecture of 8051
3
Instruction set
4
Programming of 8051
5
Applications using 8051
Total
No. of
Periods
Weightage
of marks
Short
Answer
Questions
Essay
Questions
16
21
2
1½
14
18
1
1½
12
29
3
2
12
26
2
2
06
16
2
1
60
110
10
8
OBJECTIVES
On completion of the study of the subject a student should be able to comprehend the following:
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
Comprehend the architecture of Microprocessor 8085
Draw the block diagram of a microprocessor and explain the function of each block.
List the features of micro processors
Give the functional block diagram of 8085
Explain multiplexing of Address and Data Bus
Explain the register structure of 8085.
Explain the function of various registers.
Draw the pin out diagram of 8085
Explain the terms operation code, operand and illustrate these terms by writing an
instruction. Understand the hex code for the same
I -176
1.9 Explain fetch cycle, execution cycle and instruction cycle
1.10 Explain execution of STA, LDA, IN, OUT instructions.
1.11 Draw the timing diagrams of the above instructions, and understand thoroughly in terms of
clock cycles
1.12 List the latest processors used in Desktop/Laptop computers
1.13 Mention their important specifications .
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
Comprehend the architecture of Microcontroller 8051
List the features of micro controllers.
Compare Microprocessors and Microcontrollers
Draw the block diagram of a microcomputer and explain the function of each block.
Give the details of 8051 microcontroller family chips.
Give the functional block diagram of 8051 microcontroller
Draw the register structure of 8051and explain.
Explain the function of various special function registers.
Give the pin diagram of 8051 micro controller and specify the purpose of each pin.
Describe internal memory, external memory and ports of 8051.
Explain counters & timers in 8051
Explain serial input/output of 8051
Explain interrupts in 8051
Describe different modes of operation.
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
Comprehend the instruction set of 8051 micro controller
State the need for an instruction set.
Give the instruction format of 8051.
Explain fetch cycle, execution cycle and instruction cycle.
Distinguish between machine cycle and T-state.
Explain the timing diagram for memory write, memory read operations of 8051.
Define the terms machine language, assembly language, and mnemonics.
Give the difference between machine level and assembly level programming.
List the major groups in the instruction set along with examples.
Explain the terms operation code, operand and illustrate these terms by writing an
instruction.
Explain the data manipulation functions, data transfer, arithmetic, logic and branching with
examples
Classify the 8051 instructions into one byte, two byte and three byte instructions.
List the various addressing modes of 8051and Explain with examples.
Explain data transfer instructions of 8051.
Explain the arithmetic instructions and recognise the flags that are set or reset for given
data conditions.
Explain the logic instructions and recognize the flags that are set or reset for given data
conditions.
Illustrate the logic operations and explain their use in making, setting and resetting of
individual bits.
Explain unconditional and conditional jump and how flags are used to change the
sequence of program.
3.10
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
3.15
3.16
3.17
4.0
4.1
4.2
Comprehend Programming Concepts
List the various symbols used in drawing flow charts.
Draw flow charts for some simple problems.
I -177
4.3
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.13
4.14
4.15
4.16
4.17
Write programs in mnemonics to illustrate the application of data copy instructions and
translate these mnemonics into hex codes.
Write programs of instructions to perform single byte, double byte and multi byte addition
and subtraction.
Illustrate the application of jump instruction in the program.
Write a program using counter techniques.
Define a subroutine and explain its use.
Explain the sequence of program when subroutine is called and executed.
Explain information exchange between the program counter and the stack and
identification of stack pointer register when a subroutine is called.
List and explain unconditional and conditional call and return instructions.
Use PUSH, POP instructions in programs.
Illustrate the concept of nesting, multiple ending and common ending in subroutines.
Use input/output, machine related statements in writing assembly language programs.
Explain the term debugging a program.
List the important steps in writing and trouble shooting a simple program.
Explain the principles of single step and break point debugging techniques.
Write instructions to set up time delay.
5.0
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
5.13
Programming for Applications using 8051
Describe the Interfacing of push button switches and LEDs.
Describe the Seven segment display interface
List reasons for the popularity of LCDs
Describe the functions of pins of LCD
List instruction command code for programming a LCD
Explain Interfacing LCD to 8051
Program LCD in assembly language
Explain the basic operations of keyboard
Explain key press and detection mechanisms
Explain Interfacing a 4 X 4 Matrix Key Board.
Explain RS232 standards
List RS232 pin , DB 25 and DB 9 connectors
Explain MAX 232 and 233 and interfacing
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
COURSE CONTENT
1.
ARCHITECTURE OF 8085
Block diagram of microcomputer, Block diagram of 8085, Pin out diagram of 8085, registers,
timers, interrupts, modes of operation-address and data bus multiplexing-. Instructionsinstruction cycle-timing diagrams
2.
ARCHITECTURE OF 8051:
Block diagram of microcomputer, Block diagram of 8051, Pin out diagram of 8051, registers,
timers, interrupts, fetch cycle, execution cycle, machine cycle
I -178
3.
INSTRUCTION SET OF 8051:
Instruction set of 8051, instruction format, fetch cycle, execution cycle, instruction cycle,
machine cycle, timing diagrams, machine language, assembly language, classification of
instructions, addressing modes- Groups of instructions, opcode, operand
4.
PROGRAMMING CONCEPTS:
Flow charts, Data transfer, single and multi byte addition and subtraction, subroutines,
nesting, multiple ending and common ending, use of Input output and machine related
statements, debugging, time delay program.
5.
APPLICATIONS PROGRAMMING:
Interfacing of various hardware circuits for applications-push button switches - LEDs-Seven
segment display-Matrix Key Board- ADC chip - DAC chip- DC motor- Stepper motor
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. 8085-Micro Processors by Ramesh S Gaonkar
2. 8051 Micro controller by Mazidi and Mazidi.
3. 8051 Micro controller by Kenneth J. Ayala.
4. Programming customizing the 8051 Microcontroller by Myke Predko, TMH
5. Introduction to microprocessors for engineers and scientists by by Ghosh & Sridhar,
Prentice-Hall.
6. Microprocessors and Microcontrollers by N.Senthil Kumar, M. Saravanan, S.
Jeevanathan, Oxford press.
I -179
PROGRAMMING IN ‘C'
Subject Title
Subject Code
Periods / Week
Periods / Sem.
:
:
:
:
PROGRAMMING IN C
EC- 406
04
60
Rationale ; Programming in C is introduced as the programming skills have
become very common even at school level The knowledge of c programming is
essential for courses in microcontrollers Emphasis is laid on fundamental
concepts and practical applications . Further Programming knowledge is a must
in the industry.
TIME SCHEDULE
OBJE
CTIVES
On
compl
etion
of the
study
of this
subje
ct a
stude
nt
shall
be
able
to
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.13
1.14
1.15
Sl.
1
2
3
4
5
Major Topics
C Programming
Basics
Decision & Loop
Control
Statements
Arrays & Strings
Functions and
Pointers in C
Structures,
Unions & Preprocessor
Directives
Total
Periods
Weightage
of marks
Short
Type
Essay Type
10
16
2
1
10
26
2
2
10
26
2
2
18
26
2
2
12
16
2
1
60
110
10
08
Understand C Programming Basics.
List the character set of C language
Explain the data types in C
List the five Arithmetic Operators
Define an expression and show how to evaluate.
Explain writing the assignment statement.
Explain the increment and decrement operators.
Identify compound Assignment Operators.
Explain the Nested assignments.
Explain printf ()and scanf () functions
Mention various type conversion techniques and discuss them.
List the four relational operators.
List the three logical operators supported by ‘C’
Give the operator precedence.
Evaluate a logical expression.
Explain bitwise logical operators.
I -180
2.0 Understand Decision & Loop Control Statements
2.1
State the importance of conditional expression.
2.2
List the four conditional statements supported by C
2.3
Explain If, If-else and If-else-If statements.
2.4
Explain Switch Case statement.
2.5
Write simple programs based on conditional statements.
2.6
List the three types of iterative statements supported by C.
2.7
Explain while loop, Do-While and For loops.
2.8
Explain the nested loops
2.9
write simple programs based on nested loops
2.10 Differentiate break and continue statements.
2.11
Mention the use of null statement and comma operator.
3.0
Understand Arrays & Strings
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
Define one dimensional and two dimensional arrays.
Explain the initialization of the above arrays & Access Array elements.
Explain Passing array elements as arguments and arrays as arguments.
Define string
List three functions used for reading strings
List three functions used for writing strings.
Write the operation of getchar(), getch(), getche() and putchar() functions.
Write the operations of string manipulation functions strcat(), strchr(), strncmp(),
strcpy(), and strlen()
Write simple programs based on string manipulation functions.
3.9
4.0 Understand Functions & Pointers
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.13
4.14
4.15
4.16
Define a function.
State the use of return statement.
Explain passing parameters to the function
Write programs using function call technique.
List the four storage classes supported by C.
Differentiate local and external variables.
Identify automatic and static variables and discuss them in detail
State the application of external declaration.
Define Recursion and Explain with examples.
Declare a pointer, assign a pointer, and initialize a pointer.
Discus pointer arithmetic.
Differentiate address and de referencing operators.
Illustrate with an example how pointer can be used to realize the effect of
parameter passing by reference.
Illustrate with examples the relationship between arrays and pointers.
Discuss pointer arrays with example.
Describe concept of pointers to functions.
5.0 Understand Structures, Unions and preprocessor directives
5.1
5.2
Define a structure
Describe structure variable.
I -181
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
5.13
5.14
5.15
Explain initialization of structures.
Explain the accessing of members of a structure.
Illustrate concept of structure assignment
Explain how to find size of a structure.
Discuss nested structure concept.
Explain passing of individual members of a structure to a function
Explain passing entire structure as function argument.
Illustrate the concept of structures containing pointers.
Define a Union
Explain the use of a union.
List six unconditional preprocessor directives.
List six conditional preprocessor directives.
Explain the preprocessing directives: define, include, ifdef, ifndef.
COURSE CONTENT
1.
C-Programming Basics
Structure of a C programme, Programming rules, Character Set, Delimiters Keywords,
Constants, Variables, Data types, Type conversion. Arithmetic, Logical, Relational operators
and precedence – Assignment, Increment, Decrement operators, evaluation of expressions.
Console IO formatted and unformatted functions.
2.
Decision and Loop control Statements
If, If-else, Nested If else, Break, Continue, Goto and Switch statements Loops:- For, While,
Do-while, Nesting of Loops.
3.
Arrays and Strings
1 D Array declaration, Initialization, 2 D Array declaration, Initialization, Accessing of Array
elements, Character Arrays declaration and Initialization of Strings, Display of strings with
format.
4.
Functions and pointers in C
Function-Definition, Declaration, Return statement, passing parameters to function- Function
calls, Nesting of functions and Recursion Storage classes of variables, Scope and visibility.
Pointer declaration, Arithmetic operations and pointers, Pointers and Arrays
5.
Structures, Unions and preprocessor directives
Structure features, Declaration and Initialization, Structure within a structure, Array of
structure, Accessing of Structure members, Structures and functions, Unions. Preprocessor
directives.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Programming in ANSI C,Balaguru Swamy.E , 3rd Edition, TMH
I -182
2. Programming with ANSI and Turbo C by Kamthane, Pearson Education
3. Programming in C by Gottfried (Schaum Series)
4. Programming in C by Reema Thareja, Oxford university press.
5. Let us C, by Yashwant Kanetkar, BPB Publication, New Delhi
I -183
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS LABORATORY PRACTICE
Subject Title
Subject Code
Periods/Week
Periods/Semester
:
:
:
:
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS LAB PRACTICE
EC-407
06
90
Rationale:
Linear integrated circuits lab is introduced to reinforce the theoretical knowledge by
experimental verification. Experiments on opamps are designed in such a way they also give
insight into design concepts.
TIME SCHEDULE
S. No.
Major Topics
No. of
Period
s
I.
Operational Amplifier Circuits
12
II.
Wave shaping Circuits
12
III.
Opamp Oscillators &555 Timer IC
12
IV.
Phase locked loops
12
V.
Op Amp applications
12
VI
Circuit simulation using Pspice
36
Total
90
List of Experiments
I. Operational Amplifier Circuits
1. Familiarize with Operational amplifier 741 and Quad opamp LM 324 and comparator LM
339 Ics
2. To Determine the CMRR and Slew Rate of the OP-AMP.
3) To Implement and test 741 OpAmp as
a) inverting amplifier
b) Non Inverting amplifier
c) Voltage follower (Buffer),
I -184
4) To implement and test 741 Operation amplifier as
a)summing Amplifier
b) Difference amplifier
c) Scale changer (with two OpAMps)
II. Wave shaping Circuits
5. To Realize Clipper and Clamper circuits and observe the waveforms on CRO
A) To Realize Series and Parallel diode clippers
B) To Assemble and test Positive and negative clipper circuits with and without bias
c) To implement Amplitude limiter ( two diodes connected back to back) and observe the
waveform on CRO.
D)To Implement a Zener diode Clipper and measure the output voltage with DMM and also
observe waveform on CRO
6. To implement Wave shaping circuits using OpAmp
a)To implement &test Differentiator and Integrator circuits .
b) To implement &test a Voltage comparator Circuit
c ) To implement &test Opamp Schmitt trigger and draw charactersistics
III. Signal conditioning Circuits using Opamp
7) To implement &test Signal conditioning Circuits using Opamp
a) To Interface op amp output with TTL gates with input amplitude limiting circuit
b) To implement &test Current to Voltage converter using Op amps
c) To Implement &test Current to Voltage converter and use it to detect photodiode reverse
current.
8. To implement &test Voltage to current converter
a)To Implement &test a Voltage to current converter that produces a proportionate current in
the range of 4mA to 20mA corresponding to input voltages from 0 to 5V
III. Opamp Oscillators &555 Timer IC
9) To implement & test Sine wave Oscillator Circuits using OpAmp CA 3011
a) RC-phase shift oscillator
b) Wien bridge oscillator
) To implement Op-Amp Relaxation Oscillators
a) To implement &test Monostable multivibrator circuit and observe output waveforms on CRO
b) To Implement &test Astable multivibrator observe output waveforms on CRO
10) To Verify different modes of 555 IC.
a) To Implement Monostable multi vibrator and observe output waveforms on CRO
b) To Implement Astable multivibrator and observe output waveforms on CRO
11) To verify functions of 565 Phase Locked loop IC
I -185
A) To Implement 565 Phase locked loop circuit and determine VCO free running frequency
Lock range , Capture Range Practically and observe output waveforms on CRO
b) To implement Frequency demodulator using 565 and observe output waveform on CRO.
12) To Use 566 as a square and Triangular wave generator
a) To implement waveform /Function generator using 566 .
b) To produce Frequency modulation using 566 and observe output waveform on CRO.
13)To verify the features of Tone Decoder IC 567 IC
( Refer to the application notes and implement following circuits)
a) To Implement 10 Khz signal detector and test
b) To implement frequency Doubler and test .
c) To implement Quadrature output Oscillator and Test.
14) To implement D/A converter using R-2R ladder network/Binary Weighted type.
A) Implement D/A converter using Opamp and R-2R ladder and Binary weighted network and
test
a ) To Implement &Test Precision Rectifier using Opamp
15) To implement Opamp active filters and evaluate the performance
a) To implement active low pass filter
b). To implement Active High pass filter
16) To assemble Audio Power Amplifiers using LM 380 IC and Test the performance.
17) To Practice PSpice simulation
a) Simulate the experiments 4,5,6,8,9,10, 15 using Pspice
Competencies & Key Competencies to be achieved
Exp
No
Name of the Experiment
Competencies
1
To familiarize with
Operational amplifier 741
and Quad opamp LM 324
and comparator LM 339
Ics (1)
 Identify the iC
package
 Identify Power
supply pins , inverting
& Non inverting input
pins of 741 and other
ICs
 Refer to the data
sheets & note down
the specifications ,
Package details etc
2
To Determine the CMRR
and Slew Rate of the OPAMP.(2)
 Rig up the circuit
 Set correct +ve and
– Ve Vcc
I -186
Key Competencies
 Identify the OpAmp
IC from the number
 Identify & Draw the
pin Configuration
 Interpret datasheet
specifications
 Apply Common signal
to the IC input Pins
 Measure the output
 Apply Common signal
to the IC input Pins
 Measure the output
voltage accurately
 Observe & Measure
the signal on CRO
voltage accurately
 Observe & Measure
the signal on CRO
 Select rigt op amp for
a given application
from data sheets
 Compare other Opamp
Specifications from
datasheets
3
To implement and test
741 Operation amplifier
as (6)
a) inverting amplifier
b) Non Inverting amplifier
 Rig up the circuit .
 Choose correct
values of feedback
and input Resistors
 Measure input &
Output signals with
DMM
 Rig up the circuit .
 Choose correct
values of feedback
and input Resistors
 Measure input &
Output signals with
DMM
 Rig up the circuit .
 Choose correct
values of feedback
and input Resistors
 Measure input &
Output signals with
DMM
 Rig up the circuit .
 Choose correct
values of feedback
and input Resistors
 Measure input &
Output signals with
DMM
c) Voltage follower (Buffer),
4
To implement and test
741 Operation amplifier
as(6)
a)summing Amplifier
b) Difference amplifier
c) Scale changer (with two
OpAMps)
4
To Realize Clipper and
Clamper circuits and
observe the waveforms
on CRO (3)
A) To Realize Series and
Parallel diode clippers
 Rig up the circuit
 Apply correct level of
input signal from
Function generator
 Observe & Measure
the input and output
waveforms on CRO
I -187
 Apply correct level
of input signal from
Function generator
 Observe & Measure
the input and output
waveforms on CRO
 Use the Clipper
circuits in practical
applications
B) To Assemble and test
Positive and negative
clipper circuits with and
without bias
c) To implement Amplitude
limiter ( two diodes
connected back to back)
and observe the waveform
on CRO.
D)To Implement a Zener
diode Clipper and measure
the output voltage with
DMM and also observe
waveform on CRO
5
 Rig up the circuit
 Choose correct
values for
components to
achieve desired time
constant
 Observe& measure
the input and output
wave forms on CRO.
 Observe the effect
of change in circuit
Time constant
 Observe& measure
the input and output
wave forms on CRO.
 Observe the effect
of change in circuit
Time constant
 Use the Opamp for
wave shaping &other
applications.
To implement Signal
conditioning Circuits
using Opamp (3)
 Rig up the circuit
 Apply correct levels of
Input signals
a) To Interface op amp
output with TTL gates with
input amplitude limiting
circuit
 Measure the Input /
Output Voltages and
currents using DMM
To implement Wave
shaping circuits using
OpAmp(3)
a)To implement
Differentiator and Integrator
circuits .
b) To implement a Voltage
comparator Circuit
c ) To implement Opamp
Schmitt trigger and draw
characteristics
6
 Apply correct levels of
Input signals
I -188
 Measure the Input /
Output Voltages and
currents using DMM
 Use OpAmp as I/V
converter
b) To implement Current to
Voltage converter using Op
amps
c) To Implement Current to
Voltage converter and use
it to detect photodiode
reverse current.
7
To implement Voltage to
current converter (3)
a)To Implement a Voltage
to current converter that
produces a proportionate
current in the range of 4mA
to 20mA corresponding to
input voltages from 0 to 5V
8
To implement Sine wave
Oscillator Circuits using
OpAmp CA 3011 (3)
a) RC-phase shift oscillator
b) Wien bridge oscillator
 Rig up the circuit
 Apply correct levels of
Input signals
 Measure the Input /
Output Voltages and
currents using DMM
 Familiarize with
CA 3011 pin
configuration
 Choose correct
values for frequency
determining
components
 Rig up the circuit
Observe & measure
the output waveform
on CRO
 Change RC
component Values &
Observe the effect on
output signal on CRO
I -189
 Apply correct levels of
Input signals
 Measure the Input /
Output Voltages and
currents using DMM
 Use opamp as V/I
converter
 Choose correct
values for frequency
determining
components
 Observe & measure
the output waveform
on CRO
 Change RC
component Values &
Observe the effect
on output signal on
CRO
 Use CA3011
Opamp for single
supply applications
 Choose correct
values for frequency
determining
components
a) To implement
 Rig up the circuit
Observe & measure
Monostable multivibrator
the output waveform
circuit and observe output
on CRO
waveforms on CRO
 Change RC
component Values &
b) To Implement Astable
Observe the effect on
multivibrator observe output
output signal on CRO
waveforms on CRO
9
To implement &test OpAmp Relaxation
Oscillators (3)
10
To Verify different modes
of 555 IC. (3)
a) Implement Monostable
multi vibrator
b) Implement Astable
multivibrator
11
 Choose correct
values for frequency
determining
components
 Rig up the circuit
Observe & measure
the output waveform
on CRO
c. Change RC
component Values &
Observe the effect on
output signal on CRO
 familiarize with 565
pin configuration
Choose correct
A) To design &Implement
values for frequency
565 Phase locked loop
determining
components
circuit and determine VCO

Rig up the circuit
free running frequency Lock
 Observe & measure
range , Capture Range
the output waveform
Practically and observe
To verify functions of 565
Phase Locked loop IC (3)
I -190
 Choose correct
values for frequency
determining
components
 Observe & measure
the output waveform
on CRO
 Change RC
component Values &
Observe the effect
on output signal on
CRO
 Design Opamp
circuits for pulse
&square wave
generator
applications
 Choose correct
values for frequency
determining
components
 Observe & measure
the output waveform
on CRO
 Change RC
component Values &
Observe the effect on
output signal on CRO
 Choose correct
values for frequency
determining
components
 Rig up the circuit
 Observe & measure
the input & output
waveform on CRO
 Change RC
component Values &
output waveforms on CRO
b) To design & implement
Frequency demodulator
using 565 and observe
output waveform on CRO.
12
To implement &Test
waveform /Function
generator using 566 .(3)
a) To produce Frequency
modulation using 566 and
observe output waveform
on CRO.
13
To verify the features of
Tone Decoder IC 567 IC
(3)
( Refer to the application
notes and implement
following circuits)
a) To Implement 10 Khz
signal detector and test
b) To implement frequency
Doubler and test .
on CRO
Change RC
component Values &
Observe the effect on
output signal on CRO
 Interpret the
specifications of 565
IC from datasheets
 Familiarize with
566pin configuration
Choose correct
values for frequency
determining
components
 Rig up the circuit
 Observe & measure
the output waveform
on CRO
 Change RC
component Values &
Observe the effect on
output signal on CRO
 Interpret the
specifications of 566
IC from datasheets
 Familiarize with 567
pin configuration
Choose correct
values for frequency
determining
components
 Rig up the circuit
 Observe & measure
the output waveform
on CRO
 Change RC
component Values &
Observe the effect on
output signal on CRO
c) To implement
I -191
Observe the effect
on output signal on
CRO
 Interpret the
specifications of 565
Iv from datasheets
 Choose correct
values for frequency
determining
components
 Observe & measure
the output waveform
on CRO
Change RC
component Values &
Observe the effect
on output signal on
CRO
 Interpret the
specifications of 566
IC from datasheets
 Choose correct
values for frequency
determining
components
 Observe & measure
the input/output
waveform on CRO
 Change RC
component Values &
Observe the effect
on output signal on
CRO
 Interpret the
specifications of 567 IC
Quadrature output
Oscillator and Test.
14
To implement Opamp
active filters and evaluate
the performance (3)
a) To implement active
low pass filter
b). To implement Active
High pass filter
15
To implement &Test D/A
converter using R-2R
ladder network/Binary
Weighted type. (3)
A)To Implement D/A
converter using Opamp and
R-2R ladder and Binary
weighted network and test
16
 Interpret the
specifications of 566 IC
from datasheets
 Choose correct
values for cut off
frequency
determining
components
Assemble the circuit
 Apply correct level
signals to prevent
output distortion
 Observe & measure
the output waveform
on CRO
 Change RC
component Values &
Observe the effect on
output signal on CRO
 Assemble the circuit
 Apply binary input
signal
 Measure the output
voltage with DMM
a )To Implement &Test
Precision Rectifier using
Opamp
 Refer to the data
sheets and note down
the number of IC
version of D/A
converter and
specifications
To assemble Audio
Power Amplifiers using
 Familiarize with pin
configuration of LM 380
I -192
from datasheets
 Choose correct
values for cut off
frequency
determining
components
 Observe & measure
the output waveform
on CRO
 Change RC
component Values &
Observe the effect
on output signal on
CRO
 Apply binary input
signal
 Measure the output
voltage with DMM
 Assemble the circuit
(without speaker)
LM 380 IC and Test the
performance. (9)
IC
 Assemble the circuit
(without speaker)
 Carry out
Performance test
(Frequency response)
 Carry out Performance
test (Frequency
response)
 Connect the
Microphone & speaker
and test
 Connect the
Microphone & speaker
and test
17
Pspice simulation (30)
 Draw the circuit
a) Simulate the
experiments 4,5,6,8,9,10,
15 using Pspice
 Assign values to
components
 Debug
 simulate the circuit &
save
 Interpret the results .
I -193
 Assign values to
components
 Debug
 simulate the circuit &
save
 Interpret the results
Communication Skills Lab Practice
(Common to all Branches)
Subject title
Subject code
Periods per week
Periods per semester
:
:
:
:
Communication skills
EC-408
3
45
Introduction :
In the context of globalization , competence in speaking skills is the need of the hour The gap
between the needs of the industry and the curriculum can be bridged by enabling the students
to hone their speaking and listening skills. This course aims at providing opportunities for
practicing speaking.
Time Schedule
Sno.
Topic
Periods
1
Listening I
3
2
4
Listening II
Introducing oneself
Describing objects
3
3
3
5
Describing events
3
6
Reporting past incidents
3
7
Speaking from observation /
reading
3
8
JAM
6
9
Group discussion
6
10
Mock interviews
6
11
Making presentations
6
3
45
I -194
Weightage of marks
Sessional
(End Exam )
marks
10
10
50
30
60
40
Total
20
8
0
100
Objectives :
On completion of the course the students will be able to
 Strengthen their listening skills
 Strengthen their speaking skills
Competencies and key competencies to be achieved by the student
Topic
Teacher’s input/ methodology
Students competence
Listening I
Pre- Listening –eliciting, pictures
Identifying the main idea,
Listening II
While - Listening
Identifying specific details,
Post –Listening –project , writing
Identifying parallel and contradictory ideas
Drawing inferences,
Reasoning
Introducing
oneself
Reporting
incidents
Kinds of introduction --official/
personal, dynamic vocabulary,
Use of simple present tense,
Sequencing,
Body language, Model
introduction, Use of line ups
Appropriate vocabulary
Group work /pair work,
Use of past tense,
Elicit,
Relevant vocabulary
Use of past tense,
Student presentations
Describing
objects
Describing
events
Vocabulary ,
Use of adjectives,
Use of adjectives,
Dimensions,shapes
Games—I spy,
Compare and contrast,
Group presentations
sequence
Group work/pair work
Use of appropriate tense,
Use of appropriate tense
sequencing
I -195
Reporting
past incidents
Use of past tense,
Use of past tense , sequencing
Vocabulary
Student presentations
Speaking
from
observation/re
ading
Group work/pair work,
Use of past tense,
Reading techniques ,
Summarising , evaluating, comprehension
JAM
Effective techniques ,
Vocabulary,
Good beginning , conclusion,
tips,
Sequencing,
Use of line ups
Fluency,
Thinking spontaneously
Group
discussion
Expressing opinion, body
language,
Expressing opinion, agree/ disagree,
fluency,Persuasive and leadership skills
Mock
interview
FAQs , body language
Role play, body language,
Making
presentations
Student presentations
Using charts , pictures, interpreting data,
sequencing,PPTs
Communicative methodology (CLT) should be used to create an interactive class. Apart from
the suggestions given teachers are free to innovate to use any activity to improve the language
competence of students . Attention can also be given to improve the accent and intonation of
students.
Note:
* This subject is a theory subject.
** The workload should be calculated as theory workload.
***Examinations in the subject will be treated as a practical one.
I -196
DIGITAL COMMUNICATION LAB PRACTICE
Subject Title
: Digital Communication Lab Practice
Subject Code : EC – 409
Periods/Week
: 03
Periods/ Semester: 45
Rationale: Digital communication lab is designed to reinforce the theoretical concepts learnt in
digital communication by experimental verification. Sound knowledge in Digital communication
is essential to learn new technology trends in the ever growing communication Industry
S.No.
1
2
3
4
5
TIME SCHEDULE
Major Topic
Pulse Modulation
Time Division &Frequency Division Multiplexing
Signal Encoding (Keying ) Techniques
DTMF Signalling
MatLab Practice
No. of Periods
15
6
9
3
12
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
I. Pulse Modulation Techniques
1.
To implement an opamp sample and hold circuit and test
2. To verify sampling theorem and observe waveforms on CRO
b) To sample an analog signal (using IC 398) at Nyquist rate and above Nyquist rate. And
observe the waveforms
3.
CRO
To Verify and observe Pulse amplitude modulation and demodulation waveforms on
4.To observe pulse position modulation and demodulation waveforms on CRO
5. To Verify and observe Pulse Width modulation and demodulation waveforms on CRO
6.To Verify and observe Pulse Code Modulation and Demodulation waveforms on CRO
II. Time Division &Frequency Division Multiplexing
7. To Verify 2-channel TDM and observe input/output waveforms on CRO
8. To demonstrate FDM. and observe input/output waveforms on CRO
I -197
III.Signal Encoding (Keying ) Techniques
9. To generate and demodulate ASK signal and observe input/output waveforms on CRO
10. To generate and demodulate FSK signal and observe input/output waveforms on CRO
11. To generate and demodulate PSK signal
12.To observe line encoder &Decoder ( NRZ Signal) waveforms on CRO for
a) Unipolar and b) Bipolar techniques
IV. DTMF Signalling
13. To generate DTMF signals using UM91214B IC/5089IC or any other equivalent ICs
a)To demonstrate DTMF decoder using 8870 IC or its equivalent
V. Matlab Practice (Program should be given)
14) To Enter and execute a Matlab program to generate ASK signal. Debug any
programming mistakes
15)To Enter and Execute a Matlab program to generate FSK signal. Debug any
programming mistakes.
16) To Enter and Execute a Matlab program to generate PSK signal. Debug any
programming mistakes.
17 )To Enter a program to generate DTMF Signals and execute using Matlab. Debug any
programming mistakes
Competencies and Key competencies to be achieved
Exp
No
Name of the
Experiment
Competencies
Key Competencies
1
To implement an
opamp sample and
hold circuit and test
 a)Choose the right
component values for
holding capacitor and
Resistor
 Apply correct level
signal at input
 Rig up the circuit
 Apply correct level signal
at input
 Measure and observe
output waveforms on
I -198
 Measure and
observe output
waveforms on CRO
 Observe the effect of
sampling rate on the
output signal.
CRO
 b) Observe the effect of
sampling rate on the
output signal.
 c) Refer to data sheets for
dedicated sample &Hold
Ics and note down their
specifications
2
3
To verify sampling
theorem and observe
waveforms on CRO
 Make connections
 identify PAM signal
 Apply correct level signal
at input
b) To sample an
analog signal (using IC
398) at Nyquist rate
and above Nyquist
rate. And observe the
waveforms
 Measure and observe
output waveforms on
CRO
 . Measure and
observe output
waveforms on CRO
To Verify and observe
Pulse amplitude
modulation and
demodulation
waveforms on CRO
 Make connections
 Observe the effect of low
sampling rate (aliasing)
on the output signal
 identify various sections in
PCM decoder
 Apply correct level signal
at input
 Measure and observe
output waveforms on
CRO
4
4.To observe pulse
position modulation
and demodulation
waveforms on CRO
 Make connections
 identify various sections in
PPM Board
 Apply correct level signal
at input
 Measure and observe
input/output waveforms
on CRO
 Identify PPM signal
I -199
 Observe the effect of
low sampling rate
(aliasing) on the
output signal
 Apply correct level
signal at input
 Measure and
observe output
waveforms on CRO
 Observe the effect of
quantization on the
output signal
 Apply correct level
signal at input
 Measure and
observe input/output
waveforms on CRO
 Identify PPM signal
5
To Verify and observe
Pulse Width
modulation (PWM)and
demodulation
waveforms on CRO
 Make connections
 identify various sections in
PWM Board
 Apply correct level signal
at input
 Measure and observe
input/output waveforms
on CRO
 Apply correct level
signal at input
 Measure and
observe input/output
waveforms on CRO
 Identify PWM signal
 Identify PWM signal.
6
To observe line
encoder &Decoder (
NRZ Signal)
waveforms on CRO for
 Make connections
a) Unipolar and b)
Bipolar techniques
 Apply correct level signal
at input
 identify various sections in
Line encoder &Decoder
Board
 Measure and observe
input/output waveforms
on CRO
 Apply correct level
signal at input
 Measure and
observe input/output
waveforms on CRO
 Identify Encoded and
Decoded signals
 Identify Encoded and
Decoded signals
7
To Verify and observe
Pulse Code Modulation
and Demodulation
waveforms on CRO
 identify various sections in
PCM Board
 Make connections
 Apply correct level signal
at input
 Measure and observe
input/output waveforms
on CRO
 Observe the effect of
quantization and sampling
on the output signal
I -200

 Apply correct level
signal at input
 Measure and
observe input/output
waveforms on CRO
 Observe the effect of
quantization and
sampling on the
output signal
8
To Verify 2-channel
TDM and observe
input/output waveforms
on CRO
 Identify various sections
in TDM multiplexer
 Make connections
 Apply correct level signals
at input
 Measure and observe
input/output waveforms
on CRO
 Make connections
 Apply correct level
signals at input
 Measure and
observe input/output
waveforms on CRO
 Measure the clock
signal using CRO
 Measure the clock
signal using CRO
9
To Verify FDM. and
observe input/output
waveforms on CRO
 Identify various sections
in FDM multiplexer
 Apply correct level
signals at input
 Make connections
 Measure and
observe input/output
waveforms on CRO
 Apply correct level signals
at input
 Measure & observe
carrier and Baseband
signals on CRO
10
To generate and
demodulate ASK signal
and observe
input/output waveforms
on CRO
 Identify various sections
in ASK modulator
Demodulator board
 Make connections
 Apply correct level signals
at input
 Measure & observe
carrier and Baseband
signals on CRO
11
To generate and
demodulate FSK signal
and observe
input/output
waveforms.
 Identify various sections
in FSK modulator
Demodulator board
 Make connections
 Apply correct level signals
I -201
 Measure & observe
carrier and
Baseband signals on
CRO
 Make connections
 Apply correct level
signals at input
 Measure & observe
carrier and
Baseband signals on
CRO
 Make connections
 Apply correct level
signals at input
 Measure & observe
carrier and
at input
 Measure and observe
input/output waveforms
on CRO
12
To generate and
demodulate PSK signal
 Identify various sections
in PSK modulator
Demodulator board
 Make connections
 Apply correct level signals
at input
Baseband signals on
CRO
 Make connections
 Apply correct level
signals at input
 Measure and observe
input/output
waveforms on CRO
 Measure and observe
input/output waveforms
on CRO
13
To generate DTMF
signals using
UM91214B IC/5089IC
or any other equivalent
ICs
a)To verify thew
function of DTMF
decoder using 8870 IC
or its equivalent
14
To Enter and
execute a Matlab
program to generate
ASK signal.
 Familiarize with Pin
configuration of 8870 IC
 Observe DTMF signal
waveforms on CRO
 Observe decoded DTMF
signal on LED display
 Observe DTMF
signal waveforms on
CRO
 Observe decoded
DTMF signal on LED
display
 Enter the program
 Follow the syntax
 Follow the syntax
 Debug the program
 Debug the program
 Execute the program
 Execute the program
15
To Enter and
Execute a Matlab
program to generate
FSK signal..
 Enter the program
 Follow the syntax
 Follow the syntax
 Debug the program
 Debug the program
 Execute the program
 Execute the program
I -202
16
To Enter and
Execute a Matlab
program to generate
PSK signal.
 Enter the program
 Follow the syntax
 Follow the syntax
 Debug the program
 Debug the program
 Execute the program
 Execute the program
17
To Enter a
program to generate
DTMF Signals and
execute using Matlab.
 Enter the program
 Follow the syntax
 Follow the syntax
 Debug the program
 Debug the program
 Execute the program
 Execute the program
18
To enter a program to
generate PCM signal
using Matlab
 Enter the program
 Follow the syntax
 Follow the syntax
 Debug the program
 Debug the program
 Execute the program
 Execute the program
I -203
Programming with C and MATLAB Practice
Subject Title
Subject Code
Periods/Week
Periods/Semester
:
:
:
:
Programming with C & MAT LAB Practice
EC- 410
06
90
Rationale ; Programmingwith C Lab Practice is introduced to reinforce the programming
skills learnt in the class Room . Mat Lab is also included to give an opportunity to the
students to understand the design concepts by simulate electronic circuits .
TIME SCHEDULE
Sl
1
2
3
4
5
6
Major Topic
C Programming Basics
Decision & Loop Control Statements
Exercises on functions
Arrays, Strings and Pointers in C
Structures, Unions & Preprocessor Directives
MAT Lab Practice
No. of Periods
6
12
15
15
12
30
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
I. C Programming Basics
1. To familiarize with turbo Compiler features.
2. To practice formatted Input /Outpt (printf and scanf ) functions.
3. To Practice with Various Operators in C
II. Decision & Loop Control Statements
4. To practice with Decision & Control (if, if-else, nested if –else) Statements
5. To practice with Decision control (Switch –case structure) statements
6. To practice with loop control Statements
III. Exercises on functions
7. To practice the use of functions in C
IV. Arrays, Strings and Pointers in C
8. To practice single dimensional integer arrays
I -204
9. To practice multidimensional integer arrays .
10. To Practice string functions for string comparison , copying and concatenation
11. To practice with pointers in 'C'
V. Structures, Unions & Preprocessor Directives
12. To practice the use of Structures in C
13. To practice with C preprocessor Directives.
14. To practice command line arguments in C
VI. MAT LAB PRACTICE
1.
To get familiarized with Matlab environment
a. To create and work with array of numbers
b. to create and print simple plots
c. to create , save & Execute a script file
d. to create & Execute a function file
2.
To work with arrays and matrices
3.
To Create anonymous Function and use.
4.
To define a function symbolically
5.
To import data from MS excel sheet
6.
To work with files and directories
7.
To publish a report
8.
To use built in Functions of Matlab
9.
To plot simple graphs using fplot function
10.
To plot simple graphs using ezplot function
11.
To plot simple graphs using ezsurfc function
12.
To write a simple script file and execute it
13.
To write a simple function file and execute
I -205
14.
To design an inverting amplifier using matlab and plot performance characteristics
(Program to be given)
C lab Practice – (PART A)
Competencies and Key Competencies to be achieved
Exp
No
1
Name of the
Experiment
(No of periods)
To familiarize with
turbo C Compiler
features.(1)
Competencies
 Enter the program in
standard format following
syntax in text editor
 debug and Compile
 Execute and save with
appropriate name
2
To practice formatted
Input /Outpt (printf and
scanf ) functions.(2)
 Enter the program in
standard format following
syntax in text editor
 Handle string data and
Numerical data
 Use format modifiers for
printf and scanf
 debug and Compile
Key Competencies
 Enter the program in
standard format
following syntax in
text editor
 debug and Compile
 Execute and save
with appropriate
name
 Handle string data
and Numerical data
 Use format modifiers
for printf and scanf
 debug and Compile
 Execute and save
with appropriate
name
 Execute and save with
appropriate name
3
To Practice with
Various Operators
inC(3)
 Enter the program in
standard format following
syntax in text editor
 Use assignment
operators, Arithmetic
operators, precedence
operators , Relational
&logical operators

debug and Compile
 Execute and save with
I -206
 Use assignment
operators, Arithmetic
operators,
precedence operators
, Relational &logical
operators
 debug and Compile
 Execute and save
with appropriate
name
appropriate name
4
To practice with
Decision & Control (if,
if-else, nested if –else)
Statements (3)
 Enter the program in
standard format following
syntax in text editor
 Use If statements and its
variants,
 debug and Compile
 Execute and save with
appropriate name
5
To practice with
Decision control
(Switch –case
structure)
statements(3)
 Enter the program in
standard format following
syntax in text editor
 Use If statements
and its variants,
Switch statement,
iteration constructs,
Jump &exit
statements
 debug and Compile
 Use Switch
statement,
 Use Switch statement,
 debug and Compile
 Execute and save with
appropriate name
6
To practice with loop
control Statements(3)
 Enter the program in
standard format following
syntax in text editor
 Use , iteration
constructs, Jump
&exit statements
 Use , iteration constructs,
Jump &exit statements
 debug and Compile
 Execute and save with
appropriate name
7
To practice the use of
functions in C (6)
 Enter the program in
standard format following
syntax in text editor
 Function declaration
 Declare local variables,
formal parameters
&Global variables
 Function declaration
 Declare local
variables, formal
parameters &Global
variables
 Use Calling by value
 Use Calling by reference
 Use Calling by
reference
 Use nesting of function
calls
 Use nesting of
function calls
 Use Calling by value
 Debug and Compile
 Execute and save with
I -207
appropriate name
To practice the use of
Recursive functions in
C (6)
 Enter the program in
standard format following
syntax in text editor
 Function declaration
 Declare local variables,
formal parameters
&Global variables
 Use Recursion
 Return from main
 Declare local
variables, formal
parameters &Global
variables
 Use Recursion
 Return from main
 Declare variable
number &type for
arguments
 Declare variable number
&type for arguments
 Debug and Compile
8
To practice single
dimensional integer
arrays(3)
 Execute and save with
appropriate name
 Enter the program in
standard format following
syntax in text editor
 Define array
 Use Array initialization
 Read unknown number of
elements
 Debug and Compile
9
To practice
multidimensional
integer arrays(3)

Execute and save with
appropriate name

Enter the program in
standard format following
syntax in text editor
 Define 2 dimensional
array
 Use Array initialization
 Use arrays as arguments
in functions
I -208

Define array
 Use Array
initialization
 Read unknown
number of elements
 Debug and Compile
 Execute and save
with appropriate
name
 Define 2
dimensional array
 Use Array
initialization
 Use arrays as
arguments in
functions
 Debug and Compile
 Execute and save with
appropriate name
10
To Practice string
functions for string
comparison , copying
and concatenation(3)
 Enter the program in
standard format following
syntax in text editor
 Use strcmp, str
 Use arrays as arguments
in functions

Use strcmp,
strcpy,strcnt functions
 Debug and Compile
 Execute and save
with appropriate
name
 Debug and Compile
 Execute and save with
appropriate name
11
To practice with
pointers in 'C'(3)
 Enter the program in
standard format following
syntax in text editor
 Declare pointer variables

Use pointer operators
 Declare pointer
variables
 Use pointer operators
 Comparing pointers
 Debug and Compile
 Comparing pointers
 Debug and Compile
 Execute and save with
appropriate name
12
To practice the use of
Structures in C(3)

Enter the program in
standard format following
syntax in text editor
 Define structure

Give assignment
statement
 Define structure
 Give assignment
statement
 Initialization of
structure array
 Debug and Compile
 Initialization of structure
array
 Debug and Compile
13
To practice with C
preprocessor
Directives.(6)

Execute and save with
appropriate name

Enter the program in
standard format following
syntax in text editor

Use #define, #if, #ifdef,
#else, #elif, #include preprocessor directives in
I -209
 Use #define, #if,
#ifdef, #else, #elif,
#include preprocessor directives
in the program
the program

Debug and Compile
 Execute and save with
appropriate name
MATLAB Practice – (PART B)
Competencies & Key Competencies to be achieved
Exp
No
1
Name of the
Experiment
(No of periods)
To get familiarized with
Matlab environment(3)
b. To work with files
and directories
Competencies
 Open MatLab
 Identify Current folder,
Current window , Work
space &Command history
 Use editor/Debugger to
create a program
 Use basic commands
 Creating Directory,
Checking current directory
 saving files
 Quit Matlab
2
To enter an expression
and solve (3)
 Open Matlab & access
the appropriate directory
&File
 Enter the Expression
using Matlab notations
and hierarchy
 Debug
Key Competencies
 Identify Current
folder, Current
window , Work space
&Command history
 Use editor/Debugger
to create a program
 Use basic commands
 Creating Directory,
Checking current
directory
 saving files
 Enter the Expression
using Matlab
notations and
hierarchy
 Debug
 Solve and verify the
results
 Solve and verify the
results
3
To solve complex
expressions (involving
j operator (3)
 Open Matlab & access
the appropriate directory
&File
 Enter the Expression
using Matlab notations
and hierarchy
I -210
 Enter the Expression
using Matlab
notations and
hierarchy
 Debug
 Solve and verify the
 Debug
results
 Solve and verify the
results
4
To work with arrays
and matrices (3)
b) To find determinant
of a matrix using
matlab
 Open Matlab & access
the appropriate directory
&File
 Enter the program in
standard format following
syntax in text editor
 Enter a matrix, access an
element , a row, a column,
 Use colon operator
 Use Basic Matrix functions
 Debug and Compile
5
 Enter the program in
standard format
following syntax in
text editor
 Enter a matrix,
access an element , a
row, a column,
 Use colon operator
 Use Basic Matrix
functions
 Debug and Compile
 Execute and save with
appropriate name
 Execute and save
with appropriate
name
To Solve simultaneous
equations using
Matlab(3)
 Open Matlab & access
the appropriate directory
&File
b) To solve for currents
in an electrical circuit
using kirchoff’s laws
using matlab
 Re arranging equations in
proper order & put in a
matrix format
 Enter the matrix in
standard format following
syntax
 Debug and Compile
 Enter the matrix in
standard format
following syntax
 Debug and Compile
 Execute and save
with appropriate
name
 Execute and save with
appropriate name
6
To plot a graph
between two
variables using plot
(x,y) function(3)
b) To plot a sine
wave with title &
Labels
 Open Matlab & access
the appropriate directory
&File
 Add title & labels
 save with appropriate
name Enter a matrix,
access an element , a
row, a column,
multiply a matrix with
a vector.
 Use plot command
 Debug and Compile
 Specify line styles
&Colours
 Execute and save
with appropriate
name
 Enter the function
 Add plots to existing
graphs
 Debug and Compile
I -211
 Execute and save with
appropriate name
7
To plot multiple
functions and add title
and labels(3)
 Open Matlab & access
the appropriate directory
&File
 Enter the functions
 Enter the functions
 Specify line styles
&Colours
 Add title & labels
 Specify line styles
&Colours
 Add plots to existing
graphs
 Create multiple plots
 Debug and Compile
 Add title & labels
 Add plots to existing
graphs
 Create multiple plots
 Debug and Compile
 Execute and save
with appropriate
name
 Execute and save with
appropriate name
8
To use fplot , ezplot
and ezsurfc functions
b) To publish a report
in word file(3)
 Open Matlab & access
the appropriate directory
&File
 Enter the functions
 Enter the functions
 Specify line styles
&Colours
 Add title & labels
 Specify line styles
&Colours
 Add plots to existing
graphs
 Use fplot ,ezplot and
ezsurfc command s
 Debug and Compile
 Execute and save with
appropriate name
 Add title & labels
 Add plots to existing
graphs
 Use fplot ,ezplot and
ezsurfc command s
 Debug and Compile
 Execute and save
with appropriate
name
 Publish to word file
 Publish to word file
9
To Use simulink to
verify the function of
an amplifier (3)

Open simulink

Access library
browser

Identify blocks
&terminals
 Gather the appropriate
I -212

Identify blocks
&terminals
 Gather the
appropriate Blocks (
sine wave , gain ,
Scope)
Blocks ( sine wave , gain ,
Scope)
 Connect blocks
 Run simulation
 Connect blocks
 Run simulation
10
To use simulink GUI
to design 1st order
Low pass Filter(3)

Open simulink

Access library
browser

Identify blocks
&terminals
 Gather the appropriate
Blocks ( sine wave , ,
Scope etc)

Identify blocks
&terminals
 Gather the
appropriate Blocks (
sine wave , , Scope
etc)
 Connect blocks
 Run simulation
 Connect blocks
 Run simulation
Note: End Examination should constitute experiments from Part A and B
Reference Book:
Getting started with MATLAB by Rudra Pratap, Oxford university Press
I -213
DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATIONS
V Semester
Subject
Code
Instruction
Name of the Subject
Theory
Practical/
Tutorial
Total
Period
/ Sem
Duration
(hours)
Sessional
Marks
Scheme of Examination
period / week
End
Exam
Mark
s
Total
Marks
THEORY:
Advanced
Communications
Consumer
Electronics
4
-
60
3
20
80
100
4
-
60
3
20
80
100
Computer Hardware
4
-
60
3
20
80
100
EC-504
Optical Fibre
Communication
4
-
60
3
20
80
100
EC-505
Microcontroller
Applications
4
-
60
3
20
80
100
EC-506
Data communication
& Computer
Networking
4
-
60
3
20
80
100
EC-501
EC-502
EC-503
PRACTICAL:
EC-507
Computer HW &
Networking Lab
-
6
90
3
40
60
100
EC-508
Life skills
-
3
45
3
40
60
100
EC-509
Microcontroller
applications lab
-
3
45
3
40
60
100
EC-510
Field Practices
-
6
90
3
40
60
100
24
18
630
280
720
1000
TOTAL
I -214
ADVANCED COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
Subject Title
:
Advanced Communication Systems
Subject Code
Periods/Week
:
:
EC-501
04
Periods/Semester
:
60
Rationale: Advanced Communication systems subject is a core subject aimed to impart
sufficient theoretical inputs in Transmission lines Microwave devices, Radars, and satellite
communication to keep in pace with the fast changing technology.
TIME SCHEDULE
Short
Essay
Answer
Questions
Questions
2
1
No. of
periods
Weightage
of marks
1 Transmission Lines
Microwave components and
2
Tubes
Microwave semiconductor
3
devices and MICs
4 RADAR
10
16
14
26
2
2
10
16
2
1
13
26
2
2
5 Satellite Communication
13
26
2
2
60
110
10
8
Sl
Major Topics
Total
OBJECTIVES
On completion of the Explain of the subject a student should be able to comprehend the
following:
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
Transmission Lines
List different types of Transmission Lines.
Draw the Electrical equivalent circuit of a Transmission line.
Define Primary and Secondary constants of a Transmission line.
Explain the transmission line equations
Derive the expressions for attenuation and phase constants
Define group and phase velocities in transmission lines
Explain the concept of Infinite Line
I -215
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.13
1.14
1.15
Define lossless Line
List two types of distortions in transmission lines
Derive the condition for distortion less line
Define Reflection coefficient and SWR
Derive the relation between Reflection Coefficient & SWR
Explain the need for impedance matching in transmission lines.
Impedance Matching using quarter wave transmission line.
Explain single stub matching in transmission lines.
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
Microwave Components and Tubes
State the need for microwave devices.
List the various bands in microwave frequency range.
Define rectangular and circular waveguides.
Describe various modes of operation of waveguides.
Define dominant mode and cut-off wavelength in rectangular waveguide.
Calculate the cut-off frequency, cut-off wavelength, guide wavelength, phase velocity,
group velocity and characteristic impedance in rectangular waveguide.
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
2.15
2.16
2.17
2.18
2.19
2.20
2.21
2.22
State the need for microwave bends, corners and twists
List different T-Junctions
Explain the operation of E-Plane Tee and H-Plane Tee.
Explain the operation of Magic Tee
State the need for isolators and circulators
Explain the operation of Isolator
Explain the operation of Circulator.
Explain the construction and working of Multi cavity Klystron amplifier.
List the applications of Multi cavity Klystron.
Cavity resonator
Explain the construction and working of Reflex Klystron oscillator
List the applications of Reflex Klystron.
Explain the construction and working of Magnetron oscillator
List applications of Magnetron.
Explain the construction and working of Travelling Wave Tube amplifier
List applications of TWTA.
3.0
3.1
3.2
Microwave Semiconductor Devices and MICs
State the need for microwave semiconductor devices
Distinguish between ordinary semiconductor devices and microwave semiconductor
devices.
3.3 Define Gunn Effect.
3.4 Describe constructional features and working principle of GUNN diode
3.5 List the applications of GUNN diode.
3.6 State the Tunnelling phenomena
3.7 Explain the operation of Tunnel diode
3.8 List the other semiconductor microwave devices like IMPATT and TRAPPAT diodes
3.9 List the applications of IMPATT & TRAPATT diodes
3.10 List the advantages of microwave semiconductor devices over electron beam devices.
I -216
3.11 State the need for Microwave Integrated Circuits (MICs)
3.12 Explain the working of micro-strip antenna
3.13 List the applications of micro-strip antennas.
4.0
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.13
4.14
4.15
4.16
4.17
4.18
Understand the principles of RADAR
State the basic principle of Radar with a block diagram.
Derive the basic Radar range equation.
Predict the range performance factors from range equation.
Draw and explain the block diagram of pulsed Radar system.
State the need for duplexer in Radar
Explain the operation of branch type Duplexer with sketch.
List the types of indicators used in radar systems.
Briefly explain A-scope and PPI displays.
State the disadvantages of pulsed radar.
Explain the Doppler Effect.
Explain the principle of CW radar
Draw and explain the block diagram of CW radar.
List the limitations of a CW Radar
Explain the working of FM CW Radar.
Explain the application of FM CW Radar as altimeter
Draw and explain the block diagram of MTI Radar.
List the applications of various Radar systems.
Explain the principle of instrument landing system.
5.0
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
Understand the principle of working of satellite communication
State the need for satellite communication
Define foot print of a satellite
Describe the basic structure and uses of microwave links.
Explain fixed microwave link with block diagram.
List the advantages of satellite communication over terrestrial radio communication.
Explain geostationary satellites and satellites in lower orbits.
List the advantages and disadvantages geostationary satellites.
Define azimuth and elevation with reference to satellites.
Define terms apogee and perigee.
Define uplink frequency and down link frequency
List the functions of a transponder
List three types transponders used in satellites (single conversion, double conversion and
regenerative)
Explain the working of the three types of transponders.
Explain bandwidth allocation of a satellite.
List the three methods of increasing satellite capacity
Explain the methods of increasing channel capacity. Frequency reuse, polarization and
spatial isolation).
Draw and explain the block diagram of communication satellite.
Draw and explain the block diagram of Earth station.
Explain the working of GPS
List the applications of satellites.
5.13
5.14
5.15
5.16
5.17
5.18
5.19
5.20
I -217
COURSE CONTENT
1. Transmission Lines
Introduction-electrical equivalent circuit-primary constants- characteristic impedancepropagation constant-infinite line-lossless line-condition for distortion less line-reflection
coefficient-SWR-impedance matching-quarter wave line-stub matching-rectangular waveguidemodes of operation-dominant mode in rectangular waveguide-cut off wavelength-group velocityphase velocity
2. Microwave components and Tubes
Introduction to microwave devices -microwave bends-corners-twists-tees-circulators-isolatorsMulti cavity Klystron-Reflex Klysron-Magnetron-TWT-applications.
3. Microwave semiconductor devices and MICs
GUNN Effect-GUNN diode-Tunnel diode-IMPATT-TRAPATT-MICs-applications
4. RADAR
Introduction to Radar system-Radar range equation - Pulsed Radars-Indicators-Duplexer-CW
radar-FM CW Radar-Radar altimeter-MTI Radar-Instrument landing system
5. Satellite Communication
Microwave link-advantages of satellite communication system - Frequency bands-bandwidthchannel capacity-communication satellite-Earth station-GPS-applications of satellites
REFERENCE BOOKS
1.
2.
3.
4.
Electronic communication system by George Kennedy, TMH
Electronic Communication Systems by Blake. Thomson
Introduction to RADAR Engineering by Merryl I Skolnik. TMH
Microwave Integrated circuits by Samuel Leo
I -218
CONSUMER ELECTRONICS
Subject Title
Subject Code
Periods/Week
Periods/Semester
:
:
:
:
CONSUMER ELECTRONICS
EC-502
04
60
Rationale: Consumer Electronics Subject is introduced to meet the needs of consumer
electronics Industry. The units in the course are designed to impart the concepts of Audio Video
systems, Television, Cable TV, DTH services and other domestic appliances like Microwave
ovens and Automatic washing Machines.
TIME SCHEDULE
Sl.
Major Topics
No. of
periods
Weightage of
marks
Short Answer
Questions
Essay
Questions
1
Microphones &
Speakers
10
21
2
1½
2
Audio Systems
8
13
1
1
16
23
1
2
8
21
2
1½
10
16
2
1
8
60
16
110
2
10
1
8
3
4
5
6
TV Picture & Composite
Video Signal
Colour T.V.
Cable, Satellite and
digital TV
Domestic Appliances
Total
OBJECTIVES
On completion of the Explain of the subject a student should be able to comprehend the
following:
1.0
Understand basics of audio systems.
Familiarise with different types of microphones and loud speakers
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
List the different types of microphones based on impedance, polar characteristics and
principle of working.
Explain the working of carbon, condenser, Crystal, ribbon and dynamic microphones along
with their polar characteristics.
Compare the parameters like sensitivity, noise, frequency response, directivity, output
impedance, bias necessity, size, cost and applications of above microphones.
List the ratings of condenser, crystal, carbon, ribbon and dynamic microphones.
I -219
1.5
Explain the constructional features and principle of operation of PMMC Loudspeaker and
its ratings.
1.6 Mention the necessity of Baffle for a Loudspeaker and types of Baffles (like open, infinite,
bass reflex, acoustic labyrinth) and constructional details.
1.7 Mention the use of woofers and tweeters.
1.8 Give the need for a Horn loud speaker with its construction and advantages. Mention
different types of horns.
1.9 Compare the performance characteristics of cone type and horn type loud speakers.
1.10 Explain the principle, construction and working of magnetic and crystal headphones and
their uses.
1.11 Mention the specifications of Loudspeaker and Microphones
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
2.15
Understand Audio & Video Systems
Define speech, music and noise.
Explain frequency response and equalization.
Define the concept of Hi-Fi and Stereo.
State the need of bass, treble, balance, and volume control in stereo amplifier.
Explain a simple circuit showing the above controls.
Briefly explain the principle of magnetic recording and reproduction.
List five advantages and disadvantages magnetic recording.
State the principle of optical recording.
Explain the method of optical recording of sound on film
Explain the working principle of DVD player.
Explain working of DVD player with block diagram.
Define the MP3 & MP4 formats..
Explain the concept of noise reduction using DOLBY system.
Explain home theatre sound system.
Describe the speaker arrangement and features of Dolby Digital 5.1 Surround Sound
(AC3)
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
3.15
Comprehend TV Picture & Composite video signal
Explain formation of picture.
State the need for horizontal and vertical scanning.
State the frame and field frequencies.
State need for vertical synchronisation, horizontal synchronisation and blanking pulses.
Mention the frequency allocation of T.V. Channels used in India.
List all standards of T.V. transmissions as per C.C.I.R.
List different types of scanning
Distinguish between progressive and interlaced scanning.
Draw the standard scanning pattern in an interlaced scanning.
State the need for interlaced scanning with reference to Bandwidth.
List all different pulses in a composite video signal.
State and compare positive and negative modulation.
Sketch composite video signal as per I.S.I. specification.
State the need for front porch and back porch in blanking pulses.
State the necessity of equalising pulses and serrated vertical blanking pulses.
4.0
4.1
Understand the working of Colour Television.
Explain the main characteristic of human eye with regard to perception of colours.
I -220
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
Distinguish between additive and subtractive mixing of colours.
Explain complementary colours, hue, saturation, and Colour circle.
Explain compatibility in TV system.
List three standards of Colour transmission system like NTSC, PAL and SECAM.
Explain how chrominance signals are transmitted on one carrier in PAL system.
Draw the block diagram of a Colour TV transmitter and state the function of each block.
Draw the block diagram of a Colour TV receiver and state the function of each block.
Explain the processing of Colour video signal (PAL system) in a Colour receiver.
List different types of Colour TV monitors.
Explain basic principles of above technologies
5.0
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
Understand the principles of Cable, Satellite and Smart TV
Draw and explain the block diagram of CATV.
Explain the cable TV components such as amplifiers directional couplers and Converters.
Explain the necessity of mid-band and super-band channels
State the need for satellite for TV broadcasting over wide area.
Explain the merits of DTH system
With a block diagram explain DVB-S channel reception with block diagram.
State the need for SET TOP BOX.
List all features of Projection TV
List applications of Projection TV
Explain the features of HDTV
Explain the features of SMART TV.
List the important specifications of UHD TV
6.0
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10
Understand the working of Domestic Appliances
State the working principle of Microwave oven
Explain functional block diagram of Microwave oven
List advantages of Microwave oven
Explain the principle of Induction heater.
Give the reasons for using only magnetic metals for use with induction heater.
List the 4 merits of induction heating .
Explain the functional block diagram of Electronic Washing machine
List any three advantages of Fuzzy logic in washing machines
Explain functional block diagram of Camcorder
List applications of Camcorder
COURSE CONTENTS
1.
Introduction to Audio Systems
properties of sound, Hi-Fi and stereo systems, disc recording and reproduction. Magnetic
recording and reproduction, optical recording. Working of DVD player, MP3 & MP4 player..
I -221
2.
TV Picture & Composite Video Signal
Picture elements. Horizontal and vertical scanning, frame and field frequencies, Horizontal
and vertical synchronisation, Horizontal and vertical blanking. T.V. Channel standards.
Construction of composite Video signal, Horizontal blanking time and vertical blanking time.
Linear scanning, standard scanning pattern. Flicker, sync Pulses, blanking signals.
3.
Colour Television
Fundamental concepts of 3 colours systems. Additive and subtractive mixing of colours.
Different Colour systems like NTSC, PAL, and SECAM. Colour TV Transmitter block diagram.
Colour TV receiver block diagram (PAL). Colour video signal processing, operating and
service controls,
4.
Cable, satellite and digital TV
Cable TV, DTH system, DTH receiver, HD TV – SMART TV – features of UHD TV
5.
Domestic Appliances
Microwave oven, Induction Heater-washing Machine, Digital camera – camcorders-
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Electronic communication systems by Roy Blake, Thomson Delmar.
2. Colour Television by R.R.Gulati. TMH
3. How Electronic Things Work.& What to Do When They Don’t -Robert L. Goodman, -TMH
4. Consumer electronics - SP Bali, -Pearson
5. Digital Satellite Television Handbook By Mark E. Long
I -222
COMPUTER HARDWARE
Subject Title
:
Computer Hardware
Subject Code
:
EC-503
Periods /Week
:
04
Periods/Semester
:
60
Rationale : Computer Hardware subject is included in the V semester as the understanding of
computer and its associated hardware is rather a necessity for survival in the present situation.
Units are designed to give a clear understanding of Computer Hardware including Operating
system. The knowledge of computer hardware makes the students eligible for jobs computer
industry also.
TIME SCHEDULE
Sl.
Major Topics
No. of
periods
1
2
3
Mother Board
Peripherals.
Windows OS
20
20
10
19
36
36
Short
Answer
Questions
3
2
2
4
PC assembly
& Software
Installation
10
19
3
1
Total
60
110
10
8
Weightage
of marks
Essay
Questions
1
3
3
OBJECTIVES
On completion of the Explain of the subject a student should be able to comprehend the
following:
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
Understand mother board and its features
Draw the layout of components in the motherboard.
List different expansion slots available on the motherboard.
List all the details of different chipsets in use.
Explain the processor interface and specifications of processor.
List all different types of MEMORIESs in use..
Explain accelerated graphics port.
Explain power supply connectors and external devices.
I -223
1.8 Mention different types of serial, parallel and USB ports.
1.9 Give 4 reasons for popularity of USB ports
1.10 List all the connector details for printer, serial port, mouse, keyboard and USB.
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
Comprehend the use of various computer peripherals
Explain the Working of Hard Disk and data access.
Explain the storage of data on DVD
Explain the functioning of GRAPHIC CARD.
Explain the functioning of Network card and list its specifications.
List five specifications of monitor.
Explain the working of LCD monitor.
Explain the working principle of infrared keyboard and infrared mouse
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
3.13
Computer Accessories
List three types of printers.
Explain the working of dot matrix printer.
Explain the working of Laser printer.
Explain the working of inkjet printer.
Explain the working of scanners.
Explain OCR (optical character recognition).
Explain the JPEG and MPEG formats.
Explain the principle of DVD and Writer.
List out the features of a LAPTOP
Differences between DESKTOP and LAPTOP.
List five features of TABLET(TAB)
List three features of FABLET
List out features of TOUCH SCREEN for modern gadgets.
4.0
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
Understand windows operating systems.
Define the Power On Self Test (POST).
Explain the need for BIOS settings.
Know about the booting procedure.
Describe the usage of File Allocation Table (FAT).
Describe the structure and uses of Windows registry
State the purpose of INI and INF files
List all device classes in the device manager.
Explain the purpose of control panel icons
List all types of viruses and ways of removing viruses.
List any five Anti-Virus Software available in market
5.0
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
Understand PC assembly and software installation
Explain the steps in assembling a PC.
Explain the editing of CMOS set up and its details.
Describe the process of formatting.
State the use FDISK.
Explain disk manager and disk partitioning
List the operating systems and their features.
I -224
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
Explain Installation of WINDOWS OS
State the uses of Linux OS and ANDROID OS
State the need for installation of device drivers.
Explain blocking, damaged sectors, Defragmentation, and Removal of temporary files.
List different microprocessors (INTEL, MOTORALA) for PC applications
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Motherboard.: Motherboard – component layout, chip set, slots, serial port, parallel
USB port, connectors. RAM, cache memory, AGP.
port,
2. Peripherals: HDD, FDD, sound card, Video grabber card, network card, Monitor,
Keyboard, and mouse. Laptop
3. Accessories: Working and specifications of dot matrix, Laser and inkjet printers-ScannerJPEG, MPEG-DVD RW-ANTI VIRUS
4. Windows Operating System: Power On Self Test, BIOS, Booting, auto executable batch
file, config.sys file, windows registry, Device manager, control panel, viruses.
5. PC assembly and Software Installation: Assembling PC, CMOS set up, Installation OS,
Installation
of
device
drivers,
system
tools.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Peter Norton’s complete guide to PC upgrades βnd edition by Peter Norton, Micheal
Desmond, PHI
2. Peter Norton’s new inside the PC by Peter Norton, Scott Clark, PHI
3. Microprocessors, PC Hardware and interfacing by N. Mathivanan PHI
4. Trouble shooting your PC by M. David Stone and Alfred Poor,PHI
5. Enhanced guide to managing and maintaining your PC-Third Edition,Thomson
I -225
OPTICAL FIBER COMMUNICATIONS
Subject Title
:
Optical Fibre Communications
Subject Code
Periods/Week
:
:
EC-504
04
Periods/Semester
:
60
Rationale: Optical fibre communication is introduced as a separate course keeping fast growing
trends of communication Engineering in mind and to meet the needs of Internet and Mobile
communications industry
TIME SCHEDULE
Sl
Major Topics
1
Over View of Fiber Optic
Communication
Fiber Drawing Process
and cabling
Fiber Optic Components
Fiber Optic Devices
2
3
4
5
WDM and Optical
Networks
Total
No. of
periods
Weightage of
marks
Short Answer
Questions
Essay
Questions
10
16
2
1
12
21
2
1½
13
26
2
2
15
31
2
2½
10
16
2
1
60
110
10
8
OBJECTIVES
On completion of the Explain of the subject a student should be able to comprehend the
following:
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
Over View of Fibre Optic Communication
State the advantages of Light wave communication system over EM wave systems.
List different optical spectral bands.
List three generations of optical fibres
Explain the structure of optical fibre
Classify optical fibres based on refractive index profile
I -226
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.13
1.14
1.15
1.16
List the types of fibres based on core diameter
Define Single mode fibre (SMF)
Define multimode fibre (MMF)
List the advantages of SMFs over MMfs.
Define Snell’s law in optics
Explain Total internal reflection in optical fibre.
Define acceptance angle
Define cone of acceptance.
Define numerical aperture (NA)
Derive the expression for NA in terms of core and cladding refractive indices.
List the advantages of optical fibres over other communication media
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
2.15
2.16
Fibre manufacturing and cabling
List four types of fibre drawing processes.
Explain Outside Vapour Phase Oxidation (OVPO)method
Explain Vapour phase Axial Deposition (VAD) method
Explain Modified Chemical Vapour Deposition (MCVD) method
Explain Plasma activated Chemical Vapour Deposition (PCVD) method.
List different structural elements used for cable design.
List two types of fibre optic cables.
Describe the characteristics of loose buffered cable
Describe the characteristics of tight buffered cable
List various losses in optical fibres.
Explain intrinsic and extrinsic losses
Classify different types of dispersions occur in optical fibres.
Explain Group velocity dispersion
Distinguish between inter modal and intra modal dispersion.
Define wave guide dispersion
Briefly explain Polarization mode dispersion
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
3.15
3.16
Fibre Optic components and measuring instruments
List various fibre optic components
State the need for connectors in FOC
State the function of splice in optical fibres
List two types of connectors.
List two types of splices.
Distinguish between mechanical splice and fusion splice
Predict different losses occur due to improper splicing
State the need for optical coupler/splitter
List different optical couplers
Explain the working of an optical coupler
State the need for isolator in OFC
Explain the working of isolator.
List different types of measuring/testing instruments used in the field of OFC.
Describe the use of optical power meters
State the use of optical attenuators
Explain the working of Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR).
I -227
4.0
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.13
4.14
4.15
4.16
4.17
4.18
Fibre Optic Devices
List two types of sources used in OFC
Define salient features of an optical source
List two types of detectors used in OFC
Define salient feature of an optical detector
Explain the construction and working of an LED
State the principle of LASER.
Explain the construction and working of LASER source.
List the differences between LED and LASER sources
Explain the construction and working of PIN photo diode.
Explain the construction and working of APD (Reach through APD)
State the need for repeater/regenerator in FOC
List three types of repeaters
Differentiate R, 2R and 3R repeaters.
Distinguish between repeaters and optical amplifiers.
Draw the block diagram of Erbium Doped Fibre Amplifier (EDFA).
Explain the principle and operation of EDFA
Draw the block diagram of fibre optic communication system and explain each block.
List the other applications of LED and LASER
5.0
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
5.13
5.14
Wavelength Division Multiplexing & Optical Networks
Define optical time domain multiplexing
Limitations of time division multiplexing (OTDM) in FOC
Define wavelength division multiplexing.
Explain the need for WDM in fibre optic communication
List two types of WDM systems
Distinguish between wideband WDM and narrowband WDM (DWDM)
Draw the block diagram of WDM system
Draw and explain the block diagram of DWDM
List three types of network topologies
Briefly explain bus, ring and star topologies used in fibre optic networks.
State the use of fibre optic cables in local area networks.
Describe use of fibres in Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet.
Explain the use of fibre optic cables as submarine cables.
Explain the use of fibres in local telephone and cable T.V (FTTH)
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Over View of Fibre Optic communication
Motivation-optical spectral bands-generations of optical fibers-structure of fiber-classification of
fibers-Single mode fibers-multimode fibers-total internal reflection-acceptance angle-cone of
acceptance-numerical aperture-advantages of fibers
I -228
2. Fiber manufacturing and cabling
Types of fiber drawing processes-outside vapor phase oxidation method-vapor phase axial
deposition (VAD)-modified chemical vapor deposition (MCVD)-Plasma activated Chemical
Vapor Deposition (PCVD)-cable design-types of fiber optic cables-losses in optical fibers-types
of dispersions.
3. Fiber Optic components and measuring instruments
Connectors-splices-optical couples/splitters-isolator-optical power meters-optical attenuatorsoptical time domain reflectometer (OTDR)
4. Fiber Optic Devices
LED-LASER-PIN diode-APD-repeaters-optical amplifiers-Erbium Doped Fiber Amplifier
(EDFA)-.block diagram of fiber optic communication system
5. Wavelength Division Multiplexing & Optical Networks
OTDM- wavelength division multiplexing-types of WDM-block diagram of DWDM-network
topologies-applications-Ethernet-gigabit Ethernet-FTTH
Reference Books
1.
Optical Fiber Communications by Gerd Keiser McGraw Hill
2.
Optical fiber and Laser- Principles and applications by Anuradha De, New Age
publications
3.
Optical fiber communications-Principles and practice, John M. Senior, Pearson
Publications
4.
Optical Fiber Communications and Its Applications – S.C.Gupta, 2004, PHI.
I -229
MICRO CONTROLLER APPLICATIONS
SUBJECT TITLE
:
MICRO CONTROLLER APPLICATIONS
SUBJECT CODE
:
EC- 505
PERIODS/WEEK
:
04
PERIODS/SEMESTER
:
60
Rationale: Microcontroller applications is introduced to further develop the concepts learnt
in IV semester by giving theoretical inputs at application level. This course will make the
students feel confident in the present Electronic industry.
TIME SCHEDULE
Sl
Major Topics
No. of
Periods
Weightage of
marks
1
Hardware Interface
10
16
2
Interfacing External
Memory
15
26
2
2
3
Interfacing 8255 PPI
15
26
2
2
4
Interfacing with RTC
10
26
2
2
5
Control Applications
10
16
2
1
60
110
10
8
Total
I -230
Short
Essay
Answer
Questions
Questions
2
1
OBJECTIVES
On completion of the Explain of the subject a student should be able to comprehend the
following:
6.0
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10
6.11
HARDWARE INTERFACING
Explain hardware interfacing of ADC chip.
Explain Interfacing temperature sensors to 8051
Explain the process of data acquisition using ADC chips
Explain the choice of selecting ADC chip
Explain the function of 8047/809/848/ ADC chips
Describe the function of chips MAC 1112 ADC chip
Explain Interfacing serial ADC chip to 8051
Program serial and parallel chips in 8051 in ‘ C’ and assembly
Describe the basic operation of DAC chip with 8051.
Explain the function of precision IC temperature sensors
Describe the signal conditioning and its role in data acquisition
7.0
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
INTERFACING EXTERNAL MEMORY
Explain semiconductor memories with respect to memory capacity and organisation
Explain the features of EPROM
List any 6 popular UV EPROM chips and explain the pin configuration of any one
List other memory types flash memory, mask RAM, RAM, SRAM, NVRAM, DRAM,
checksum byte ROM, DRAM
Explain memory address decoding 740LS138 3 X 8 decoder
Explain interfacing with external ROM
Explain data memory space of 8051 and accessing
Explain interfacing of large external memory (256KB)
8.0
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
INTERFACING 8255 PPI chip
Describe expansion of I/O ports using 8255
List 3 ports of 8255 and describe their features
Explain the use of control register in selecting a mode
Define modes of 8255
Define the term memory mapped I/O and describe its application
Program 8255 as simple i/o port for connection with LCD and ADC
Interface 8051 with external devices such as stepper motor using 8255
Program 8β55 in simple I/O mode using ‘C’ language
9.0
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
Interfacing with RTC
Interfacing DS12887 RTC with 8051
Explain how RTC chip works
Explain the function of DS12887 pins
Explain the function of registers
Understand the interfacing of DS12887 RTC to 8051
I -231
9.6
9.7
9.8
9.9
Writ e a program in C to access RTC registers
Write a program to display time and date in assembly and C
Understand interrupt and alarm features DS12887
Explore and program the alarm and interrupt features of RTC DS12887
10.0 CONTROL APPLICATIONS AND 8051 FAMILIES (FLASH VERSIONS)
10.1 Explain the need of relays and opto couplers for interfacing
10.2 Interface 8051 with relay to drive a lamp
10.3 Interface a solid state relay to drive a mains operated motor
10.4 Interface a stepper motor
10.5 Write a program to run stepper motor continuously
10.6 Describe the controlling of stepper motor using opto isolator and write a program in C
10.7 Explain pulse width modulation for controlling the speed of small DC motor.
10.8 Draw the interfacing circuit for Control of a small DC motor using Darlington and MOSFET
10.9 Write a program in C for PWM speed Control of a small DC motor.
10.10 Explain applications like traffic control, temperature controller
COURSE CONTENT
HARDWARE INTERFACING
hardware interfacing -temperature sensors-process of data acquisition-selecting ADC chip8047/809/848/ ADC chips -MAC 1112 ADC chip-‘ C’ and assembly -DAC chip with 8051.-IC
temperature sensors-Signal conditioning
INTERFACING EXTERNAL MEMORY
semiconductor memories -memory capacity and organization – EPROM - UV EPROM chips flash memory, mask RAM, RAM, SRAM, NVRAM, DRAM, checksum byte ROM, DRAM memory address decoding-interfacing external ROM-memory space of 8051 and accessinginterfacing of large external memory (256KB)
INTERFACING 8255 PPI chip
Expansion of I/O ports using 8255 -Ports of 8255-features-control register-modes of 8255memory mapped I/O-connection with LCD and ADC-Interface 8051 with external devicesstepper motor
Interfacing with RTC
Interfacing DS12887 RTC with 8051-RTC chip working-function of DS12887 pins-program in C
to access RTC registers-display time and date in assembly and C-interrupt and alarm features
DS12887I -232
8051 Applications
Interfacing Relays and opto couplers - Driving a lamp with relay –Interfacing a solid state relay
–Interfacing a stepper motor- running motor continuously -controlling of stepper motor using
opto isolator in C-PWM control of speed-interfacing DC motor-traffic control- pump & lift
controller-Temperature controller
REFERENCE BOOKS:
7. 8051 Micro controller by Mazidi and Mazidi.
8. 8051 Micro controller by Kenneth J.Ayala.
9. Programming customizing the 8051 Microcontroller by Myke Predko TMH
10. Microcontrollers (theory and applications) by Ajay V Deshmukh
I -233
DATA COMMUNICATIONS AND COMPUTER NETWORKS
Subject Title
:
Data Communications Computer Networks
Subject Code
:
EC-506
Periods/Week
Periods/Semester
04
:
60
Rationale: The Knowledge of Data communications and communication and computer
networks is essential for Electronics & Communication engineering students as
everything from Banking to Railway ticket booking being completely computerized there
are ample opportunities for the students to get good jobs .
TIME SCHEDULE
Sl
1
2
3
4
5
Major Topics
No. of
periods
Basics of Data
communication and
OSI Layer
10
Concepts of LAN &
DLL Protocols
16
IP addressing &
Network Layer
Protocols
WAN Protocols
Marks
Short
Answer
Questions
Essay
Questions
21
2
1½
26
2
2
21
2
1½
21
2
1½
21
2
1½
110
10
8
12
10
Web Applications &
Network Security
12
Total
60
OBJECTIVES
On completion of the Explain of the subject a student should be able to comprehend the
following:
I -234
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
Basics of Data communication & OSI Layer
Define data communication
State the need for data communication networking.
Distinguish between analog and digital data.
Define computer network and state its use.
Draw the ISO: OSI 7 layer architecture and explain the function of each layer.
List the different types of physical transmission media.
Explain the use of UTP, STP, Coaxial and Fiber optic cable in networking.
Define simplex, half-duplex and full-duplex communication.
Define bandwidth and throughput of a physical medium.
List the three types of switching techniques used in networking.
Explain circuit switching, packet switching and message switching.
Define virtual circuit and datagram approaches in packet switching
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
Understand the concepts of LAN and DLL protocols
Define Local area network and state its use.
Explain different network topologies (Bus, Star, Ring)
Compare the performances of the three topologies.
Explain the working of token ring network.
Explain the use of different networking devices such as repeater/hub, switch, bridge in
constructing networks
Differentiate between repeater, switch and bridges.
State the need for protocols in computer networks.
State the need for framing in data link layer.
Explain the Ethernet frame format (IEEE 802.3).
State the need for flow control and error control protocols.
Explain the point-to-point protocol (PPP).
Explain CSMA/CD and CSMA/CA.
Explain the topology of wireless LAN and explain its frame format (IEEE 802.11).
Discuss FDDI and its properties.
Explain the Bluetooth technology.
Write the applications of WAP.
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
2.15
2.16
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
Understand IP addressing and Network layer protocols
Define the terms Internet and Intranet.
Define internet protocol.
Distinguish between connection oriented (virtual circuit) and connectionless (datagram)
services.
3.4 Classify the two types of Internet Protocol addressing IPv4 and IPv6 and state the need
for IPv6.
3.5 Explain classful addressing and classless addressing in IPv4.
3.6 Describe Internet protocol version-6 (IPv6) addressing.
3.7 Explain the use of routers in networking
3.8 Explain the concept of routers and routing.
3.9 Define cut through & store-and-forward and adaptive switch mechanisms.
3.10 Write the packet transfer mechanism using routers and IP address.
3.11 Explain the internal architecture of ISP.
I -235
3.12 Know about Dial up access, leased line, DSL, ISDN types of internet connectivity for an
individual user/ organization.
4.0
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.13
WAN protocols
Know about WAN architecture.
List the three commonly used WAN technologies.
Describe the working of X.25 WAN Protocol
Describe the FRAME relay WAN Protocol.
Explain ATM WAN Protocol.
Describe the ARPANET and WWW.
Explain different layers of TCP/IP.
Explain the features of TCP.
Explain Address Resolution Protocol (ARP).
Write the functions of port and sockets.
Describe the features of UDP
Explain the connectivity of systems using TCP & UDP
Describe the use of Gateways.
5.0
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
5.13
5.14
5.15
5.16
5.17
Understand Web Applications & Network security.
Write the role of DNS server.
Explain DNS namespace.
Explain how email is transferred.
Discuss POP server and SMTP server.
Explain file transfer operation using FTP
Explain the working of Web server.
Explain the working of Web browser.
List HTTP commands.
Explain the purpose of proxy server.
Explain the use of hyperlinks.
Describe the web browser architecture.
Explain remote login.
State the need for network security.
List various security services.
Define message confidentiality and message integrity
Define message authentication and entity authentication.
Explain key management, digital signature and firewalls in securing the networks
COURSE CONTENTS
1.0 Basics of Data communication & OSI Layer
Introduction-concepts of data communication- analog and digital data-computer network-OSI 7
Layered architecture-UTP- STP- Coaxial and Fiber optic cable - simplex, half-duplex and fullduplex communication-bandwidth and throughput-circuit switching-packet switching-message
switching
I -236
2.0 Understand the concepts of LAN and DLL protocols
Local area network-network topologies (Bus, Star, Ring)-Token ring network-Hub/Repeatersbridges-routers-need for protocols-Ethernet frame format (IEEE 802.3)- flow control-error
control-simplest protocol - stop-and-wait protocol-stop-and-wait ARQ-Go-back-N ARQ
protocols-PPP-CSMA/CD-CSMA/CA-wireless LAN frame format (IEEE 802.11)-FDDI-BluetoothWAP.
3.0 Understand IP addressing and Network layer protocols
Internet and Intranet- Internet protocol-connection oriented (virtual circuit) and connectionless
(datagram) services-IPv4 addressing-classful and classless addressing-IPv6 addressing-router
and routing-cut through & store-and-forward protocols-packet transfer mechanism using routers
and IP address-architecture of ISP-PSTN Internet connectivity: Dial up access-leased line-DSLISDN
4.0 WAN protocols
WAN architecture-X.25, FRAME relay and ATM WAN Protocols- ARPA NET and WWWTCP/IP-Address Resolution Protocol- port and sockets-UDP- gateways
5.0 Understand Web Applications & Network security.
DNS server- email transfer-POP server-SMTP server-FTP- Web server-Web browser- HTTP
commands-proxy server- hyperlinks-web browser architecture-remote login-network securitysecurity services.
Reference Books:
1.
Network communication Technology by Ata Elahi Thomson
2.
Data Communication and Networking by Godbole
3.
Data and Computer Communications: William Stallings 7th edition. PHI
4.
Data Communication and Networking: Behrouz Forouzan 3rd edition.TMH
I -237
TMH
COMPUTER HARDWARE & NETWORKING PRACTICE
Subject Title
:
Computer Hardware & Networking Lab Practice
Subject Code
Periods/Week
Periods/Semester
:
:
:
EC-507
04
45
.
Rationale: With the computer becoming a household item , the need for Computer hardware
knowledge need not be stressed. Computer hardware industry is another major area where
excellent job opportunities are available. Experiments in Optical fibre communication are also
included to give additional practical inputs.
TIME SCHEDULE
S. No.
PRACTICE
No. of Periods
1.
COMPUTER SYSTEM(DESKTOP,LAPTOP)
2.
COMPUTER PERIPHERALS
3.
NETWORKING
4
FIBRE OPTICS
Total
I -238
45
List of Experiments
1.0 PC Hardware- Identification of System Layout.
1. To Identify Basic Computer Hardware and Cables
2. To Identify and note down mother board , Components and Chips
3. To Identify various Internal and External slots in the mother board and clean them with
blower/ Brush.
4. To Practice Inserting and Removing RAM with care
5. To measure the Output voltages of SMPS
6. To disassemble the PC
7. To assemble the PC and test
8. To change CMOS Setup
9. To Install Operating system Windows and Linux
10. To Verify the function of control panel settings.
11. To Partition and format Hard disks.
12. To Install system and application software
a) To install & Run antivirus software
13. To Carry out Preventive maintenance of a PC
14. To take Backup of C drive
15. To identify Laptop Hardware
16. To carry out PC Troubleshooting
2.0 Printers , Scanners, Cameras
17. To connect , operate and maintain i) Inkjet Printer ii) Laser Printer iii)Scanner iv) Web
Cam
3. Computer Networking
18. To identify and note down the specifications of various networking devices & Cables,
Jacks , Connectors, tools etc used in local area networks
a) To Prepare the UTP cable for cross and direct connections using crimping tool.
19. To Transfer files between systems in LAN using FTP Configuration,
a) To install i Print server in a LAN and share the printer in a network
20. To Test the Network using ipconfig, ping / tracert and Netstat utilities and debug the
network issues (3)
21. To Install and configure Network Devices: HUB ii) Switch iii) Routers
I -239
22. To Configure Host IP, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway in a system in LAN (TCP/IP
Configuration).
a) To Configure DNS to establish interconnection between systems
23. To Transfer files between systems in LAN using FTP Configuration,
a) To install Print server in a LAN and share the printer in a network
24. To Install and Configure Wireless NIC and transfer files between systems in LAN and
Wireless LAN
25. To access a remote desktop using Team viewer software
a) To store the files in Cloud using Google drive/One drive/Drop box & share
26. To Explore the features of Windows 2000 server
4.0 Fiber Optics
27. To Set up fiber optic analogue link.
a)To Set up a fiber optic digital link
28. To verify modulation & Demodulation of light source by pulse width modulation
technique.
29. To Test Fiber optic Voice Link.
30. To Verify the NRZ & RZ modulation formats in Optical Communication.
Competencies and Key Competencies to be achieved
Exp
No
1
Name of the Experiment
Competencies
Key Competencies
To Identify Basic Computer Identify
 Configure bios setup
program
and
Hardware and Cables
 Key board , Mouse,
troubleshoot
the
Webcam
typical
problems
 Front panel indicators
using BIOS utility.
switches
 Front side & rear side
connectors. Ports
Mark
positions
of
SMPS, Motherboard,
FDD, HDD, CD, DVD
and add on cards.
 Power cable, VGA
cable, Audio cable
I -240
2
To Identify and note down Mother Board
Note the layout of
I5/I3/Pentium IV or
mother board , Components Note
the layout of
Pentium Dual core
I5/I3/Pentium IV or
and Chips
or Pentium Core2
Pentium Dual core or
DUO mother board
Pentium Core2 DUO
and mark Processor,
mother board and

Identify Chip set ICs.
mark Processor,
RAM,
Cache, Xtal,
Identify Chip set ICs.
CMOS
Battery
RAM, Cache, Xtal,
Identify CPU cooling
CMOS Battery
fan, I/O slots and I/O
Identify CPU cooling
ports and various
fan, I/O slots and I/O
jumper settings.
ports and various

ATX
Power
jumper settings.
connector
 ATX
Power
 CPU
(Central
connector
Processing
Unit)
 CPU
(Central
socket
Processing
Unit)
socket
3
To Identify various Internal and
External slots in the mother
board and clean them with
blower/ Brush.
Internal : Identify
 PCI Express 16x
slots PCI Express 1x
Slot
 DIMM (Double Inline
Memory
Module)
slots
 Serial ATA Connector
south Bridge
 IDE connector
 PCI
(Peripheral
Component
Interconnect) slot
 BIOS (Basic Input
Output System) Chip
 PCI Express 16x
slots PCI Express
1x Slot
 DIMM
(Double
Inline
Memory
Module) slots
 Serial
ATA
Connector
south
Bridge
 IDE connector
 PCI
(Peripheral
Component
Interconnect) slot
 BIOS (Basic Input
Output
System)
Chip
External :Identify
External : Identify
 Bus)
PortsPS/2
Connectors - USB
(Universal Serial Parallel Port -Game
Port
 Sound
card
Connectors
 Display
VGA
Connector
I -241
 Bus)
PortsPS/2
Connectors - USB
(Universal Serial Parallel Port
Game Port
 Sound
card
Connectors
 Display
VGA
Connector
 COM
 COM
(communications)
Port
4
To Practice Inserting
Removing RAM with care
and
 Identify the RAM type
SRAM ,DDR ,DDR2
DDR3 by observing
the notch
 Place DIMM with
correct orientation
 Insert with correct
force till it is locked
 Test
by
slightly
pulling
 Remove DIMM by
opening latches on
either side
(communications)
Port
 Identify the RAM
type SRAM ,DDR
,DDR2 DDR3 by
observing
the
notch
 Place DIMM with
correct orientation
 Insert with correct
force till it is locked
 Test by slightly
pulling
Remove DIMM by
opening
latches
on
either side
5
To
measure
the
voltages of SMPS
6
To disassemble the PC
 Remove the SMPS
 Identify the ground 

Short the enable pin
to ground
Measure the output
voltages with DMM
 Remove
 Power cable ,USB,
Firewire,
Mouse,
Keyboard
Internet,
Ethernet
,Modem
cables
 Remove
 the
rear
cabinet
screws ,side panel
 Remove
Mother
board power cable &
Other cables
 Remove
SMPS,
CD/DVD drive, HDD
 Remove
mother
Board
Output


7
To assemble the PC and test


 Identify the ground
Short the enable
pin to ground
 Measure
the
output voltages with
DMM
 Remove
Power
cable,
USB,
Firewire,
Mouse,
Keyboard Internet,
Ethernet ,Modem
cables
 Remove
 the rear cabinet
screws ,side panel
 Remove
Mother
board power cable
& Other cables
 Remove
SMPS,
CD/DVD
drive,
HDD
 Remove
mother
Board
Install PSU DVD
 Install PSU DVD
Mother
Board  Mother
Board
Processor heat sink
Processor heat sink
&Fan memory –
&Fan memory
Connect HDD
 HDD
Clear
CMOS
by  Clear CMOS by
I -242
removing jumper
removing jumper
 Connect
power  Connect
power
connector,
CPU
connector,
CPU
power connector and
power
connector
other connector
and
other
 Connect case fan to
connector
mother board
 Connect case fan
 Connect sata cables
to mother board
 Test connections
 Connect
sata
 Fix side panels
cables
 Test connections
Fix side panels
8
9
10
11
 Identify manufacturer
 Open cmos setup
 Change the boot
sequence
 Enable
disable
devices/Ports
 set
pass
word
change Date/Time
 Explore other
features
 Identify
manufacturer
 Open cmos setup
 Change
boot
sequence
 Enable
disable
devices/Ports
 set pass word
change Date/Time
 Explore other
features
To Install Operating system  Install OS using CD
 Set
up
Disk
Windows and Linux
partitioning
 Install drivers
To Verify the function of control  To verify and Explore
control panel features
panel settings.
 System & Security
Network& Internet
 Hardware & Sound
 Programs
 User Accounts
 Appearance
 Clock
 Access
device
manager and check
the status
 Add
or
remove
hardware devices
 Install OS using CD
 Set
up
Disk
partitioning
 Install drivers
 To
verify
and
Explore
control
panel features
 System & Security
Network& Internet
 Hardware & Sound
 Programs
 User Accounts
 Appearance
 Clock
 Access
device
manager and check
the status
 Add or remove
hardware devices
To change CMOS Setup
To Partition and format Hard  Identify HDD
IDE/SATA
I -243
Type  Identify HDD Type
IDE/SATA
 Follow
respective
procedures
 Select NTFS/FAT32
 Backup file
 Use
Windows/
Startup CD
 Use Disk manger
 Follow respective
procedures
 Select
NTFS/FAT32
 Backup file
 Use
Windows/
Startup CD
 Use Disk manger
and  Access control panel
 Install/Uninstall
the
program
antivirus
antivirus  Install
through auto run
option
 Explore the antivirus
settings
 Access
control
panel
 Install/Uninstall the
program
 Install
antivirus
through auto run
option
 Explore
the
antivirus settings
disks.
12
To
Install
system
application software
a) To install & Run
software
13
14
15
16
To Carry out Preventive  Clean C
 Clean C

Scan
with
antivirus
 Scan with antivirus
maintenance of a PC
 Run Registry clean  Run Registry clean
utility
utility
 Run Defragmentation  Run
Defragmentation
To take Backup of C drive
 Take Backup of C  Take Backup of C
Drive using Backup
drive
using
utility
Backup utility
To identify Laptop Hardware
To carry out PC Troubleshooting

Identify the Parts of
a Laptop - CPU,
Display- HDD, DVD
drive - USB Ports
HDMI-VGAEthernet-SDCard
 Identify the fault type
 Hardware/ software
 Run antivirus and
other utilities
 Run in safe mode
 Rectify the problem
Hardware faults




Faulty cables
Dust accumulation
Monitor problems
Memory problems
I -244
 Identify the Parts
of a Laptop CPU,
DisplayHDD, DVD drive USB Ports HDMIVGA-Ethernet-SD
Card
 Identify the fault
type
Hardware/
software
 Run antivirus and
other utilities
 Run in safe mode
 Rectify
the
problem
Hardware faults
 Faulty cables
 Dust accumulation
 SMPS problems
 HDD/CD/ problems
 Troubleshoot
&Rectify
17
To connect , Operate and 
maintain

i) Inkjet Printer


ii) Laser Printer

iii)Scanner
Connect
and
operate Printers
Remove paper jams
Load ink Cartridge
Connect to network
Use scanner
Use webcam

Identify & note down
the configurations of
Network devices
Identify & Select
Network cable
Select crimping tool
Select the cable
Decide
the
connection type
Identify the wires as
per colour code
Arrange the wires
Cut & Crimp
Test the connection
using
Ping
command
To identify and note down the
specifications of various 
networking devices & Cables,
Jacks , Connectors, tools etc 
used in local area networks


a) To Prepare the UTP cable for
cross and direct connections 
using crimping tool.


19
Monitor problems
Memory problems
SMPS problems
HDD/CD/
problems
 Troubleshoot
&Rectify






iv) Webcam
18





To Transfer files between
systems in LAN using FTP
Configuration,
a) To install i Print server in a 
LAN and share the printer in a
network
Transfer
files
between systems in
LAN using FTP
Configuration,
install Print server in
a LAN and share the
printer in a network
I -245

Connect
and
operate Printers
Remove
paper
jams Load ink
Cartridge
Connect to
Network
Use scanner
Use webcam
Identify & note
down
the
configurations of
Network devices
 Identify & Select
Network cable
 Select
crimping
tool
 Select the cable
 Decide
the
connection type
 Identify the wires
as per colour code
 Arrange the wires
 Cut & Crimp
 Test
the
connection
 Transfer
files
between systems
in LAN using FTP
Configuration,
 install Print server
in a LAN and
share the printer in
a network
20

To Test the Network using
(3)
ipconfig, ping / tracert and 
Netstat utilities and debug the 
network issues
21


To Connect systems in a 
(3) network using switch.


a) Install and configure
Network Devices:

Use the Utilities like
ipconfig, ping /
tracert

Identify the issue

Resolve the problem
Use the Utilities
like ipconfig, ping
/ tracert
Identify the issue
Resolve
the
problem




Select the device
Connect them
Install using Driver
software
Set password &
Configure
Configure Host IP, 
Subnet Mask
Configure
DNS 
server
Configure Host IP,
Subnet Mask
Configure
DNS
server
Open control panel 
Access IIS
Set up FTP
and 
Test

Share the printer

Open
control
panel
Access IIS
Set up FTP and
Test
Share the printer

Install
wireless
NIC
Configure
Set pass word
Select the device
Connect them
Install using Driver
software
Set password &
Configure

i) HUB
ii) Switch
22
iii) Routers
To Configure Host IP, Subnet 
Mask and Default Gateway in a
system
in
LAN
(TCP/IP 
Configuration).
b) To Configure DNS to
establish
interconnection
between systems
23
To Transfer files between (3) 
systems in LAN using FTP 

Configuration,
b) install Print server in a LAN 
and share the printer in a
network
24


To Install and Configure 
(3) Wireless NIC and transfer 
files between systems in LAN
Install wireless NIC
Configure
Set pass word
Test
I -246


Test
and Wireless LAN
25
26
 Install Team viewer
software
To access a remote desktop  Start the session
desktop
using Team viewer software  Access
remotely
 Video chat
b) To store the files in Cloud  Close the session
using
Google
drive/One  Use Google drive
/One drive/Drop box
drive/Drop box & share (3)
& share

To Explore the features of 
Windows 2000 server(3)




27
28
To Set up fibre optic analogue 
link.
Use administrative
tools
Configure server for
Network connectivity
Sharing a folder
Accessing a folder
from my network
places on Desktop
Stopping a shared
folder
Determine local host
address
 Install
Team
viewer software
 Start the session
 Access
desktop
remotely
 Video chat
 Close the session
 Use Google drive
/One
drive/Drop
box & share






Use administrative
tools
Configure server
for
Network
connectivity
Sharing a folder
Accessing a folder
from my network
places on Desktop
Stopping a shared
folder
Determine
local
host address
Make connections
Test and observe

a)To Set up a fibre optic digital 
link (3)
Identify
the 
Demonstration
board, Fiber optic
link & Connectors
Make connections
Test and observe
the signal on CRO
To
verify
modulation
& 
Demodulation of light source by
pulse
width
modulation

Identify
the 
Demonstration
board
Fiber optic link &
Make connections
Test and observe
I -247
the signal on CRO
the signal on CRO
technique. (3)


29
To Test Fibre optic Voice Link. 
(3)



30
To Verify the NRZ & RZ 
modulation formats in Optical
Communication.(3)



Connectors
Make connections
Test and observe
the signal on CRO
Identify
the
Transmitter
&
Receiver
boards,Fiber
optic
link & Connectors,
Microphone
Make connections
Test and listen to the
voice signal
Observe
any
distortion
Identify
the
Demonstration
board Fiber optic link
& Connectors
Make connections
Apply digital signal
Test and observe
the signal on CRO
I -248






Make connections
Test and listen to
the voice signal
Observe
any
distortion
Make connections
Apply digital signal
Test and observe
the signal on CRO
LIFE SKILLS
Subject Title
Subject Code
:
:
Life skills
EC 508 (Common)
Periods per week
:
03
Period per semester
:
45
TIME SCHEDULE
No. of periods
Sl No.
Major Topics
Theory
Practical
Total
1.
Concept of life skills
03
00
03
2.
Enhancing self esteem
01
02
03
3.
Goal setting
01
02
03
4.
Positive attitude
01
02
03
5.
Managing emotions
1 1/2
4 1/2
06
6.
Stress management
1 1/2
4 1/2
06
7.
Time management
1/2
2 1/2
03
8.
Interpersonal skills
01
02
03
9.
Creativity
01
02
03
10.
Problem solving and Decision making
skills
01
02
03
11.
Assertiveness
1 1/2
4 1/2
06
12.
Leadership skills &Team spirit
1 1/2
11/2
03
15 1/2
29 1/2
45
TOTAL
Note: No Written Examination
The students may be asked to Demonstrate 1 or 2 skills from unit 2 to unit 12.
Marks: Internal – 40; External - 60
I -249
OBJECTIVES
Upon the completion of the course the student shall be able to
1.0
Understand the concept of life skills
1.1
Define Life skills
1.2
Explain need and impact of Life skills programme
1.3
List the elements of Life skills
1.4
Identify the sources of Life skills
2.0
Understand the concept of Self esteem
2.1
Define the term self esteem
2.2
Explain the concept of self esteem
2.3
List the characteristics of High self esteem
2.4
List the characteristics of Low self esteem
2.5
Explain the advantages of High self esteem
2.6
Explain the behavior patterns of low self esteem
2.7
Explain the causes of Low self esteem
2.8
List the steps to build a positive self esteem
Practicals
Exp
No
Exercise
1.
Identifying the Behavior
2.
Practice Positive Self
Esteem
Activity (Questionnaire / Game and Role play)
 Identifying the behavior patterns of low selfesteem people.
 Steps to build a positive self esteem
I -250
3.0
Understand the concept of Goal setting
3.1
Define the term Goal
3.2
Explain the significance of Goal setting
3.3
Explain the following concepts
a) Wish b) Dream c) Goal
3.4
Explain the reasons for not setting goals
3.5
Explain the effective goal setting process
3.6
List the barriers to reach goals
Practicals
Exp
No
Exercise
Differentiate among
1
Wish, Dream and Goal
4.0
Activity
 Drawing a picture of Your Self/ Your Country/
Your Society after 10yrs.
 Discussion: Setting Personal Goals
 Story Telling
 Identifying of barriers
 Analysis of barriers
 Overcoming Barriers
Practice positive attitude
4.1
Define Attitude
4.2
Explain the concept of positive attitude
4.3
Explain the concept of negative attitude
4.4
Explain the affects of negative attitude
4.4
Identify the attitude of self and peers
4.5
Explain the effect of peers on self and vice-versa.
4.6
List the steps to enhance positive attitude
4.7
Explain the strategies to enhance positive attitude
I -251
Practicals
Exp
No
5.0
Activity (Psychological Instrument/ Game & Role
play)
Exercise
1.
Identify Positive attitude
2
Observe
3
Practice Strategies to
enhance Positive attitude
 To study & to identify the attitude of self and
peers.
 List & practice the strategies to enhance
positive attitude.
 Positive attitudes of self and Peers
 Negative attitudes of self and Peers
 Celebrating the success
 Listing the successes
Practice managing emotions
5.1
Explain the concept of emotion
5.2
List the different types of emotions
5.3
Differentiate between positive and negative emotions
5.4
Identify the type of emotion
5.5
Explain the causes of different types of emotions.
5.6
Implement the methods to manage major emotions ( anger / depression )
5.7
Define Emotional Intelligence.
5.8
Explain the method to enhance emotional Intelligence.
Practicals
Exp
No
Exercise
Activity (Story / simulated situational act /GD &
Role play)
I -252
6.0
1.
Identify the Type of Emotion
2
Managing Emotions
 To identify the type and to study the cause of
the emotion.
 Managing major emotions -Anger and
Depression
Practice stress management skills
6.1
Define Stress
6.2
Explain the concept of stress
6.3
List the Types of stress
6.4
Explain the causes of stress
6.5
Comprehend the reactions of stress
a) Physical
6.6
b) Cognitive
c) Emotional d) Behavioral
Explain the steps involved in coping with the stress by
a) Relaxation b) Meditation c) Yoga
6.7
Practice the stress relaxing techniques by the 3 methods.
a) Relaxation b) Meditation c) Yoga
6.8
Comprehend the changing personality and cognitive patterns.
6.9
Observe the changing personality and cognitive patterns.
Practicals
Exp
No
7.0
Exercise
1
Identify the type of stress
2
Stress –Relaxation
Techniques
Activity(Questionnaire /Interview and practice)
 To study & to identify the type and causes of
stress.
 Practice some simple Stress –Relaxation
Techniques, Meditation, Yoga.
Practice Time management skills
7.1
Define Time management.
I -253
7.2
Comprehend the significance of Time management.
7.3
Explain the strategies to set priorities.
7.4
List the steps to overcome barriers to effective Time management.
7.5
Identify the various Time stealers.
7.6
Explain the Time-Management skills.
7.7
List different Time-Management skills.
7.8
Comprehend the advantages of Time-Management skills.
Practicals
8.0
Exp Exercise
No
Activity ( Group work and Games)
1
Identify Time stealers
 Assign a activity to different Groups –Observe
the time of accomplishing the task, Identify the
time stealers.
2.
Practice Time-Management
skills
 Perform the given tasks- Games
Practice Interpersonal skills
8.1
Explain the significance of Interpersonal skills.
8.2
List the factors that prevent building and maintaining positive relationships.
8.3
Advantages of positive relationships.
8.4
Disadvantages of negative relationships
Practicals
Exp
No
1
Exercise
Identify Relationships
Activity
 Positive Relationships, Negative Relationships
– Factors that affect them- Through a story
I -254
2.
9.0
Practice Rapport building
 Exercises on Rapport building
 Developing Correct Body Language
Understand Creativity skills
9.1
Define Creativity
9.2
List the synonyms like Invention , Innovatioin, Novelty
9.3
Distinguish between Creativity , Invention, innovation, and novelty
9.4
Discuss the factors that lead to creative thinking like observation and imitation ,
improvement etc.
9.5
Distinguish between Convergent thinking and divergent Thinking
9.6
Explain various steps involved in Scientific approach to creative thinking namely
a) Idea generation b) Curiosity c) Imagination d)Elaboration e) Complexity
f). Abstract ion and simplification g). Divergent Thinking h) Fluency i). Flexibilty
j).Persistance k).Intrinsic Motivation l).Risk taking m).Projection/empathy
n).Originality o). Story telling p). Flow.
List the Factors affecting the creativity in Individuals.
9.7
Give the concept of Vertical thinking and lateral thinking.
9.8
Explain the importance of Lateral thinking.
9.9
Compare lateral thinking and Vertical thinking
Practicals
Exp
No
Exercise
Activity (Games and Group work)
1
Observe any given object
 Identifying finer details in an object
2.
Imagine




Imagining a scene
Modifying a story (introduce a twist)
Improving a product
Finding different uses for a product
I -255
10.0
3
Skills
 Making paper craft
4
Product development
 Brain storming session
5
Developing originality
 Come up with original solutions for a given
problem
Understand Problem solving and decision making skills
10.1
Define a Problem
10.2
Analyze the performance problems
10.3
Categorize the problems
10.4
List the barriers to the solutions to problems.
Practicals
Exp
No
11.0
Exercise
1
Gather the facts and Data
and Organizing the
information.
2.
Problem solving
Activity (Brainstorming – checklist technique free
association, attribute listing)





Information gathering and organizing
Identifying the solutions to the problem
Identifying the barriers to the solutions
Zeroing on Optimum solution
Games on Problem solving
Understand Assertive and non Assertive behavior
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5
11.6
11.7
11.8
List the 3 types of Behaviors 1. Assertive 2. Non assertive (passive) 3.
Aggressive Behaviour 4.Submissive behaiviors
Discuss the personality of a person having above behaviours
Explain the usefulness of assertive behavior in practical situations.
Explain the role of effective communication in reflecting assertive attitude
Give examples of Assertive statements a) Assertive request b) assertive NO
Explain the importance of goal setting
Explain the method of Conflict resolution.
Discuss the methods of controlling fear and coping up with criticism.
Practicals
I -256
Exp
No
Exercise
1
Observation of behavior
2.
Practicing assertiveness
3
Skills
4
Simulation
Activity ( Simulated situational act)

Identifying different personality traits from the
body language
 Write statements
 Reaction of individuals in a tricky situation
 Facing a Mock interview
 Detailing the characteristics of peers
 setting goals – Games like throwing a coin in
a circle
 Giving a feedback on a )Successful program
b) Failed project
 Self disclosure
 Dealing with a critic
 Saying NO
 Dealing with an aggressive person
 Role play- skit
1. Assertive statements
2. goal setting
3. self disclosure
12.0
Practice Leadership skills
12.1
Explain the concept of leadership
12.2
List the Traits of effective leader
12.3
Distinguish between Managing and leading
12.4
List the 3 leadership styles
12.5
Compare the above styles of leadership styles
12.6
Discuss choice of leadership style
12.7
Explain the strategies to develop effective leadership.
12.8
Explain the importance of Decision making
I -257
12.9
Explain the procedure for making effective decisions.
Practicals
Competencies for Practical Exercises
Exp
No
Exercise
1
Observation
2.
Identification of a Leader
Activity ( Games and Group work)

Questionnaire





3
Skills
4
Building Team spirit
S.No
Give a task and observe the leader
Discuss the qualities and his /her leadership
style
Ask the other members to identify the
leadership qualities
Reflection on the self
Decision making – followed by discussion
 Motivation – Intrinsic and Extrinsic
Training- Communication- Challenge
Title
Competency
1.
Concept of life skills
 Explain need and impact of Life skills
2.
Enhancing self esteem
 Follow the steps to build a positive self
esteem
3.
Goal setting
4.
Positive attitude

Practice the effective goal setting process

Practice the steps to enhance positive
attitude.
Observe the effects of peers on self and
vice-versa.

I -258
 Practice the steps to manage emotional
intelligence
 Identify different types of emotions
 Exercise control over Emotions
5.
Managing emotions
6.
Stress management

Practice stress management techniques
7.
Time management

Practice Time management techniques
8.
Interpersonal skills

Identify positive and Negative Relations
9.
Creativity

10.
Problem solving and decision
making skills
11.
Assertive and non Assertive
behavior
Lead a small group for accomplishment of
a given task.
Build positive relationships.
Identify the various Problem solving and
decision making skills
Make appropriate Decision
Practice Assertive and non Assertive
behavior
12.
Leadership skills





Exhibit Leadership skills
COURSE CONTENT
1.0
Concept of life skills
Definition of life skills, Need and impact of life skills programme
2.0
Enhancing self esteem
Concept, Characteristics of high and low self esteem people, Advantages of high
selfesteem, Causes of low esteem- Identification of behavior patterns of low self esteem
– Practice session of Questionnaire / Game -Steps to build a positive self esteem –
Practice session of Role play
3.0
Goal setting
I -259
Significance of goal setting,Concepts of Wish, Dream, and Goal Identify Wish, Dream,
and Goal and differentiate among them Reasons for not setting the goals, Barriers to
reach goals,Identify Barriers Effective goal setting process & Practice Effective goal
setting
4.0
Positive attitude
concept ,affects of negative attitude,attitude of self and peers,effect of peers on
self and
vice-versa, steps to enhance positive attitude,strategies to enhance
positive attitude
5.0
Managing emotions
Problem-definition, performance problems ,Categorize the problems,
barriers to the solutions to problems.
6.0
Stress management
Concept of stress, Types of stress, causes of stress, reactions of stress, coping with the
stress, stress relaxing techniques, changing personality and cognitive patterns
7.0
Time management
Definition, significance of various Time stealers, Time management, strategies to
set priorities, steps to overcome barriers, Time-Management skills- its advantages.
8.0
Interpersonal skills
Significance of Interpersonal skills,positive relationships- Advantages, negative
relationships- Disadvantages
9.0
Creativity
Definition, Invention, Innovation, Novelty, creative thinking , observation and
imitation ,
improvement, Expertise ,skill, and motivation, components of Creativity
,Convergent thinking and divergent Thinking, various steps involved in Scientific
approach to creative thinking namely , Factors affecting the creativity in Individuals,
Vertical thinking and lateral thinking.
I -260
10.0
Problem solving and decision making skills
Definition, performance problems –analysis, categorizing,barriers to the solutions to
problems.
11.0
Assertive and non Assertive behavior
Types of Behaviors – their characteristics, need for controlling and avoiding aggressive
behaviors, making and refusing an assertive request – their evaluation, importance of
goal setting, method of giving feedback.
12.0
Leadership skills
Concept , importance, Role of a Leader in an Organization, Traits of effective
Leader, Managing and leading, leadership styles-their Comparison, theories of
leadership, strategies to develop effective leadership, importance of Decision
making, concept of ethical leadership and moral development.
REFERENCES
1.Robert NLussier, Christopher F. Achua Leadership: Theory, Application, & Skill development:
Theory, Application.
I -261
MICROCONTROLLER APPLICATIONS LAB PRACTICE
SUBJECT TITLE
:
MICROCONTROLLER APPLICATIONS LAB PRACTICE
SUBJECT CODE
:
EC-509
PERIODS/WEEK
:
04
PERIODS/SEMESTER :
60
Rationale: Microcontroller Applications Lab Practice is included in the same semester to
ensure contiguity and give an opportunity for the students to reinforce their theoretical
knowledge by practically verifying in the laboratory. care has been taken to match the
Experiments with field requirements.
TIME SCHEDULE
EXPERIMENT
S. No.
No. of Periods
1.
Familiarization with Microcontroller Kit
20
2.
Instruction set
10
3.
Counters ,Timers Interrupts and Flags
20
4
Interfacing
10
Total
60
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
Familiarization with Microcontroller Kit & Simulators
1. To Work with microcontroller kits and Simulators
a) To Familiarize with 8051 Microcontroller Kit
b) To Familiarize with 8051 simulator EDSIM 51 ( or similar)
c) To Write small ALP to verify different register addressing techniques
I -262
II . 8051 Instruction set
2. To Practice Arithmetic instructions of 8051
a) Write an ALP to demonstrate Addition , subtraction , division and multiplication of 8 bit
numbers using immediate data access.
b) Write an ALP to Add and Subtract 16 bit numbers
c) Write an ALP to find the Square and Cube of a decimal number
d) Write an ALP to find LCM of given 3 decimal numbers
e) Write an ALP To find HCF of given 3 decimal numbers
3. To Practice Data transfer instructions
a) Write an ALP to Block move - 10bytes of data from 0X30-0X39 to 0X40-0X49 (without
overlap)
b) Write an ALP to Block move - 10bytes of data from 0X30-0X39 to 0X35-0X39 (with
overlap)
c) Write an ALP to Block exchange – 10bytes of data between 0X30-0X39 to 0X40-0X49
d) Write an ALP to Block move - 10bytes of data from 0X30-0X39 to 0X1000-0X1009
(Internal to external memory or vice versa)
4. To Practice Data Manipulation
a) To find Smallest/Largest number in 10bytes of data from 0X30-0X39 (R3 – should store
the smallest/largest number and R4 – should store address of the smallest/largest number)
b) To Search for an element in the 10 bytes of data from 0X30-0X39 (R3 =1, if element is
found else R3=0)
c) To Sort 10bytes of data from 0X30-0X39 in Ascending order
d) To Sort 10bytes of data from 0X30-0X39 in Descending order
5.To Practice Boolean & Logical instructions :
a) To Find β’s complement of a number using (CPL) instruction
b) To Convert Packed to Unpacked BCD (bit Masking) Using (ANL) Instruction
c) To convert Unpacked BCD to ASCII Using (ORL) instruction.
I -263
d) To Convert ASCII to BCD Using(XRL) instruction.
III. To implement Counters ,Timers Interrupts and Flags
6. To implement a HEX up/down counter - (Program should check value @R0=0X30, if 0X30=0
then up counter else down counter)
a) To implement BCD(00-99) up/down counter - (Program should check value @R0=0X30, if
0X30=0 then up counter else down counter)
7.To Implement Delays and Timers
a) To write a program in assembly language and in “C” produce required time delay a) by
Using instructions only b) by Using Timers
b)To write a program in assembly language and C to verify Call and return instructions with
port programming
c) To write a program in assembly language and C to verify Logical or Delay loop using
Call and return instructions
8. To Use 8051 Interrupts and Flags
To Write a program to generate a square wave of 50 Hz on pin 1.2 . Assume that crystal
frequency is 11.0592 MHz using timer.
IV .To practice Interfacing Techniques
9. Micro controller interfacing
a) Interfacing Switches and LEDS to 8051
i) To make an LED connected to port 1.5, light up for specific time on pressing a
switch connected to port 2.3
ii) To Write a Program to make an LED connected to pin 1.7 to blink at a specific
rate
iii) To Connect a Relay in place of LED to control a AC 230 V Lamp
10. To Interface 3-digit 7SEGMENT LED DISPLAY using timer for digit scan
a) To Interface a Single DOTMATRIX DISPLAY and display the given number
11. To Interface a (3x4 matrix) Key Board to 8051
I -264
12. To control the direction of rotation of a small DC motor
13. To interface I2 C BUS Device using DS1307 IC .
a)To interface a) ADC IC b) DAC IC
b) To interface Microcontroller serial interface to PC COM port
14. To Burn executable code into EPROM
b) To burn executable code into flash memory for 89C51
Competencies and Key Competencies to be achieved.
Exp
No
Name of the Experiment
Competencies
Key Competencies
(No of Periods)
1
To Work with microcontroller kits  Identify the
Enter the ALP at the
component
specified address and
and Simulators (3)
assemblies in the kit
execute

Enter
the
ALP
at
the

Use the simulator for
a) To Familiarize with 8051
specified
address
and
the
same ALP and
Microcontroller Kit
execute
verify the register
contents and the
b) To Familiarize with 8051  Use the simulator for
the
same
ALP
and
Flags
simulator EDSIM 51 ( or similar)
verify the register
contents and the
c) To Write small ALP to
Flags
verify different register
addressing techniques
2
To Practice Arithmetic
instructions of 8051 (3)
 Enter the ALP at the  Enter the ALP at the
specified address and
specified address and
execute
execute
 Use Arithmetic
 Use Arithmetic
a) Write an ALP to
Instructions
Instructions
demonstrate Addition ,

Use
the
simulator
for

Use the simulator for
subtraction , division and
the same ALP and
the same ALP and
multiplication of 8 bit numbers
verify the register
verify the register
using immediate data access.
contents
contents
b) Write an ALP to Add and
I -265
Subtract 16 bit numbers
c) Write an ALP to find the
Square and Cube of a decimal
number
d) Write an ALP to find LCM of
given 3 decimal numbers
e) Write an ALP To find HCF
of given 3 decimal numbers
3
To Practice Arithmetic
instructions of 8051 (3)
a) Write an ALP to
demonstrate Addition ,
subtraction , division and
multiplication of 8 bit
numbers using immediate
data access.
 Enter the ALP at the
Enter the ALP at the
specified address and
specified address and
execute
execute
 Use Arithmetic
Use Arithmetic
Instructions
Instructions
 Use the simulator for Use the simulator for
the same ALP and
the same ALP and
verify the register
verify the register
contents
contents
b) Write an ALP to Add and
Subtract 16 bit numbers
c) Write an ALP to find the
Square and Cube of a
decimal number
d) Write an ALP to find LCM
of given 3 decimal numbers
e) Write an ALP To find HCF
of given 3 decimal numbers
3
To Write an ALP to Block
 Enter the ALP at the  Enter the ALP at the
specified address and
specified address and
move - 10bytes of data from
execute
execute
0X30-0X39 to 0X40-0X49
 Use DATA Transfer  Use Arithmetic
(without overlap) (3)
Instructions
Instructions

Use
the
simulator
for

Use the simulator for
a) Write an ALP to Block
the same ALP and
the same ALP and
move - 10bytes of data from
verify the Memory
verify the register
0X30-0X39 to 0X35-0X39
contents
contents
(with overlap)
I -266
b) Write an ALP to Block
exchange – 10bytes of data
between 0X30-0X39 to
0X40-0X49
c) Write an ALP to Block
move - 10bytes of data from
0X30-0X39 to 0X10000X1009 (Internal to external
memory or vice versa)
4
 Enter the ALP at the  Enter the ALP at the
specified address and
specified address and
execute
execute
 Use Arithmetic
a) To find Smallest/Largest  Use Logical
Instructions
Instructions
number in 10bytes of data

Use
the
simulator
for

Use the simulator for
from 0X30-0X39 (R3 –
the same ALP and
the same ALP and
should store the
verify the result
verify the register
smallest/largest number and
contents
R4 – should store address of
the smallest/largest number)
To Practice Data Manipulation
(3)
b) To Search for an element
in the 10 bytes of data from
0X30-0X39 (R3 =1, if
element is found else R3=0)
c) To Sort 10bytes of data
from 0X30-0X39 in
Ascending order
d) To Sort 10bytes of data
from 0X30-0X39 in
Descending order
4
To Find β’s complement of a  Enter the ALP at the  Enter the ALP at the
specified address and
specified address and
number using (CPL)
execute
execute
instruction (3)
 Use Boolean
 Use Arithmetic
Instructions
Instructions
a) To Convert Packed to

Use
the
simulator
for

Use the simulator for
Unpacked BCD (bit
the
same
ALP
and
the
same ALP and
Masking) Using (ANL)
verify the result
verify the register
I -267
Instruction
contents
b) To convert Unpacked
BCD to ASCII Using
(ORL) instruction.
c) To Convert ASCII to
BCD Using(XRL)
instruction.
5
To implement a HEX
 Enter the ALP at the  Enter the ALP at the
up/down counter - (Program
specified address and
specified address and
should check value
execute
execute
@R0=0X30, if 0X30=0 then  Use timer/Counter
 Use timer/Counter
up counter else down
counter)
(3)
b) To implement BCD(00-99)
up/down counter - (Program
should check value
@R0=0X30, if 0X30=0 then
up counter else down
counter)
6
To implement a HEX up/down
 Enter the ALP at the  Enter the ALP at the
specified address and
specified address and
counter - (Program should check
execute
execute
value @R0=0X30, if 0X30=0
 Use timer/Counter
 Use timer/Counter
then up counter else down
counter)
(3)
a) To implement BCD(00-99)
up/down counter - (Program
should check value
@R0=0X30, if 0X30=0 then
up counter else down
counter)
7
To Implement Delays using
Timers
(3)
 Enter the “C” program  Enter the “C” program
in the simulator
in the simulator
 Debug and execute
 Debug and execute
 Use CALL and RET  Use CALL and RET
Instructions
Instructions
a) To write a program in
assembly language and in
“C” produce required time
delay a) by Using
 Verify STACK
instructions only b) by Using
I -268
 Verify STACK
Timers
b)To write a program in
assembly language and C to
verify Call and return
instructions with port
programming
Contents in the
Simulator
Contents in the
Simulator
c) To write a program in
assembly language and C to
verify Logical or Delay loop
using Call and return
instructions
8
To Use 8051 Interrupts and
Flags
(3)
To Write a program to
generate a square wave of
50 Hz on pin 1.2 . Assume
that crystal frequency is
11.0592 MHz using timer.
 Enter the ALP at the
specified address
 CALCULATE the
 Enter the ALP at the
specified address
 CALCULATE the
 Timer Data to be
loaded for 50 Hz
 Timer Data to be
loaded for 50 Hz
 Execute the Program  Execute the Program
9
Micro controller interfacing
a) Interfacing Switches and
LEDS to 8051 (3)
 Enter the ALP at the
specified address
 Enter the ALP at the
specified address
 Rig up the circuit
 Rig up the circuit
i) To make an LED
connected to port 1.5, light
 Execute the Program  Execute the Program
up for specific time on
pressing a switch
connected to port 2.3
ii) To Write a Program to
make an LED connected to
pin 1.7 to blink at a
specific rate
ii) To Connect a Relay in
place of LED to control a
AC 230 V Lamp
I -269
10
To Interface 3-digit
7SEGMENT LED DISPLAY
using timer for digit scan (3)
 Rig Up the circuit
 Rig Up the circuit
 Enter The C Program  Enter The C Program
in the simulator
in the simulator
a) To Interface a Single
DOTMATRIX DISPLAY and
display the given number
 Debug and Execute
 Debug and Execute
11. To Interface a (3x4
matrix) Key Board to 8051
12. To control the direction
of rotation of a small DC
motor
11
To Interface a (3x4 matrix)
Key Board to 8051 (3)
 Rig Up the circuit
 Rig Up the circuit
 Enter The C Program  Enter The C Program
in the simulator
in the simulator
 Debug and Execute
To control the direction of
 Rig Up the circuit
rotation of a small DC motor  Enter The C Program
in the simulator
(3)
 Debug and Execute
12
 Debug and Execute
 Rig Up the circuit
 Enter The C Program
in the simulator
 Debug and Execute
.
13
To interface I2 C BUS
Device using DS1307 IC .
(3)
 Rig Up the circuit
 Rig Up the circuit
 Enter The C Program  Enter The C Program
in the simulator
in the simulator
 Debug and Execute  Debug and Execute
a) To interface i) ADC IC
ii) DAC IC
b) To interface
Microcontroller serial
interface to PC COM port
14
 Compile the C
 Compile the C
Program
Program
 Use the Programmer  Use the Programmer
SW to Load the .HEX
SW to Load the .HEX
b) To burn executable code into
file into the
file into the
flash memory for 89C51
Programmer Memory
Programmer Memory
 To burn the code into  To burn the code into
EPROM/FLASH
EPROM/FLASH
Memory of Controller
Memory of Controller
To Burn executable code into
EPROM (3)
I -270
 To SECURE the
CODE by
programming the
LOCK feature
I -271
 To SECURE the
CODE by
programming the
LOCK feature
FIELD PRACTICES
Subject Title
Subject code
:
:
FIELD PRACTICES
EC-510
Periods/Week
:
07
Periods/Semester
:
105
Rationale: Field practices subject is introduced as a substitute for industrial Training.
This course is aimed at imparting same skills a student would acquire in the industry
during the initial training period. in other words industry like environment is simulated in
the institution during this course to prepare the students for Industry.
TIME SCHEDULE
EXPERIMENT
S. No.
No. of Periods
1.
Standard practices in the Industry
6
2.
Manufacturing
32
3.
Maintenance & Servicing
32
4
Organising
10
5
Documentation &Data processing
10
Total
90
I -272
General List Of Industry Practices ( Other Industry practices may be added)
I. Standard practices in the Industry
1. To Practice Industrial Safety, First Aid, dress code, tie, shoe etc…)
i) To Keep workplace clean and tidy.
ii) To maintain the Laboratories
iii) To follow Industry Mannerisms and Etiquette ( Greeting , Smiling ,
Shaking hands - Polite conversation, Requesting etc) –To practice the
use first aid and fire extinguishers
II .Manufacturing
2. a) To carry out following activities
i) prepare wires ii) Practice wire bunching iii)
component set ready for population on PCB
Make wire tips/joints iv) Keep the
b) To Set up layout for work space for fabrication .
c) To Supervise Manufacturing/ Testing activities.
3. To Practice soldering of SMD components
4. To Design /Prepare drawing for an electronic circuit/ equipment i) Manually ii)
Using software tools
5. To fabricate /Rig up Prototype circuit
i) To prepare circuit boards for the experiments mentioned in the curriculum
and test.
6. To prepare required test jigs or circuits for the above and test
7. To Trouble shoot the faults in the equipment using CRO, DMM, Logic Analyzer
etc.
8. To carry out Reverse Engineering(Decode the circuit from a circuit board and
interpret/identify the circuit
9. To follow the standard procedures/Instructions given in the Equipment manual
to operate and set up the equipment
10. To work with sophisticated tools/equipment used in electronic industry as per
standard procedure
I -273
11. To use software tools like Pspice , Multisim , Matlab etc and design the circuits
12. To Carry out Quality assurance Tests
III. Maintenance & Servicing
13. To maintain a) Electrical wiring/equipment in the laboratory b) Institute Earthing
c) UPS Batteries
14. To maintain/Troubleshoot computers and Computer Networks in the institute
15. To Install and Test equipment like i) UPS ii) inverters, iii) Servo stabilizers
IV. Organising
16. To prepare i) Inventory, ii) follow industry procedures, iii) Maintain log iv)
housekeeping v) Documentation
17. To carry out market survey to find the resources , Equipment suppliers etc.
18. To organize seminars , Events and presentations.
i) To Set up Computer-LCD projector / PA system , etc
V.Documentation &Data processing
19. To practice Data processing on computer
i) To browse the internet and search for the most relevant information on latest trends in
communication engineering (or any other engineering topic) and prepare a report
/presentation
20. To prepare Project reports/Manuals for the kits prepared
Competencies and Key Competencies to be achieved
Exp
No
Name of the Experiment
Competencies
1
To Practice Industrial Safety,  Clean the equipment
 Follow
Industry
Industry
mannerisms
First Aid, dress code, tie, shoe  Follow
mannerisms
 Maintain Laboratories
etc…)
 Use first aid &act  Use first aid &act
under emergencies
under emergencies
i) To Keep workplace clean
 Maintain Laboratories
and tidy.
ii) To maintain the Laboratories
iii) To
follow
Industry
I -274
Key Competencies
2
Mannerisms and Etiquette
( Greeting , Smiling , Shaking
hands - Polite conversation,
Requesting etc) –
iv) To practice the use first aid
and fire extinguishers
To carryout following activities To prepare
i) prepare wires ii) Practice
bunching iii)
Make
tips/joints
iv)
Keep
component set ready
population on PCB
wire
wire
the
for





Wire tips
Bunching
Select components
Set up experiment
Supervise
To prepare





Wire tips
Bunching
Select components
Set up experiment
Supervise
b)To
Prepare
layout
for
workspace to carry fabrication
c)To
Supervise
activities
3
4
5
6
7
fabrication
To Practice soldering of SMD  Handle SMD
components
components
 Solder SMD
components with
proper precautions
 Testing the soldered
joints
To Design /Prepare drawing  Prepare drawings
/Circuits and layouts
for
an
electronic
circuit/
both manually and by
equipment i) Manually ii) Using
using computer
software tools
 Handle SMD
components
 Solder SMD
components with
proper precautions
Testing the soldered
joints
 Prepare drawings
/Circuits and layouts
both manually and by
using computer
To fabricate /Rig up Prototype  To prepare prototypes
 Carry out necessary
circuit
modifications
 Testing
 Troubleshooting
 Search resources
To prepare required test jigs or  Prepare/Design
suitable test jigs
circuits for the above and test
 Test the circuits
To Trouble shoot the faults in  Identify the fault
the
equipment using CRO  Troubleshoot
 Replace/Substitute
 To prepare prototypes
 Carry out necessary
modifications
 Testing
 Troubleshooting
 Search resources
 Prepare/Design
suitable test jigs
 Test the circuits
 Identify the fault
 Troubleshoot
 Replace/Substitute
I -275
DMM, Logic Analyzer etc.
8
9
10
11
12
13
13
 Rectify the problem
 Rectify the problem
To
carry
out
Reverse  Reading the circuit
Diagrams
Engineering(Decode the circuit

Identifying the circuit in
from a circuit board and
the PCB
interpret/identify the circuit
 Decoding the circuit
 Preparing a drawing
 Verifying the drawing
 Implement the circuit
 Testing the circuit
 Modifying
 Prepare prototype
To
follow
the
standard  Read the Instructions
and Follow
procedures/Instructions given

operate the equipment
in the Equipment manual to
as per procedure
operate
and set up the
 Verify the results
equipment
 Reading the circuit
Diagrams
 Identifying the circuit in
the PCB
 Decoding the circuit
 Preparing a drawing
 Verifying the drawing
 Implement the circuit
 Testing the circuit
 Modifying
 Prepare prototype
 Read the Instructions
and Follow
 operate the equipment
as per procedure
 Verify the results
To work with sophisticated  work with sophisticated
tools/equipment used
tools/equipment
used
in
in electronic industry
electronic industry as per
as per standard
standard procedure
procedure
 Follow due precautions
To use software tools like  use software tools like
Pspice , Multisim ,
Pspice , Multisim , Matlab etc
Matlab etc for
and design the circuits
designing the circuits
 Implement the circuit
 Modify using software
tools
To Carry out Quality assurance  Use test equipment
 Follow pre testing
Tests
&Post testing
procedures
 Troubleshoot
 Design
To maintain a) Electrical  Replace fuseswiring/equipment
in
the  Repair Power cords
laboratory b) Institute Earthing  Replace faulty Sockets
and Plugs
c) UPS Batteries
 Replace faulty Tube
lights/Lamps
 Maintain earthing
 Maintain UPS Batteries
To
maintain/Troubleshoot  Act as Computer
administrator in the
computers
and
Computer
computer lab
 work with sophisticated
tools/equipment used
in electronic industry
as per standard
procedure Follow due
precautions
 use software tools like
Pspice , Multisim ,
Matlab etc for
designing the circuits
 Implement the circuit
 Modify using software
tools
 Use test equipment
 Follow pre testing
&Post testing
procedures
 Troubleshoot
 Design
 Replace fuses Repair Power cords
 Replace faulty Sockets
and Plugs
 Replace faulty Tube
lights/Lamps
 Maintain earthing
 Maintain UPS Batteries
 Act as Computer
administrator in the
computer lab
I -276
Networks in the institute
14
15
16
17
19




Maintain LAN
Install/Run Antivirus
Remove unwanted files
Rectify any computer
problems
To Install and Test equipment  Install Laboratory
Equipment as per
like i) UPS ii) inverters, iii)
procedure
Servo stabilizers
 Install UPS
 Make special wiring for
UPS/Inverter
 Install Servo Stabilizer
To prepare i)
Inventory ii)  Prepare Bill of
materials
follow industry procedures, iii)

Material requirement
Maintain log iv) housekeeping
 Place indent
 Maintain log
 Reporting
 House keeping
To carry out market research to  Identify the
product/component
find the resources
 Search for similar /
same items
 Compare features
 Check thePrice/cost
effectiveness
 Test the product for
suitability
 Find the Suppliers
To organize seminars Events  Organize
Events/Seminars
and presentations.
 Exhibit Leadership
qualities
i) To Set up Computer-LCD
projector / PA system , etc  Show Creativity
 Time management
skills
 Set up laptop LCD
projector etc for the
event
To practice Data processing on  Use computer
 Browse internet
computer
&search
i) To browse the internet and  Download information
search for the most relevant  Convert formats
information on latest trends in  Prepare reports
 Prepare Presentation
communication engineering (or
 Save them into cloud
any other engineering topic)
storage
I -277




Maintain LAN
Install/Run Antivirus
Remove unwanted files
Rectify any computer
problems

 Install Laboratory
Equipment as per
procedure
 Install UPS
 Make special wiring for
UPS/Inverter
 Install Servo Stabilizer
 Prepare Bill of
materials
 Material requirement
 Place indent
 Maintain log
 Reporting
 House keeping
 Identify the
product/component
 Search for similar /
same items
 Compare features
 Check the cost
effectiveness
 Test the product for
suitability
 Find the Suppliers
 Organize
Events/Seminars
 Exhibit Leadership
qualities
 Show Creativity
 Use Time management
skills
 Set up laptop LCD
projector etc for the
event
 Use computer for
 Checking
mails/assignments/
notices etc
 Upload /Download
information
 Search the web for
required information
 Prepare laboratory
and
prepare
/presentation
20
a
report
Documentation
To
prepare
Project  Use MS Word
reports/Manuals for the kits  Browse and search the
internet
prepared
 Download information
 Convert formats
I -278
 Use MS Word
 Browse and search the
internet
 Download information
 Convert formats
DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATIONS
VI Semester
Instruction
Scheme of Examination
Subject
Code
period / week
Name of the Subject
Theory
Practical/
Tutorial
Total
Period
/ Sem
Duration
(hours)
Sessional
Marks
End
Exam
Marks
Marks
Total
THEORY:
EC- 601
Industrial
Management
4
-
60
3
20
80
100
EC-602
Industrial Electronics
4
-
60
3
20
80
100
EC - 603
Electronic Circuit
Design &Quality
Assurance
4
-
60
3
20
80
100
EC - 604
Mobile
Communications
4
-
60
3
20
80
100
4
-
60
3
20
80
100
4
-
60
3
20
80
100
EC - 605
EC - 606
Advanced
Microcontrollers &
DSP
Digital Circuit
Design through
Verilog HDL
PRACTICAL:
EC- 607
Industrial Electronics
Lab
-
6
90
3
40
60
100
EC -608
Verilog HDL
Programming Lab
-
3
45
3
40
60
100
EC -609
Advanced
Microcontroller Lab
-
3
45
3
40
60
100
-
6
90
3
40
60
100
24
18
630
280
720
1000
EC -610
Project work
TOTAL
I -279
INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT
Subject Title
Subject Code
Periods/Week
Periods/semester
:
:
:
:
INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT
EC-601
04
60
TIME SCHEDULE
Sl.
No.
Major Topics
Periods
Weightage
of
marks
Short
questions
1.
Overview Of Business
4
6
2
2.
Management Process
6
13
1
1
3.
Organizational
Management
6
13
1
1
4.
Human Resource
Management
12
23
1
2
5.
Financial Management
10
16
2
1
6.
Materials Management
8
13
1
1
7.
Project Management
14
26
2
2
Total
60
110
10
8
OBJECTIVES
Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to
1.0 Explain the basics of Business
1.1
Define Business
1.2
State the Types of Business ( Service, Manufacturing, Trade)
1.3
Explain the business procedures in Engineering sector ( Process industry,
Textile industry, Chemical industry, Agro industry,)
1.4
1.5
1.6
Essay
questi
ons
State the need for Globalization.
List the Advantages & Disadvantages of globalization w.r.t. India.
Explain the importance of Intellectual Property Rights (I.P.R.)
I -280
2.0
Explain the Management Process:
2.1
Define Management.
2.2
Explain the concept of management
2.3
Explain the Different Levels of management
2.4
Explain Administration & management
2.5
State the principles of Scientific management by F.W.Taylor
2.6
State the principles of Management by Henry Fayol (14 principles)
2.7
List the Functions of Management
i) Planning
ii) Organizing
iii) Directing
iv) Controlling
2.8
Explain the four Functions of Management.
3.0
Appreciate the need for Organizational Management
3.1
Define Organization
3.2
List the Types of organization :a) Line b) Line & staff c) Functional d) Project
3.3
Explain the four types of organization.
3.4
Define departmentatization.
3.5
Explain the following types of departmentalizations
i) Centralized & Decentralized
ii) Authority & Responsibility
iii) Span of Control
3.6
Explain the Forms of ownership
i)Proprietorship
ii) Partnership
iii) Joint stock
I -281
iv) Co-operative Society
v)Govt. Sector
4.0
Appreciate the need for Human Resource Management
4.1
Define Personal Management.
4.2
Explain the functions of Personal Management
4.3
Define Staffing .
4.4
State the importance of HR Planning.
4.5
Explain the various Recruitment Procedures.
4.6
Explain the need for Training & Development .
4.7
State the various types of training procedures( Induction, Skill Enhancement etc)
4.8
State the different types of Leaderships,
4.9
Explain the Maslow’s Theory of Motivation
4.10
Explain the Causes of accident and the Safety precautions to be followed.
4.11
Explain the importance of various Acts – Factory Act, ESI Act, Workmen Compensation
Act, Industrial Dispute Act etc.
5.0
Explain the basics of Financial Management
5.1
State the Objectives of Financial Management.
5.2
State the Functions of Financial Management.
5.3.
State the necessity of Capital Generation & Management.
5.4
List the types of Capitals.
5.5
List the Sources of raising Capital.
5.6
Explain the Types of Budgets
i) Production Budget (including Variance Report )
ii) Labour Budget.
I -282
5.7
Describe Profit & Loss Account ( only concepts) .
5.8
Describe the proforma of Balance Sheet.
5.9
Explain i) Excise Tax ii) Service Tax iii) Income Tax iv) VAT v) Custom Duty.
6.0
Explain the importance of Materials Management
6.1.
Define Inventory Management (No Numerical).
6.2
State the objectives of Inventory Management.
6.3
Explain ABC Analysis.
6.4
State Economic Order Quantity.
6.5
Describe the Graphical Representation of Economic Order Quantity.
6.6
State the objectives of Purchasing.
6.7
State the functions of Purchase Department.
6.8
Explain the steps involved in Purchasing.
6.9
State the Modern Techniques of Material Management.
6.10
Describe the JIT / SAP / ERP packages.
7.0
Explain the importance of Project Management
7.1
State the meaning of Project Management.
7.2
Describe the CPM & PERT Techniques of Project Management.
7.3
Identify the critical path and find the project duration.
7.4
Explain the concept of Break Even Analysis
7.5
Define Quality.
7.6
State the concept of Quality.
7.7
Describe the various Quality Management systems.
7.8
Explain the importance of Quality policy, Quality control, Quality Circle.
7.9
State the principles of Quality Assurance.
I -283
7.10
State the concepts of TQM , Kaizen 5’s and 6 sigma.
7.11
State the constituents of ISO 9000 series standards.
Course content :
1.0
Overview of Business:
Business - types of business in various sectors- service, manufacturing & tradeIndustrial sectors – Engineering, process, Textile, Chemical, Agro industries –
Globalization and effect of globalization – advantages and Disadvantages- Intellectual
Property Rights (I.P.R.)
2.0
Management process
Concept of management – levels of management – Scientific management – by FW
Taylor – Principles of management- functions of management – Administration –
management.
3.0
Organization management
Organization – types of organization( line, line & staff, staff & project) – Departmentation
– Classification (centralized, decentralized, Authority, Responsibility, and span of control
– Forms of Ownership – Proprietorship – Partnership – Joint stock – Co-operative
society and Government sectors.
4.0
Human resource Management
Personal Management – Staffing – Introduction to HR planning – Recruitment
procedures – Types of Trainings –Personal training – skill development training –
Leaderships – types – Motivation – Maslows theory – Causes of accidents – safety
precautions – Factory Act – Workmen compensation Act – Industrial disputes Act- ESI
Act.
5.0
Finance Management
Introduction – Objectives of Financial Management – Types of capitals – sources of
raising capital – Types of budgets – production budgets – labour budgets – Concept of
Profit loss Account – Concept of balance sheet – proforma – types of taxes – brief
concepts of – Excise Tax, Service Tax, Income Tax, VAT and custom duty.
6.0
Material Management
Inventory Management – objectives of Inventory Management – ABC Analysis –
Economic order Quality – Purchasing – Objectives of purchasing – Functions –
Procedures – Material Management - JIT / SAP / ERP.
7.0
Project Management
Introduction – CPM & PERT – concept of Break event Analysis – quality system Definition of Quality , concept of Quality , Quality policy, Quality control, Quality Circle,
I -284
Quality Assurance, Introduction to TQM- Kaizen 5’s and 6 sigma concepts, ISO 9000
series standards.
REFERENCES
1. Dr. O.P. Khanna - Industrial Engg &Management-Dhanpath Rai & sons New Delhi
2. Dr. S.C. Saxena & W.H. Newman& E.Kirby Warren-Business Administration
&Management -Sahitya Bhavan Agra
3. Andrew R. McGill -The process of Management-Prentice- Hall
4. Rustom S. Davar -Industrial Management-Khanna Publication
I -285
INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS
Subject Title
Subject Code
Periods/Week
Periods/Semester
:
:
:
:
Industrial Electronics
EC-602
04
60
Rationale: Industrial Electronics subject is included in the VI semester to make the
students understand the applications of Electronic principles they have learnt in the
previous semesters. This course will no doubt, make the students feel confident to face
the interviews and work in the field when they join the industries.
TIME SCHEDULE
Sl
1
2
3
4
5
Major Topics
Power Electronic
Devices
Transducers &
Ultrasonics
Industrial heating
& Welding
PLC &
Programming
Control Engg
Total
No. of
periods
Weightage of
marks
Short Answer
Questions
Essay
Questions
16
26
2
2
14
26
2
10
21
2
12
21
2
1½
8
60
16
110
2
10
1
8
2
1½
OBJECTIVES
On completion of the study of the subject a student should be able to comprehend
the following:
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
Understand the construction and working of Power Electronic Devices
List different thyristor family devices.
Sketch the ISI circuit symbols for each device.
Explain constructional details of SCR.
Draw & Explain the Volt-Ampere characteristics of SCR.
Mention the ratings of SCR.
Explain the construction of GTO SCR
Compare the characteristics of GTO SCR and SCR.
Give constructional details of Diac & Triac.
Draw & Explain Volt-ampere characteristics of Diac & Triac under forward/Reverse bias.
State the different modes of Triac triggering.
Distinguish between SUS, SBS, SCS & LASCR
Draw & Explain SCR circuit triggered by UJT.
I -286
1.13 Explain power control circuits Diacs, Triacs & SCR’s
1.14 Briefly explain the working of Reverse conducting thyristor (RCT), Asymmetrical SCR
(ASCR), Power BJT, Insulated gate Bipolar transistor (IGBT), MOS-controlled thyristors
(MCT) with characteristics.
1.15 Explain the mechanism in protecting power devices.
1.16 Study of Manufacturer’s data sheet of power electronic devices.
1.17 List the applications of power electronic devices.
1.18 Explain the working of MOSFET based Inverter circuit.
1.19 With a block diagram explain the working of a) Off Line UPS b) Online UPS
1.20 Explain PWM Voltage control of UPS
1.21 Explain the limitations of series Voltage regulated power supplies
1.22 Explain the working of SMPS with block diagram
1.23 Mention any 3 applications of SMPS
1.24 Explain the working of Servo stabilizer
2.0 Understand the working of transducers and Ultrasonics
2.1
Classify transducers on the basis of principle of operation and applications.
2.2
Explain the working principle, construction and applications of strain gauge.
2.3
Explain the working principle, construction and applications of potentio metric
transducer.
2.4
Explain the working principle, construction and applications of capacitive and inductive
transducers.
2.5
Explain the working principle, construction and applications of LVDT.
2.6
Explain the working principle, construction and applications of Piezo electric
transducer.
2.7
Explain the working principle and applications of RTD & Thermocouple transducer.
2.8
Explain the application of transducer in Accelerometer, servomotors, and
Tachogenerators.
2.9
Explain the term Ultrasonic.
2.10 Mention methods of generating ultrasonic waves.
2.11 Draw and explain pulsed-echo ultrasonic flaw detector
2.12 Explain the principle of MEMS devices
2.13 Mention their use in modern smart phones and other devices
3.0 Industrial Heating & welding
3.1
Classify industrial heating methods.
3.2
Explain the principle of induction heating.
3.3
List applications of induction heating.
3.4
Draw the circuit of HF power source for induction heating and explain its working.
3.5
Explain the principle of dielectric heating.
3.6
Explain the electrodes used in dielectric heating & method of coupling to RF generator.
3.7
Mention the applications of dielectric heating.
3.8
Define welding.
3.9
List 4 types of Electrical welding
3.10 Explain the principle of resistive welding.
3.11 Draw the basic circuit of AC resistive welding and explain its working.
3.12 Mention applications of resistive welding.
3.13 Mention the applications of other welding Techniques
I -287
4.0
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.13
4.14
Understand architecture of PLCs & Programming
Explain the need for PLC
Explain the basic principle of PLCs.
Explain the power supply module, CPU, Bus unit, and I/O Module, Interfacing Module
and programmer module.
Explain the PLC scan method.
Give the ladder logic symbols.
Explain the meaning of above symbols
Explain current flow (Forward and Reverse current)
Explain the Ladder diagrams
Explain the use of statement list .
Explain control systems flow charts.
Write simple Ladder program using bit instructions Timer instructions and counter
instructions
List types of PLCs.
List the features of poular PLCs like Siemenis , Allenbradly .
List any 4 applications of PLCS in the industry..
5.0 Control Engineering
5.1
Define system and Control system.
5.2
Classify control systems
5.3
Explain the basic block diagram of control system
5.4
Explain an open loop control system,
5.5
Give examples for open loop control system.
5.6
Give 3 merits and demerits of open loop control.
5.7
Explain the closed loop system with the help of a block diagram.
5.8
Give Examples for closed loop system
5.9
Compare Open loop and closed loop control systems.
5.10 Define Transfer function
5.11 Explain the use of Laplace transforms in control systems
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Power Electronic Devices
Types of power semiconductor devices – SCR, Triac, Power BJT, IGBTConstruction,
Working principle of all devices, symbol. Two transistor analogy for SCR – V-I
characteristics, Forward break over voltage, latching
current, holding current, turn on triggering time, turn off time - triggering of
SCR using UJT – protection of power devices-Applications.
2. Transducers & Ultrasonics
Introduction, classification of transducers, strain gauge, variable
resistance transducer, capacitive, inductive, piezoelectric, LVDT.
Thermocouples,Transducer applications - accelerometers,
I -288
Tachogenerators, Servomotors Ultrasonic- generation –Pulsed echo
ultrasonic flaw detector
3. Industrial Heating and Welding
Induction heating, Dielectric heating, and Resistance welding.
4. PLCs & Programming
Relay logic control panel – PLC based control panel - Architecture of PLC.
Programming software – Bit instructions – Timer/Counter instructions – Compare
instructions – Move instructions – Math instructions – Program control instructions - Memory
organization in PLC – analog inputs.
Control Engineering
basic block diagram - open loop and closed loop system - gain equationsREFERENCE BOOKS
1.
2.
3.
4.
Power Electronics by P.C.Sen.
Industrial Electronics and Control by S.K.Bhattacharya, S.Chatterjee
User manuals of PLCs, SCADA
Control Engg, by Nagarath & Gopal
I -289
ELECTRONIC PRODUCT DESIGN & QUALITY ASSURANCE
Subject Title
:
Electronic Product Design and Quality Assurance
Subject Code
Periods/Week
:
:
EC-603
04
Periods/Semester
:
60
Rationale: This is a new subject introduced in the final year based on the suggestions
from the industry . This subject is aimed to make the students understand the steps
involved in product design and quality assurance. This course helps the students
immediately adapt to the procedures in R&D departments in the industry.
Sl
Major Topics
No of
Periods
Weightage of
marks
Short Answer
Questions
Essay
Questions
1
Product Design and
Development Stages
14
29
3
2
2
PCB design
14
26
2
2
3
Hardware design and
Testing
12
16
2
1
4
Product testing
12
26
2
2
5
Documentation
06
13
1
1
60
110
10
8
Total
OBJECTIVES
On completion of the study a student should be able to comprehend the following:
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
Understand Product design and Development stages
Explain the concept of product development with a block diagram.
Give classification of an Electronic Product.
Explain The Techno Commercial Feasibility of a product.
Explain customer requirements
Explain R&D prototype Assessment of reliability.
I -290
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.13
1.14
1.15
1.16
1.17
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
Explain factors for reliability of equipment.
Explain quality considerations.
List 6 reasons for failure.
Explain Bath tub curve
Explain Concept of Ergonomic and aesthetic considerations of pilot production
Explain Product packaging and storage
Estimate power supply requirements
List two types of Power supply protection devices
Define Noise reduction.
Explain Grounding
Explain Shielding and guarding techniques
Explain Thermal management
Explain PCB design
List 6 important properties of Laminates
General layout considerations for analog and digital circuits
Explain routing for better Decoupling
Mention Recommendations for decoupling and bypassing.
Explain layout considerations for mixed signal circuits
Explain Component mounting considerations.
study of packages for discrete devices and ICs calculation of parasitic elements in PCB
List two types of High speed EMI reduction methods in PCB designing
Define Cross talk
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
Understand Hardware design and Testing
Use of logic analyzer ,
Explain the use of Digital storage oscilloscope in testing .
Explain Mixed signal oscilloscope for hardware testing ,
List two types of signal integrity issues
State the uses and limitations of different types of analysis
Explain DC operating point analysis
Explain Ac analysis, Transient analysis
Explain the use of Software tools for simulation and testing.
4.0
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
Explain Product testing
Explain the importance of product testing
Environmental testing
Explain Dry heat testing
Explain Vibration testing
Explain random testing.
Explain Bump testing
Explain Temperature extreme testing for linear and step strss profiles
Explain Vibration & temperature cycling
Explain EMI EMC compliance testing standardization
Explain UL and CE Certification of industrial electronic products.
5.0
5.1
Understand Documentation
Explain the importance of documentation
I -291
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
List types of documentation.
Explain types of documents
List rules for preparing effective document
Explain PCB documentation
Explain Assembly and fabrication related documentation Laminate grade
Explain preparing a manual document
Explain the details of service manual
Explain test report/manuals
Explain product documentation Bill of materials Production test specifications
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Introduction to Product design and Development stages :Introduction, Explain The Techno
Commercial Feasibility of specifications, Explain R&D prototype Assessment of reliability,
Concept of Ergonomic and aesthetic considerations of pilot production, Estimating power supply
requirements, Power supply protection devices, Noise reduction,. Grounding, Shielding and
guarding techniques, Thermal management,
2. PCB design: General layout considerations for analog and digital circuits Poer and ground
Traces, routing for better Decoupling, Recommendations for decoupling and bypassing, layout
considerations for mixed signal circuits, Component mounting considerations,study of packages
for discrete devices and ICs calculation of parasitic elements in PCB,High speed EMI reduction
methods in PCB designing, cross talk,
3. Hardware design and Testing:Use of logic analyzer ,Digital storage oscilloscope, Mixed
signal oscilloscope for hardware testing ,signal integrity issues ,use and limitations of different
types of analysis, DC operating point analysis , Ac analysis, Transient analysis,
4. Product testing: Introduction to product testing,Environmental testing: Dry heat, Vibration <
temperature cycling, Bump and Humidity tests as specified in IS standards, EMI EMC
compliance testing standardization, UL and CE Certification of industrial electronic products,
5.Documentation :PCB documentation, Assembly and fabrication related documentation
Laminate grade, drilling details Plating, bare board testing, product documentation User manual
service maintenance manual Bill of materials Production test specifications
REFERENCE:
I -292
1. Electronic Product Design, R.G.Kaduskar, V.B.Baru, Wiley India
2. Printed Circuit Board design and technology-Walter CBosshart TMH-CEDT
3. Handbook of Printed Circuit manufacturing – Raymond H. Clark (Van Nostrand Reinhold
Company, New York)
4. Electronic testing and fault diagnosis –G.C. Loveday (Ah wheeler Publication, India)
I -293
MOBILE COMMUNICATION
Subject Title
:
Mobile Communication
Subject Code
:
EC-604
Periods/Week
:
04
Periods/Semester
:
60
Rationale: The Course Mobile communication is included keeping the ever growing man
power requirements in Telecommunications Industry. This course covers the fundamentals of
mobile communications.
TIME SCHEDULE
Sl
Major Topics
No. of
periods
Weightage of
marks
Short Answer
Questions
Essay
Questions
8
16
2
1
2
Introduction to wireless
communication system
Cellular system design
fundamentals
14
26
2
2
3
Multiple access
techniques
16
26
2
2
14
21
2
2
8
16
2
1
60
110
10
8
1
4
5
Digital Cellular mobile
system
Modern wireless
communication systems
Total
OBJECTIVES
On completion of the study of the subject a student should be able to comprehend the following:
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
Introduction to wireless communication system
List the limitations of conventional mobile phone system.
Evolution of cellular mobile communication system.
Define the terms mobile station and base station
State the functions of Mobile switching centre (MSC)
I -294
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.13
List various channels in mobile communication
Define voice and control channels in mobile communication
Define Roamer
List the features of various mobile radio systems around the world
Define simplex, half duplex and full duplex channels.
Distinguish between frequency division duplex (FDD) and time division duplex (TDD).
Define uplink and downlink channels in mobile communication
Draw the block diagram of a basic cellular system.
Explain the process of call progress in a cellular telephone system
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
2.15
2.16
2.17
2.18
Cellular system design fundamentals
State the need for cellular concept in mobile communication
State the need for hexagonal cell site.
Explain the concept of Frequency reuse.
Explain capacity of a mobile cellular system.
Define the term Cell
Define the term cluster
Explain the capacity of a cellular system
State the relation between capacity and cluster size.
State the probable sizes of cluster with formula.
Define co-channel interference.
State the relation between co-channel interference and system capacity.
Define Hand-off in mobile communication
Explain channel assignment strategies
List two methods of improving channel capacity
Explain Cell splitting and sectoring
Define micro-cell concept
Define umbrella cell
Solve problems on system capacity.
3.0 Multiple access techniques
3.1 State the need for multiple access techniques
3.2 List the three types of multiple access techniques.
3.3 Explain FDMA
3.4 List the features of FDMA
3.5 Explain TDMA
3.6 Draw the TDMA frame structure
3.7 List the features of TDMA
3.8 Explain the concept of spread spectrum technique
3.9 List two types of spread spectrum techniques
3.10 Explain the Direct sequence spread spectrum (DSSS) technique
3.11 Explain the frequency hopped spread spectrum (FHSS) multiple access technique.
3.12 Explain code division multiple access technique.
3.13 List the features and advantages of CDMA
3.14 Compare FDMA, TDMA and CDMA
3.15 State near-far effect in CDMA
3.16 Explain the concept of soft hand off and power control in CDMA
I -295
4.0
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.13
4.14
4.15
Digital Cellular mobile system
List the specifications of analog mobile phone system (Advanced mobile phone system
AMPS).
Explain the radio interface of AMPS.
State the features of Narrow band AMPS (N-AMPS)
List the drawbacks of analog cellular system.
List the features of digital cellular system.
Explain the United States Digital Cellular system (IS-54)
Explain the radio interface specifications of USDC
Explain the Global system for mobile communication (GSM)
Explain the GSM architecture with block diagram.
List various interfaces in GSM architecture
Explain the GSM radio subsystem
Explain the frame structure of the GSM
List the service and security aspects of GSM.
Compare AMPS and GSM
List the advantages of GSM over AMPS
5.0
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
Modern wireless communication systems
List the draw backs of GSM system.
List the features of GPRS
List the features of EDGE
Compare the features of GSM, GPRS and EDGE systems
List specifications of Digital European Cardless Telecommunication (DECT) system.
Draw the architecture of DECT
Explain the architecture of DECT
Basic concept of Wireless local loop (WLL)
List the salient features of 3G system
List the advantages of 3G over earlier versions
List the basic concepts of 4G aspects
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Introduction to wireless communication systems :Evolution of cellular mobile
communication-basic cellular system-various mobile radio systems-important definitionssimplex, half duplex and full duplex channels-FDD- TDD-process of call progress
2. Cellular system design fundamentals: Cellular concept-frequency reuse-capacity of a
cellular system-cochannel interference-hand off-channel assignment-Methods of improving
coverage and capacity- micro cell-umbrella cell- problems.
I -296
3. Multiple access techniques: Introduction-types of multiple access techniques-FDMATDMA-spread spectrum technique-DSSS-FHSS-CDMA-soft hand off- near far effect-power
control
4. Digital Cellular mobile system :Advanced mobile phone system AMPS-Concepts of digital
cellular system-USDC (IS-54)-GSM-GSM architecture-GSM radio subsystem-service and
security aspects-frame structure
5. Modern wireless communication systems: GPRS-EDGE-DECT-WLL-3G mobile phone
system-4G aspects-salient features
REFERENCE BOOKS
1.
Mobile and Personal communication sytems and services by Raj Pandya, PHI
2.
Wireless communications-Principles and practice by Theodore S. Rappaport, PEARSON
3.
Mobile Cellular Telecommunications-Analog and Digital systems by Willium C. Y. Lee,
McGrawHill
4.
Mobile Communications by Jochen Schiller, PEARSON
I -297
Advanced Micro Controllers & DSP
Subject title
:
Advanced Micro Controllers & DSP
Subject code
:
EC-605
Periods per week
:
04
Periods / Semester :
60
Rationale: The course Advanced microcontrollers &DSP is introduced in the VI
semester keeping in view the vast developments in the field of microcontrollers. This helps the
students to get good job opportunities and have them an edge over others .
TIME SCHEDULE
Sl
Major Topics
Periods
Weightage
of Marks
Short
Type
Essay Type
1
PIC MICRO
CONTROLLERS
15
29
3
2
2
MCS-96
MICROCONTROLLERS
15
26
2
2
3
ARM MICRO
CONTROLLERS
12
23
1
2
4
INTRODUCTION TO DSP
PROCESSORS
18
32
4
2
5
Introduction to embedded
systems and RTOS
60
110
10
8
TOTAL
OBJECTIVE:
I -298
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
Introduction to PIC micro controller
Study about PIC micro controller family
Explain PIC16F8XX and PIC16CX/7X families
Explain PIC16F877
Explain Features of PIC16F877
Familiarize Pin diagram of PIC16F877
Explain Block diagram of PIC16F877
Explain Instruction Set of PIC16F877
Explain Memory Organization of PIC16F877
Explain External Interfacing to PIC Microcontrollers
List any 5 Applications of PIC Micro Controller.
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
Explain MCS- XX family
Explain MCS – 96 Microcontrollers
List Important Features of MCS – 96 Microcontrollers
Familiarize Pin Diagram of MCS – 96 Microcontrollers
Explain Internal Architecture of MCS – 96 Microcontrollers
Explain Memory Map of MCS – 96 Microcontrollers
Explain addressing Modes of MCS – 96 Microcontrollers
Explain Instruction set of MCS – 96 Microcontrollers
Explain Interfacing of External Memory to 96 Microcontrollers
Explain Interfacing External Devices(ADC/RTC) to 96 Microcontrollers.
Explain the use 0f 16 Bit microcontrollers in AUTOMOTIVE Engineering (CAN)
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
Introduction to ARM Microcontrollers
Explain the RISC Concept
Compare LIS and RISC Architecture
Explain ARM Core Architecture,
List 5 Important Features of ARM
Compare the Different versions of ARM
Explain Architecture of
Explain Memory Map of ARM
Explain Addressing Modes ARM
3.1 List Instruction set of ARM
3.2 4.2.Explian Arithmetic instructions
a. Explain Conditional Instructions
b.
3.3 4.2.2 Explain Registers of ARM Processors
3.4 Explin the concept of Pipelining in ARM processors
3.9
I -299
3.10 List the 4 application of various versions of ARM
4.0
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.13
4.14
4.15
4.16
4.17
4.18
4.19
Introduction to programmable DSPs
Explain Multiplier and Multiplier Accumulator (MAC)
Define Modified Bus Structures and Explain.
Explain Memory Access schemes in DSPs
Explain multiple access memory, multiport memory
Explain VLSI Architecture of DSPs
Explain Special addressing modes
Define On-Chip Peripherals and list them.
List versions of TMS 320C5X family
Explain Architectural block diagram of TMS 320C5X
Explain Bus Structure of TMS 320C5X
Explain Central Arithmetic Logic Unit with diagram
Explain Auxiliary Registers
Explain Index Register
Explain Auxiliary Register Compare Register
Explain Block Move Address Register
Explain Parallel Logic Unit
Explain Memory mapped registers
Explain program controller with sketches
List important flags in the status registers of TMS 320C5X
5.0
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
5.13
5.14
5.15
Introduction to Embedded System
Explain Embedded System
Compare Embedded System and General Computing System
List five Application areas of Embedded System
Draw general block diagram of an embedded system
Explain Core of the Embedded System
Explain Memory management .
Explain Embedded Firm ware
Explain Communication Interface
Explain Operating System Basics
Explain Tasks, Process and Threads
Define Multi Processing and Multi Tasking
Explain Real Time Operating System
Compare Normal OS and RTOS.
List three Types of. RTOS
Explain basics of VXworks RTOS.
CONTENTS
1. PIC MICRO CONTROLLER : Introduction and Evolution of PIC family, Introduction to
PIC16F8XX and PIC16CX/7X, Features of PIC16F877, Pin and Block diagram of
I -300
PIC16F877, Instruction Set and Memory Organization of PIC16F877 and Applications of
PIC Micro Controller.
2. ADVANCED MICROCONTROLLERS: MCS –XX family, MCS – 96 Microcontrollers:
Important Features, Pin Diagram, Internal Architecture, Memory Map, Addressing
Modes, Instruction set.
3. ARM MICROCONTROLLERS: ARM Microcontrollers: ARM Core Architecture, Versions
of ARM, Memory Map, Addressing Modes, Instruction set and Important Features.
4. INTRODUCTION TO DSP PROCESSORS: Introduction to programmable DSPs:
Multiplier and Multiplier Accumulator (MAC), Modified Bus Structures and Memory
Access schemes in DSPs Multiple access memory, Multiport memory, VLSI
Architecture, Pipelining, Special addressing modes, On-Chip Peripherals. Architecture of
TMS 320C5X- Introduction, Bus Structure, Central Arithmetic Logic Unit, Auxiliary
Registrar, Index Registrar, Auxiliary Register Compare Register, Block Move Address
Register, Parallel Logic Unit, Memory mapped registers, program controller, some flags
in the status registers
5. INTRODUCTION TO EMBEDDED SYSTEM AND RTOS :Introduction, embedded
system vs General computing system, classification and applications, Typical Embedded
System-Core Memory, Communication Interface, Firmware
Real Time Operating System: Operating System basics, Types of OS, Tasks,
Process, Threads, Multiprocessing and Multitasking, Types
REFERENCES:
1. Microcontroller Programming: The Microchip PIC By Julio Sanchez, Maria P.
Canton CRC Press
2. Advanced Microprocessor And Microcontrollers By B.P. Singh, New age
International Publcations
3. Micro Processors and Micro Controllers- M.Senthil Kumar, M.Saravanan and
S.Jeevanathan Oxford University Press, 1st Edn, 2010
4. Microcontrollers-Deshmukh, Tata Mc-Graw Hill Edition, 2004.
5. Microcontrollers Theory and Applications -Deshmukh, Tata Mc-Graw Hill Edition, 2005.
6. DSP Processor Fundamentals, Architectures & Features – Lapsley et al. S. Chand & Co,
2000.
I -301
7. DIGITAL CIRCUIT DESIGN THROUGH VERILOG HDL
Subject title
:
DIGITAL CIRCUIT DESIGN THROUGH VERILOG
HDL
Subject code
:
EC-606
Periods per week
:
04
Periods / Semester :
60
Rationale: The course Digital Circuit Design Through Verilog HDL is introduced in the
VI semester keeping in view the vast developments in the field of VLSI Circuits. to helps the
students get good job opportunities and have them an edge over others .
TIME SCHEDULE
Sl
Major Topics
Periods
Weightage
of Marks
Short
Type
Essay Type
1
Basic Concepts of Verilog
HDL
15
19
3
1
2
Gate Level, Data flow and
Behavioral Modeling
16
29
3
2
3
Modeling of Combinational
Logic Circuits
15
26
2
2
4
Modeling of Sequential
Logic Circuits
10
26
2
2
5
System design concepts
4
10
-
1
60
110
10
8
TOTAL
I -302
OBJECTIVES : On completion of the course the student will be able to
I. Basic Concepts of VLSI Circuits
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
Explain the process MOS Transistor fabrication
List the merits of CMOS technology
Explain CMOS fabrication process
List Layout design rules
Explain layout design rules
Explain stick diagrams Explain VLSI design flow
Explain VLSI design specification and design entry
Explain functional simulation
Explain Planning placement and Routing (PPR)
Explain timing simulation
Explain Fusing/Fabrication into the chip.
Explain the use of of Verilog VHDL in VLSI simulation
2.0 Understand Design flow for designing VLSI IC and concepts of Verilog HDL
2.1.
2.2.
2.3.
2.4.
2.5.
2.6.
2.7.
2.8.
2.9.
2.10.
2.11.
2.12.
2.13.
2.14.
2.15.
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
Explain the steps involved in the design flow for the VLSI IC design
Explain the importance of Hardware Description Languages in VLSI design
Compare VHDL and Verilog HDL
List the features of Verilog HDL
Explain the difference between an instantiation and inference of a component.
Explain differences between modules and module instances in Verilog.
Explain four levels of abstraction to represent the internals of a module
Identify the components of a Verilog module definition
Explain the port connection rules in a module instantiation
Explain the lexical conventions like number specification, Identifiers keywords, etc
Explain different data types like value set, nets, registers, vectors, integer, real and time
register data types, arrays, memories and strings.
Explain defparam and localparam keywords
Explain about system tasks and compiler directives
Define expressions, operators and operands.
Explain all types of operators used in the Verilog HDL
Analyze concepts of Gate level, Data Flow and Behavioral modeling
Identify the logic gate primitives provided in Verilog
Explain the instantiation of gates, gate symbols, and truth tables for and/or and buf/not
type gates.
Explain rise, fall and turn-off delays in the gate level design
I -303
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
2.15
2.16
2.17
2.18
2.19
Explain about the initial and always statements.
Explain the assignment statements in data flow modeling
Explain different types of delays used in the data flow level modeling
Explain blocking and nonblocking procedural assignments with examples
Explain about timing controls like delay based timing control and event based timing
control.
Explain conditional statements.
Explain multiway branching - use case, casex and casez statements.
Explain the difference between conditional if statement and case statements.
Explain looping statements such as while, for, repeat, and forever.
Explain sequential and parallel blocks.
Explain about User Defined Primitives(UDP)
Explain about the hierarchical modeling,
List the advantages of hierarchical modeling
Explain about modeling techniques in Verilog HDL.
Design simple logic circuits like adders, subtractors using Behavioral, Data
Flow and Structural modeling.
Design Verilog Modeling of Combinational and Sequential Circuits
Design combinational circuits like multiplexers, decoders, encoders, Comparators and
ALU
3.2
Design RS, JK, T and D flip flops with Asynchronous and Synchronous Clock and reset
3.3
Explain implementation of shift registers like SISO, SIPO, PISO, PIPO, etc.
3.4
Design synchronous and asynchronous counters
3.5
Design a divide by 3 counter
3.6
Design shift register counters like ring counter, etc.
3.7
Design memories like RAM and ROM.
3.8
Compare RTL level and structural level modelings.
Note: Use three levels of modelings (behavioral, dataflow and gate level) for the above
designs.
3.0
3.1
4.0
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
Apply Functional verification and Testing of Verilog modules.
Define test bench module.
Explain the need of a stimulus module.
Explain the structure of stimulus module.
Apply the stimulus modules for combinational and sequential circuits of Verilog designs.
Explain the concept of Finite State Machines.
Explain the Mealy and Moore types of State Machines.
Solve simple problems on Mealy and Moore state machines.
Explain the Design of Mealy above state machine using Verilog HDL.
5.0
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
Analyze the system design concepts
Explain various design tools which are useful in different stages of design
List 4 important programmable logic devices
Explain the architecture of PLAs
Explain the architecture of PALs
I -304
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
Explain the architecture of CNLD
Explain the architecture of FPGAs,
Compare above devices
List any 3 applications of above devices
Explain the design of UART using FPGA board
Explain the design of Traffic Light controller using FPGA board
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Digital systems design by Morris Mano
2. Verilog HDL: A guide to digital design and synthesis by S. Palnitkar
3. Design through Verilog HDL – T.R. Padmanabhan and B. Bala Tripura Sundari, WSE,
IEEE Press, 2004.
4. Fundamentals of Logic Design with Verilog – Stephen. Brown and Zvonko Vranesic, TMH,
2005.
I -305
INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS LABORATORY PRACTICE
Subject Title
Subject Code
Periods/Week
:
:
:
INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS LABORATRY PRACTICE
EC-607
04
Periods/Semester
:
90
Rationale: Industrial Electronics lab is included in the VI semester to make the students
industry ready by giving them practical inputs and making them experiment with Power
Electronic devices which are in wide usage in Industry. This helps the students to get better
job opportunities and work with confidence.
TIME SCHEDULE
Sl
Major Topics
Periods
Weightage
of Marks
Short
Type
Essay Type
15
19
3
1
Power devices
1
2
UJT Circuits
16
29
3
2
3
Power control Techniques
15
26
2
2
4
Inverter & Servo Stabilzers
10
26
2
2
5
Sensors and Transducers
4
10
-
1
6
PLC
60
110
10
8
TOTAL
I. Power devices
1. To Identify Power Semiconductor devices SCR, TRIAC, DIAC,, SUS SBS, MOSFET,
IGBT, LASCR, UJT, HEATSINKS, OPTO COUPLERS MCT2E, MOC 3011 .
I -306
2. To plot the characteristics of MOSFET and determine gate source threshold voltage
a) To implement a MOSFET switch and control a 6V lamp using NAND gate
3. To plot the characteristics of SCR and determine Triggering current
a) To Verify 3 methods of switching off scr.
b) To design a simple burglar alarm circuit using SCR and test it
c)
II. UJT Circuits
4. To plot the characteristics and determine the intrinsic standoff ratio of UJT
5. To construct UJT Relaxation oscillator circuit and observe the output waveforms on CRO
III. Power control
6. To Trigger the SCR by UJT and control output Power
7.
To plot the characteristics of TRIAC and DIAC
a) To verify that TRIAC can be triggered by positive and negative pulses
b) To Verify 3 methods of switching off TRIAC
8. To implement 100 watt 230V AC Lamp Control circuit using Optocoupler MOC3011 and
4Amps TRIAC.
9. To vary the speed of a 1 phase 230V AC motor using TRIAC-DIAC phase control
a) Observe the waveforms at the gate terminal and load using isolation transformer
on CRO
b) Replace the motor with a 230 volts incandescent lamp and observe the
waveforms on CRO
IV. Inverter , Servo Stabilizers&CVTs
10. To implement a square wave inverter circuit with centre tapped transformer ,power
MOSFETS and Plot regulation characteristics.
11. To Vary the speed of a small DC motor using pulse width modulation
12. To draw the regulation characteristics of servo stabilizer
13. To assemble a servo Stabilizer and test.
14. To plot the Regulation characteristics of Constant Voltage Transformer.
V, Transducers
I -307
15. To draw the performance characteristics of LVDT
16. To plot the performance characteristics of Thermocouple
17. To draw the performance characteristics of RTD
18. To measure the temperature using IC LM 335
19. To implement an ON/OFF temperature controller using IC LM335
20. To draw the characteristics of Load cell
VI. Programmable Logic Controllers
21. To get familiarized with PLC tutor or PSIM
22. Using the PLCs to build basic logic gates
a) To implement basic gates using PLC
b) To implement XOR , XNOR gates using PLC
23. To implement delay timers using PLC
24. To implement on timer and off timer using PLC
25. To implement up counter and down counter
26. To implement start/Stop Motor control
27. To implement Two way switch control
28. To implement sequential motor control (3 Motors) with a delay
29. To implement Motor forward and reverse direction control.
30. To implement a Traffic Light controller
Competencies and Key competencies to be achieved
Exp
no
Name of the experiment
Competencies
Key competencies
1
To Identify Power
Semiconductor devices
SCR, TRIAC, DIAC,, SUS
SBS, MOSFET, IGBT,
LASCR, UJT, HEATSINKS,
OPTO COUPLERS
MCT2E, MOC 3011 .(3)
Identify of SCR, TRIAC ,
DIAC
Identify various SCR
family devices and their
symbols
Identify their symbols
&Terminals
Read the data sheets and
identifythe terminals
Note down the typical
applications from the data
sheet
To plot the characteristics
of MOSFET and determine
Identify MOSFET and its
package
Identify of SCR, TRIAC
, DIAC
Identify various SCR
family devices and
their symbols
Identify their symbols
&Terminals
Read the data sheets
and identifythe
terminals
Note down the typical
applications from the
data sheet

Identify MOSFET and
its package
2
(NO of Periods)
I -308
gate source threshold
voltage
a)To implement a MOSFET
switch and control a 6V
lamp using NAND Gate
.(3)
3
To plot the characteristics
of SCR and determine
Triggering current
a) To Verify 3 methods of
switching off SCR.
b) To design a simple
burglar alarm circuit using
SCR and test it
Interpret specifications
from datasheets
Test the MOSFET using
digital multimeter.
Rig up the circuit
Interface with TTL Gates
Interpret specifications
from datasheets
Test the MOSFET
using digital
multimeter.
Rig up the circuit
Interface with TTL
Gates
Identify the SCR by its
package & Number
Rig up the circuit
Carefully apply Micro
Amperes of current to
Gate
Note the trigger current
Commutate SCR
Use SCR in circuits
Rig up the circuit
Carefully apply Micro
Amperes of current to
Gate
Note the trigger current
Commutate SCR
Use SCR in circuits
.(3)
4
To plot the characteristics
and determine the intrinsic
standoff ratio of UJT .(3)
Identify UJT by its
package & Number
Test the UJT using
digital multimeter.
Rig up the circuit
Determine intrinsic
standoff Ratio
Rig up the circuit
Test the UJT using
digital multimeter.
Determine intrinsic
standoff Ratio
5
To construct UJT
Relaxation oscillator circuit
and observe the output
waveforms on CRO.(3)
Test the UJT using
digital multimeter.
Rig up the circuit
Observe the output at
Emitter .B1 and B2 on
CRO
Use UJT for saw tooth
wave generation
6
To Trigger the SCR by
UJT and control FW
Rectified 30V DC output
Identify UJT by its
package & Number
Test the UJT using
digital multimeter.
Rig up the circuit
Observe the output at
Emitter .B1 and B2 on
CRO
Use UJT for saw tooth
wave generation
 Rig up the circuit
Test he circuit
Observe the UJT Trigger
I -309
Test he circuit
Observe the UJT
Trigger waveform on
Power
.(3)
7
To plot the characteristics
of TRIAC and DIAC
a) To verify that TRIAC
can be triggered by positive
and negative pulses
waveform on CRO
Observe & Measure the
load Voltage on CRO
Observe the effect of
changing RC Values
Identify TRIAC by its
number & its package
Identify the terminals by
observation & with DMM
Apply trigger pulse
Estimate TRIAC rating by
its size
b) To Verify 3 methods of
switching off TRIAC.(3)
CRO
Observe & Measure
the load Voltage on
CRO
Observe the effect of
changing RC Values
Identify TRIAC by its
number & its package
Identify the terminals
by observation & with
DMM
Apply trigger pulse
Estimate TRIAC rating
by its size
8
To implement 100 watt
230V AC Lamp Control
circuit using Optocoupler
MOC3011 and 4Amps
TRIAC. .(3)
Identify CA3011 optocoupler terminals
Test the optocoupler with
DMM
Rig up the circuit
Test the circuit by
applying low (1.5V) at
input
Identify CA3011 optocoupler terminals
Test the optocoupler
with DMM
Rig up the circuit
Test the circuit by
applying low (1.5V) at
input
9
To vary the speed of a 1
phase 230V AC motor
using TRIAC-DIAC phase
control.(3)
Select the TRIAC & DIAC
Identify the terminals
Test them with DMM
Rig up the circuit
Observe the distorted
output wave form on CRO
Measure the output power
with wattmeter
Identify the terminals
Test them with DMM
Rig up the circuit
Observe the distorted
output wave form on
CRO
Measure the output
power with wattmeter
a) Observe the
waveforms at the gate
terminal and load using
isolation transformer on
CRO
b) Replace the motor with
a 230 volts incandescent
lamp and observe the
waveforms on CRO
c) Measure the output
power with watt meter.
I -310
10
To assemble a PWM
inverter circuit with centre
tapped Transformer, Power
MOSFETS and Test . .(3)
Identify the parts
Assemble the parts
Make Electrical
connections
Connect to the battery
Observe polarity
 Test the inverter on Load
Identify the parts
Assemble the parts
Make Electrical
connections
Connect to the battery
Observe polarity
 Test the inverter on
Load
11
To Vary the speed of a
Small DC motor using
pulse width modulation .(3)
Note down the PWM
IC number (LM 3524)
pin configuration
Note down the number
of Power Transistor
Measure the speed
Observe the effect of
PWM on CRO
12
To draw the regulation
characteristics of servo
stabilizer.(3)
Identify the board
Note down the PWM IC
number (LM 3524) pin
configuration
Note down the number of
Power Transistor
Measure the speed
Observe the effect of
PWM on CRO
Assemble the circuit
Connect variable lamp
load
Apply variable input
voltage using Auto
Transformer
Measure output voltage
Note upper & Lower
voltage cut off points
13
To assemble a servo
Stabilizer and Test.(3)
14
To plot the Regulation
characteristics of
Constant Voltage
Transformer. .(3)
Identify the parts
Assemble the parts
Make Electrical
connections
Test the Servo stabilizer
on load
Apply variable Input
voltage
Determine Upper &Lower
cut off Voltages
Observe rate of Voltage
correction
Identify CVT and its
terminals
Make Electrical
connections
Connect variable lamp
load
Apply variable input
I -311
Assemble the parts
Make Electrical
connections
Test the Servo
stabilizer on load
Apply variable Input
voltage
Determine Upper
&Lower cut off
Voltages
Observe rate of
Voltage correction
Identify CVT and its
terminals
Make Electrical
connections
Connect variable lamp
load
Apply variable input
Apply variable input
voltage using Auto
Transformer
Measure output
voltage
Note upper & Lower
voltage cut off points
voltage using Auto
Transformer
Measure output voltage
voltage using Auto
Transformer
Measure output
voltage
Identify LVDT
Connect the set up
Carefully Change the
LVDT core position and
measure transducer
output in steps
15
To draw the performance
characteristics of LVDT.(3)
Identify LVDT
Connect the set up
Carefully Change the
LVDT core position and
measure transducer
output in steps
16
To plot the performance
characteristics of
Thermocouple
transducer.(3)
Identify Thermocouple
transducer
Prepare experimental set
up
Increase the temperature
in steps
Measure the output
voltage
Identify Thermocouple
transducer
Prepare experimental
set up
Increase the
temperature in steps
Measure the output
voltage
17
To draw the performance
characteristics of RTD.(3)
Identify RTD transducer
Prepare experimental set
up
Increase the temperature
in steps
Measure the output
voltage
Identify RTD
transducer
Prepare experimental
set up
Increase the
temperature in steps
Measure the output
voltage
18
To measure the
temperature using IC LM
335.(3)
Identify LM335 IC
Identify its terminals
Rig up the basic circuit
Increase the temperature
in steps
Note down the
corresponding output
voltage
Identify LM335 IC
Identify its terminals
Rig up the basic circuit
Increase the
temperature in steps
Note down the
corresponding output
voltage
19
To implement an ON
Identify and select the
components
Identify the terminals of
LM 335
Rig up the circuit
Connect the relay board
Apply heat and set the cut
off temperature
Test over designed
Temperature Range
Identify and select the
components
Identify the terminals of
LM 335
Rig up the circuit
Connect the relay
board
Apply heat and set the
cut off temperature
Test over designed
Temperature Range
/OFF temperature
controller using IC LM335
.(3)
I -312
20
To draw the characteristics
of Load cell.(3)
Identify Load cell
Identify Load cell
transducer
transducer
Prepare experimental set
Prepare experimental
up
set up
Increase the Load in steps Increase the Load in
Measure the output
steps
voltage
Measure the output
voltage
PART B – PLC Experiments/Simulation
21
To get familiarized with
PLC tutor or PSIM.(3)
Identify the PLC
Note down the
manufacturer’s details
Get acquainted with
symbols and ladder
diagrams
Identify the sections of
PSIM GUI
Identify the PLC
Note down the
manufacturer’s details
Get acquainted with
symbols and ladder
diagrams
Identify the sections of
PSIM GUI
22
Using the PLCs to build
basic logic gates To
implement basic gates
using PLC
 Implement the circuit
Using PSIM
Verify the truth tables of
Logic Gates
Verify the truth table of
XOR &XNOR Gates
Implement the circuit
Using PSIM
Verify the truth tables
of Logic Gates
Verify the truth table of
XOR &XNOR Gates
Develop Ladder
diagram
Implement Using
PSIM
Simulate and verify
Develop Ladder
diagram
Implement Using
PSIM
Simulate and verify
Develop Ladder
diagram
Implement Using
PSIM
Simulate and verify
To implement XOR XNOR
gates using PLC.(3)
23
To implement delay timers
using PLC.(3)
Develop Ladder diagram
Implement Using PSIM
Simulate and verify
24
To implement on timer and
off timer using PLC.(3)
Develop Ladder diagram
Implement Using PSIM
Simulate and verify
25
To implement up counter
and down counter.(3)
Develop Ladder diagram
Implement Using PSIM
Simulate and verify
I -313
26
To implement start/Stop
Motor control.(3)
Develop Ladder diagram
Implement Using PSIM
Simulate and verify
27
To implement Two way
switch control.(3)
Develop Ladder diagram
Implement Using PSIM
Simulate and verify
28
To implement sequential
motor control Motors with
a delay(3)
Develop Ladder diagram
Implement Using PSIM
Simulate and verify
29
To implement Motor
forward and reverse
direction control. .(3)
Develop Ladder diagram
Implement Using PSIM
Simulate and verify
Develop Ladder
diagram
Implement Using
PSIM
Simulate and verify
30
To implement a Traffic
Light controller.(3)
Develop Ladder diagram
Implement Using PSIM
Simulate and verify
Develop Ladder
diagram
Implement Using
PSIM
Simulate and verify
I -314
Develop Ladder
diagram
Implement Using
PSIM
Simulate and verify
Develop Ladder
diagram
Implement Using
PSIM
Simulate and verify
Develop Ladder
diagram
Implement Using
PSIM
Simulate and verify
Verilog HDL lab Practice
Subject title
:
Verilog HDL lab Practice
Subject code
:
EC-608
Periods per week
:
3
Periods / Semester :
45
Rationale: This laboratory course is Included to reinforce and practically verify the theoretical
inputs learnt in the theory part of this semester without losing the contiguity. Further this course
also helps the students to experiment with latest tools used in the VLSI
Circuit design which gives the students an edge over others .
TIME SCHEDULE
Sl
Major Topics
Periods
Weightage
of Marks
Short
Type
Essay Type
1
implementing basic logic
gates
15
19
3
1
2
Combinational circuits
16
29
3
2
3
Sequential circuits
15
26
2
2
4
Registers
10
26
2
2
5
Counters
4
10
-
1
60
110
10
8
TOTAL
I -315
List of Experiments
1. To Familiarize with MultiSIm simulation software for verilog HDL
2. To implement Basic Logic Gates
3. To implement i) Half adder and ii) Full Adder
4. To implement i) Half Subtractor and ii) Full Subtractor
5. To implement 4-bit Parallel Adder
6. To implement 4:1 Multiplexers
7. To implement 1:4 Demultiplexers
8. To implement 3:8 Decoders
9. To implement 8:3 Encoders
10. To implement 4-bit Comparator
11. To implement SR-Flip flop
12. To implement) JK- Flip Flop
13. To implement D- Flip Flop)
14. To implement i) SISO ii) SIPO Shift Registers
15. To implement a Decimal counter
Competencies and Key Competencies to be achieved
Exp
no
Name of the experiment
1
To Familiarize with
Key competencies
Familiarize with MultiSim
Interface
Create a directory for the
project
Start ModelSim and
create a new project
Enter the code
Add verilog file to the
project
Compile your verilog files
Start the simulation
Add signals to the wave
window
Recompile changed
verilog files
Restart/Run the
simulation
Familiarize with
MultiSim Interface
Create a directory for
the project
Start ModelSim and
create a new project
Enter the code
Add verilog file to the
project
Compile your verilog
files
Start the simulation
Add signals to the
wave window
Recompile changed
verilog files
Restart/Run the
simulation
Create a directory for
the project
(NO of Periods)
Multi SIm simulation
software for verilog HDL (3)
2
Competencies
To implement Basic Logic
Create a directory for the
project
I -316
3
Gates (3)
Start ModelSim and
create a new project
Enter the code
Add verilog file to the
project
Compile your verilog files
Start the simulation
Add signals to the wave
window
Recompile changed
verilog files
Restart/Run the
simulation
To implement
Design the logic
Enter the code
Add verilog file to the
project
Compile your verilog files
Start the simulation
Add signals to the wave
window
Recompile changed
verilog files

i) Half adder and ii) Full
Adder (3)
4
To implement
i) Half Subtractor and
ii) Full Subtractor (3)
Start ModelSim and
create a new project
Enter the code
Add verilog file to the
project
Compile your verilog
files
Start the simulation
Add signals to the
wave window
Recompile changed
verilog files
Restart/Run the
simulation
Design the logic
Enter the code
Add verilog file to the
project
Compile your verilog
files
Start the simulation
Add signals to the
wave window
Recompile changed
verilog files
Design the logic
Enter the code
Add verilog file to the
project
Compile your verilog files
simulate
Design the logic
Enter the code
Add verilog file to the
project
Compile your verilog
files
simulate
5
To implement 4-bit Parallel
Adder (3)
Design the logic
Enter the code
Add verilog file to the
project
Compile your verilog files
simulate
Design the logic
Enter the code
Add verilog file to the
project
Compile your verilog
files
simulate
6
To implement 4:1
Multiplexers (3)
Design the logic
Enter the code
Add verilog file to the
project
Compile your verilog files
I -317
Design the logic
Enter the code
Add verilog file to the
project
Compile your verilog
simulate
files
simulate
7
To implement 1:8
Demultiplexer (3)
Design the logic
Enter the code
Add verilog file to the
project
Compile your verilog files
simulate
Design the logic
Enter the code
Add verilog file to the
project
Compile your verilog
files
simulate
8
To implement 3:8 Decoder
(3)
Design the logic
Enter the code
Add verilog file to the
project
Compile your verilog files
simulate
Design the logic
Enter the code
Add verilog file to the
project
Compile your verilog
files
simulate
9
To implement 8:3 Encoder
(3)
Design the logic
Enter the code
Add verilog file to the
project
Compile your verilog files
simulate
Design the logic
Enter the code
Add verilog file to the
project
Compile your verilog
files
simulate
10
To implement 4-bit
Comparator (3)
Design the logic
Enter the code
Add verilog file to the
project
Compile your verilog files
simulate
Design the logic
Enter the code
Add verilog file to the
project
Compile your verilog
files
simulate
Design the logic
Enter the code
Add verilog file to the
project
Compile your verilog files
simulate
Design the logic
Enter the code
Add verilog file to the
project
Compile your verilog
files
simulate
Design the logic
Enter the code
I -318
Design the logic
Enter the code
11
To implement SR-Flip flop
(3)
12
To implement JK Flip Flop
(3)
Add verilog file to the
project
Compile your verilog files
simulate
Add verilog file to the
project
Compile your verilog
files
simulate
13
To implement D Flip Flop
(3)
Design the logic
Enter the code
Add verilog file to the
project
Compile your verilog files
simulate
Design the logic
Enter the code
Add verilog file to the
project
Compile your verilog
files
simulate
14
To implement i) SISO
Design the logic
Enter the code
Add verilog file to the
project
Compile your verilog files
simulate
Design the logic
Enter the code
Add verilog file to the
project
Compile your verilog
files
simulate
Design the logic
Enter the code
Add verilog file to the
project
Compile your verilog files
simulate
Design the logic
Enter the code
Add verilog file to the
project
Compile your verilog
files
simulate
ii) SIPO Shift Register (3)
15
To implement a Decimal
counter
(3)
Tools Required:
Xilinx ISE 9.2i simulator and Modelsim Software
i
I -319
Advanced Micro Controllers Lab Practice
Subject title
: Advanced Micro Controllers Lab Practice
Subject code
: EC-609
Periods per week
: 4
Periods / Semester
: 60
Rationale: This laboratory course is Included to reinforce and practically verify the theoretical
inputs learnt in the theory part of this semester without losing the contiguity. Further this course
also helps the students to experiment with Advanced Microcontrollers like ARM which gives
the students an edge over others and better employment opportunities.
TIME SCHEDULE
Sl
Major Topics
Periods
Weightage
of Marks
Short
Type
Essay Type
1
Programming PIC Controller
for data processing
15
19
3
1
2
Interfacing DAC
16
29
3
2
3
Interfacing Sensors & ADC
15
26
2
2
4
Programming ARM
Controllers
10
26
2
2
60
110
10
8
TOTAL
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Write C PROGRAM FOR PIC16F877to add two 16-bit operands
2. Write C PROGRAM FOR PIC16F877to add two 32-bit operands
3. Write C PROGRAM FOR PIC16F877to subtract two 16-bit operands
I -320
4. Write C PROGRAM FOR PIC16F877to multiply two operands
5. Write C PROGRAM to generate a Square wave by interfacing 8-bit bipolar DAC with
PIC16F877
6. Write C PROGRAM to generate a Sine wave by interfacing 8-bit bipolar DAC with
PIC16F877
7. Write C PROGRAM to interface ADC module with PIC16F877
14. Write C PROGRAM to generate PWM by interfacing ADC module with PIC16F877
8. Write C PROGRAM to design a digital thermometer to display the temperature in 0C using
PIC16C71
9. Write C PROGRAM to design a LVDT interfacing with PIC16C71 using AD698
10 Write C PROGRAM to add two 16-bit operands using ARM controller
11. Write C PROGRAM to add two 32-bit operands using ARM controller
12. Write C PROGRAM to subtract two 16-bit operands using ARM controller
13. Write C PROGRAM to multiply two operands using ARM controller
14.Write C Progran to generate a triangular WAVE using the ARM Controller
15. Write a C program to Sample a Sine wave at 1000 Samples/second and store
The samples in memory using ARM Processor and ADC
Competencies and Key Competencies to be achieved
Exp
No
Name of the Experiment
Competencies
Key Competencies
1
Write C PROGRAM FOR
 Enter the Program in
Editor
 Compile and Execute
 Verify the Result
 Enter the Program in
Editor
 Compile and Execute
 Verify the Result
PIC16F877to add two 16bit operands
I -321
2
. Write C PROGRAM FOR
PIC16F877to add two 32bit operands3.
3
Write C PROGRAM FOR
PIC16F877to subtract two
16-bit operands
4
Write C PROGRAM FOR
PIC16F877to multiply two
operands
5
Write C PROGRAM to
generate a Square wave by
interfacing 8-bit bipolar
DAC with PIC16F877
6
6. Write C PROGRAM to
generate a Sine wave by
interfacing 8-bit bipolar
DAC with PIC16F877
7
Write C PROGRAM to
interface ADC module with
PIC16F877 .Use a Variable
 Enter the Program in
Editor
 Compile and Execute
 Verify the Result
 Enter the Program in
Editor
 Compile and Execute
 Verify the Result
 Enter the Program in
Editor
 Compile and Execute
 Verify the Result
 Enter the Program in
Editor
 Compile and Execute
 Verify the Result
 Enter the Program in
Editor
 Compile and Execute
 Verify the Result
 Enter the Program in
Editor
 Compile and Execute
 Verify the Result
 Enter the Program in
Editor
 Compile and Execute
 Enter the Program in
Editor
 Compile and Execute
 Verify the Result
 Observe the
Waveform using
CRO
 Enter the Program in
Editor
 Compile and Execute
 Observe the
Waveform using CRO
 Enter the Program in
Editor
 Compile and Execute
 Verify the Result
 Enter the Program in
Editor
 Compile and Execute
 Tabulate the readings
 Enter the Program in
Editor
 Compile and Execute
 Verify the Result
 Enter the Program in
Editor
 RIG Up The Circuit
 Compile and Execute
 Enter the Program in
Editor
 Compile and Execute
 Verify the Result
Analog TEST Signal
Observe the readings on
DIGITAL DISPLAY
INTERFACE
8
8. Write C PROGRAM to
design a digital
thermometer to display the
temperature in 0C using
PIC16C71 and Digital
Display Unit
I -322
9
Write C PROGRAM to
design a LVDT interfacing
 Enter the Program in
Editor
 Rig up the circuit
with PIC16C71 using
AD698. And observe the
readings on Digital Display
 Enter the Program in
Editor
 Compile and Execute
 Verify the Result
 Compute and
Execute
Unit
10
Write C PROGRAM to add
two 16-bit operands using
ARM controller
11
Write C PROGRAM to add
two 32-bit operands using
ARM controller
12
Write C PROGRAM to
subtract two 16-bit
operands using ARM
 Enter the Program in
Editor
 Compile and Execute
 Verify the Result
 Enter the Program in
Editor
 Compile and Execute
 Verify the Result
 Enter the Program in
Editor
 Compile and Execute
 Verify the Result
 Enter the Program in
Editor
 Compile and Execute
 Verify the Result
 Enter the Program in
Editor
 Compile and Execute
 Verify the Result
 Enter the Program in
Editor
 Compile and Execute
 Verify the Result
 Enter the Program in
Editor
 Compile and Execute
 Verify the Result
 Enter the Program in
Editor
 Compile and Execute
 Verify the Result
 Enter the Program in
Editor
 Compile and Execute
 Observe the
Waveform using CRO
 Enter the Program in
Editor
 Compile and Execute
 Verify the Result
 Enter the Program in
Editor
 Compile and Execute
 Enter the Program in
Editor
 Compile and Execute
 Verify the Result
controller
13
Write C PROGRAM to
multiply two operands using
ARM controller
14
.Write C Program to
generate a triangular
WAVE using the ARM
Controller
15
Write a C program to
Sample a Sine wave at
1000 Samples/second and
store in simulator Memory
 Tabulate the
Readings
I -323
Subject Title
:
Project Work
Subject Code
:
EC- 610
Periods / Week
:
06
Periods / Semester
:
90
OBJECTIVES
On completion of the subject duration the student should be able to perform the following
1.0
Project work
1.1
Identifies different works to be carried out in the Project.
1.2
Collects data relevant to the project work.
1.3
Carry out need survey.
1.4
Select the most efficient method from the available choices based on preliminary
investigation.
1.5
Design the required elements of the project work as per standard practices.
1.6
Prepares the working modules / equipments required for the project work.
1.7
Estimates the cost of project, technological need, computer skills, materials and other
equipments.
1.8
Prepares the plan and schedule of starting time and sequence of operations to be
carried out at the various stages of the project work in detail.
1.9
Preparation of critical activities at the various stages of the project work.
1.10
Tests to be carried at various conditions with different electrical input parameter if
required.
1.11
To implementation of project work and recording the results at various places.
1.12.
Collects the necessary information to procure necessary finance, and
I -324
equipment.
1.13
Preparation of the chart or model for each of the project.
1.14
Preparation of project report.
2.0
Report on observations in Industrial visits
2.1
Visit nearby electronics/communication engineering industries
COURSE CONTENT
Project work is intended to provide training in the solution of various fields of engineering
problems relating to
Rural Communication Systems: Connection remotely scattered hamlets with wireless
technology.
Energy Saving Equipments:
Replacing of Tungsten filament lamps with effective To
implementation of LED, CFL Lamps at various applications.
Automobile Field: Solar Operated Vehicles, Battery Operated Vehicles with remote Operated
electrical Devices involving power control with wireless technology.
Embedded Systems:
Various applications in industry involving the microcontrollers for
automation and efficient supervision of the systems.
Power Devices: Inverter, SCR based applications, UPS and Automatic switching DG Sets etc.
Project work will also include the To implementation of Innovative Ideas which improves
the nation growth and preparation of the feasibility report for any one type of enterprise under
self – employment schemes also.
Students shall be divided into groups of five each and shall be assigned a problem that
calls for application of the Explainledge he/she acquired in the course and also which involves
some extra study of reference materials.
I -325
Every student should prepare a project report and submit the same for assessment.
Every student puts his share to the work in all the operations of the project. The end
examination in Project work shall consist of power point presentation and Viva-voce test to be
assessed by a panel of examiners comprising of an External examiner, the Head of Section,
and member of staff who guided the project as Internal examiner.
Scheme of assessment
1)
Seminar
-
20 Marks
2)
Internal assessment
-
20 Marks
3)
Power point presentation,
-
60 Marks
Report & Viva-Voce (3x20)
-------Total Marks
100
-
--------
I -326
Download PDF
Similar pages